CopyrightThis document is Copyright © 2023 by the LibreOffice Documentation Team. Contributors arelisted below. This document maybe distributed and/or modified under the terms of either the GNU
General Public License (https://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html), version 3 or later, or the Creative
Commons Attribution License (https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/), version 4.0 or later.
All trademarks within this guide belong to their legitimate owners.

Contributors
Contributors for this edition:Peter Schofield

Socks EightContributors for previous editions:
Claire Wood
Dave Barton
Elzett Kotze
Hazel Russman
Jean Hollis WeberJohn A Smith
John Cleland
Kees Kriek
Low Song Chuan
Martin Fox

Michele Zarri
Peter Schofield
Rachel Kartch
Regina Henschel
Ron Faile Jr.

Vipul Gupta
Winston Min Tjong

Feedback
Please direct any comments or suggestions about this document to the Documentation Team
mailing list: loguides@community.documentfoundation.org.

Note
Everything sent to a mailing list, including email addresses and any otherpersonal information that is written in the message, is publicly archived andcannot be deleted.

Publication date and software version
Published August 2023. Based on LibreOffice 7.5 Community.
Other versions of LibreOffice may differ in appearance and functionality.

Documentation for LibreOffice is available at https://documentation.libreoffice.org/en/Contents
Copyright....................................................................................................................................2

Preface.............................................................................................................................. 7
Who is this user guide for?.........................................................................................................8
What is in this user guide?..........................................................................................................8
What is LibreOffice?...................................................................................................................8
Minimum requirements for using LibreOffice..............................................................................8
How to get LibreOffice................................................................................................................8
Installing LibreOffice...................................................................................................................9
Setting up and customizing LibreOffice......................................................................................9
Extensions and add-ons.............................................................................................................9
Where to get more help..............................................................................................................9
What you see maybe different..................................................................................................11
Using LibreOffice on macOS....................................................................................................13
Who wrote this user guide?......................................................................................................14
Frequently asked questions......................................................................................................14
What is new in LibreOffice 7.5?................................................................................................15

Chapter 1, Introducing Draw.........................................................................................17
Introduction...............................................................................................................................18
Draw main window....................................................................................................................18
Choosing and defining colors...................................................................................................26
Grid, snap guides, and helplines..............................................................................................28

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes................................................................................29
Introduction...............................................................................................................................30
Drawing basic shapes...............................................................................................................30
Gluepoints and connectors.......................................................................................................41
Drawing geometric shapes.......................................................................................................42
Adding, inserting and formatting text........................................................................................45

Chapter 3, Working with Objects..................................................................................47
Introduction...............................................................................................................................48
Selecting objects.......................................................................................................................48
Positioning and adjusting objects.............................................................................................49
Using grid and snap functions..................................................................................................60
Using Helplines.........................................................................................................................65
Changing object shape.............................................................................................................66

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes........................................................................79
Formatting lines........................................................................................................................80
Area fills....................................................................................................................................89
Working with area fills...............................................................................................................91
Working with shadows............................................................................................................107
Working with transparencies...................................................................................................109
Drawing styles.........................................................................................................................110

LibreOffice Draw User Guide | 3

Special effects.........................................................................................................................115

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects.....................................................................123
Grouping objects.....................................................................................................................124
Combining, splitting, breaking, and connecting......................................................................126
Merging, subtracting, or intersecting objects..........................................................................129
Duplication and cross-fading..................................................................................................132
Positioning objects..................................................................................................................135

Chapter 6, Editing Images...........................................................................................139
Introduction.............................................................................................................................140
Importing images....................................................................................................................140
Exporting images....................................................................................................................144
Formatting images (raster objects).........................................................................................145
Cropping images.....................................................................................................................149
Image filters............................................................................................................................152
Replacing colors.....................................................................................................................157
Conversion..............................................................................................................................159

Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects...........................................................................163
Introduction.............................................................................................................................164
3D object types.......................................................................................................................164
Creating 3D objects................................................................................................................165
Editing 3D objects...................................................................................................................168
Combining objects..................................................................................................................181
Assembling 3D objects...........................................................................................................183

Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts..............................185
Connectors and gluepoints.....................................................................................................186
Flowcharts..............................................................................................................................195
Organization charts.................................................................................................................196

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text.....................................................................199
Introduction.............................................................................................................................200
Text mode...............................................................................................................................200
Text boxes...............................................................................................................................201
Text in Draw objects................................................................................................................208
Pasting text.............................................................................................................................210
Formatting text........................................................................................................................211
Unordered or ordered lists......................................................................................................215
Text columns...........................................................................................................................218
Text animation.........................................................................................................................221
Text callouts............................................................................................................................222
Tables in Draw........................................................................................................................225
Using fields.............................................................................................................................235
Using hyperlinks.....................................................................................................................236
Image maps............................................................................................................................241
Fontwork.................................................................................................................................243
4| LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing...........................................................247
Introduction.............................................................................................................................248
Default printer setup...............................................................................................................248
Quick printing..........................................................................................................................248
Linux or Windows printing.......................................................................................................249
macOS printing.......................................................................................................................252
Printing examples...................................................................................................................257
Exporting.................................................................................................................................260
Emailing documents...............................................................................................................264
Digital signatures....................................................................................................................265
Removing personal data.........................................................................................................265
Redaction................................................................................................................................267

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques...................................................................269
Drawing pages........................................................................................................................270
Master pages..........................................................................................................................274
Templates...............................................................................................................................279
Multiple layers.........................................................................................................................287
Dimensioning..........................................................................................................................291
Drawing to scale.....................................................................................................................295
Multiple views of a drawing.....................................................................................................296
Gallery....................................................................................................................................297
Colors.....................................................................................................................................300
Bézier curves..........................................................................................................................308
Adding comments...................................................................................................................311
Coordinate system..................................................................................................................312

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants............................................................................315
Introduction.............................................................................................................................316
Selecting user interface..........................................................................................................316
Standard Toolbar UI................................................................................................................317
Tabbed UI...............................................................................................................................317
Single Toolbar & Sidebar UI....................................................................................................323
Tabbed Compact UI................................................................................................................324
Groupedbar Compact UI.........................................................................................................325
Contextual Single UI...............................................................................................................325

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts...............................................................................327
Introduction.............................................................................................................................328
macOS keyboard shortcuts....................................................................................................328
Draw function key and keyboard shortcuts.............................................................................329
Menu function key and keyboard shortcuts............................................................................332
General function key and keyboard shortcuts........................................................................336
Toolbar function key and keyboard shortcuts.........................................................................337

Appendix B, Toolbars..................................................................................................343
Introduction.............................................................................................................................344
LibreOffice Draw User Guide | 5

Using toolbars.........................................................................................................................344
Toolbars..................................................................................................................................347
Sub-toolbars...........................................................................................................................361

6| LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Draw Guide 7.5

Preface
Drawing Vector Graphics in LibreOfficeWho is this user guide for?
Anyone who wants to quickly acquire knowledge on LibreOffice Draw and is new to drawing
software, or maybe familiar with another office suite, will find this user guide very useful.
LibreOffice is an open-source office productivity software suite containing capabilities for word
processing, spreadsheets, presentations, graphics, databases, and formula editing. LibreOffice
Draw is the vector graphics drawing application for LibreOffice where a wide variety of graphicalimages can be easily and quickly created. Drawings can be exported in several file formats, forexample, PDF, HTML, and numerous graphic formats.

What is in this user guide?
This user guide introduces the main features of LibreOffice Draw. Although Draw is a vector
graphics drawing tool, it can also perform some operations on raster graphics (pixels) such as
photographs.
A few examples of drawing functions are as follows:
Layer management, snap functions and grid-point system
Dimensions and measurement display
Connectors for making organization charts
3D functions that enable small 3D drawings to be created (with texture and lighting
effects), drawing and page-style integration, and Bézier curves.

What is LibreOffice?
LibreOffice is a freely available, fully-featured, open source office productivity suite that iscompatible with other major office suites and is available on a variety of platforms. The native fileformat used is Open Document Format (ODF). However, LibreOffice can also open and save
documents in many other formats, including those used by several versions of Microsoft Office.
For more information, see the Getting Started Guide.

Minimum requirements for using LibreOffice
LibreOffice 7.5 requires one of the following operating systems:
Linux x64 (deb) and Linux x64 (rpm)
Mac OS X (Aarch64/Apple Silicon)
macOS x86_64 (10.14 Mojave or higher)
Windows x86_64 (Windows 7 or newer required).
For a detailed list of requirements and operating systems supported, see the LibreOffice website,
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/system-requirements/.

How to get LibreOffice
Versions of LibreOffice for Windows, Linux, and macOS are freely available and can be
downloaded from https://www.libreoffice.org/download. Linux users will also find LibreOfficeincluded free in many of the latest distributions.
Linux, Vanilla, and other versions may differ in a few features from the descriptions in this user
guide. LibreOffice is included in many of the latest Linux distributions, for example Ubuntu.
Portable and other versions of LibreOffice are listed on the download page. LibreOffice is alsoavailable in the Microsoft Store and Apple Mac App Store at a low and attractive price. The profits
from the sale of LibreOffice are invested to support the development of the LibreOffice project.
8 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Installing LibreOfficeInformation on installing LibreOffice on the various supported operating systems can be found at
this web page: https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/install-howto/. When LibreOffice is acquired
through official app stores, follow the installation instructions provided by the store.

Setting up and customizing LibreOffice
After installation, to change the default settings (options) in LibreOffice to suit working
requirements and preferences, go to Tools > Options on the Menu bar (mac OS LibreOffice >Preferences).

Tip
Some settings are intended for power users and programmers. If it is difficult tounderstand what an option does, LibreOffice recommends leaving the option on
its default setting unless instructions in this user guide recommend changing thesetting.
Settings are described in LibreOffice Help and the Getting Started Guide. These two sources
provide information on how to customize menus, toolbars, and keyboard shortcuts in LibreOffice
Draw, add new menus and toolbars, and assign macros to events.

Extensions and add-ons
Functionality can be added to LibreOffice using extensions. Several extensions are installed with
LibreOffice and more extensions can be installed from the official extensions repository,
https://extensions.libreoffice.org/ or from other sources. See the Getting Started Guide for more
information on installing extensions.

Where to get more help
This user guide and other LibreOffice user guides, the built-in Help system, and user support
systems assume that users are familiar with computers and basic functions such as starting a
program, opening and saving files.

Help system
LibreOffice comes with an extensive Help system and this can be used as the first line of support.
Windows and Linux users can choose to download and install the offline Help for use when notconnected to the Internet. Offline Help is installed with the MacOS version of LibreOffice.
To display the LibreOffice Help, press F1 or go to Help > LibreOffice Help on the Menu bar. If
the offline help is not installed on a computer, but connected to the Internet, a dialog opens giving
the option to Read Help Online. Select this option and the default web browser opens at the
LibreOffice online help pages in the LibreOffice website.
The Help menu also includes links to other LibreOffice information, support facilities andresources that may be useful to LibreOffice users.

Preface | 9

What's This?
For quick tips when a toolbar is visible, place the cursor over a tool icon to see a small
tooltip box with a brief explanation of the tool function. For a more detailed explanation,
select Help > What's This? Also Extended Tips can be activated by going to Tools >Options > LibreOffice > General > Help (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >LibreOffice > General > Help) on the Menu bar and selecting the option Extended Tips.
Extended tips provide a brief description about tools and commands. To display anextended tip, use the keyboard Shift+F1, then point to a tool or command.
User Guides
Opens the default browser at the Documentation page of the LibreOffice website
https://documentation.libreoffice.org/en/english-documentation/. This page gives accessto the LibreOffice User Guides and other useful information that can be opened in thedefault browser. Also, the User Guides are available in PDF format as a free download or
to buy as printed copies.
Show Tip of the Day
Opens a small window with a random tip on how to use LibreOffice.
Search Commands
Opens a window where typing a few letters, or the name of a Menu bar command, forexample, quickly finds where the command is located. Clicking on a command in the
resulting list may open a relevant dialog or have other effects.
Get Help Online
Opens the default browser at the Ask LibreOffice forum of questions and answers fromthe LibreOffice community, https://ask.libreoffice.org/en/questions/.
Send Feedback
Opens the default browser at the Feedback page of the LibreOffice website
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/feedback/. From this page, bugs can be reported, newfeatures suggested and communicated with other users in the LibreOffice community.
Restart in Safe Mode
Opens a dialog window giving options to restart LibreOffice and reset the software to its
default settings. Restarting in safe mode also provides an opportunity to restore
LibreOffice from a backup.
Get Involved
Opens the default browser at the Get Involved page of the LibreOffice website,
https://www.libreoffice.org/community/get-involved/. Choose a topic of interest to help
improve the program.
Donate to LibreOfficeOpens the default browser at the Donation page for the LibreOffice website,
https://donate.libreoffice.org/ providing an opportunity to make a donation to support
LibreOffice.
License Information
Outlines the licenses under which LibreOffice is made available.
Check for Updates
Opens a dialog and checks the LibreOffice website for updates for the software version.
The dialog provides an opportunity to download and install any updates to LibreOffice.
About LibreOfficeOpens a dialog and displays information about the version of LibreOffice and theoperating system being used. This information is often requested if the community is
asked for help or assistance with the software (on macOS, this option is found under
LibreOffice on the Menu bar).

10 | LibreOffice Draw User GuideOther free online support
The LibreOffice community not only develops software, but provides free, volunteer-based
support. See Table 1 and the web page https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/. For comprehensive
online support from the community, look at mailing lists and the Ask LibreOffice website,
https://ask.libreoffice.org/en/questions/. Other user websites also offer free tips and tutorials.
Table 1: Free support for LibreOffice users
Free LibreOffice support
FAQs

Answers to frequently asked questions
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Faq

Mailing lists

Free community support is provided by a network of experiencedusers
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/mailing-lists/

Questions & Answers
andKnowledge BaseFree community assistance is provided in a Question & Answer
formatted web service. Search similar topics or open a new one in
https://ask.libreoffice.org/en/questions
The service is available in several other languages; just replace/en/ with de, es, fr, ja, ko, nl, pt, tr, and many others in the web
address above.

Native language
supportThe LibreOffice website in various languages
https://www.libreoffice.org/community/nlc/
Mailing lists for native languages
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Local_Mailing_Lists
Information about social networking
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Website/Web_Sites_services

Accessibility options

Information about available accessibility options.
https://www.libreoffice.org/get-help/accessibility/

OpenOffice Forum

Another forum that provides support for LibreOffice, among otheropen source office suites. https://forum.openoffice.org/en/forum/

Paid support and training
Support and training is available through service contracts from a vendor or consulting firm
specializing in LibreOffice. For information about certified professional support, see The
Document Foundation website: https://www.documentfoundation.org/gethelp/support/.
For schools, educational and research institutions, and large organizations, see
https://www.libreoffice.org/download/libreoffice-in-business/.

What you see maybe different
Illustrations
LibreOffice runs on Windows, Linux, and macOS operating systems, each of which has several
versions and can be customized by users (fonts, colors, themes, window managers). The
illustrations in this guide were taken from a variety of computers and operating systems.
Therefore, some illustrations will not look exactly like what is seen on a computer display.
Also, some dialogs may differ because of the settings selected in LibreOffice. Either use dialogs
from the computer system (default) or dialogs provided by LibreOffice.

Preface | 11

To change to using LibreOffice dialogs:
1) On Linux and Windows operating systems, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice >General on the Menu bar to open the dialog for general options.
2) On a Mac operating system, go to LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice > Generalon the Menu bar to open the dialog for general options.
3) Select Use LibreOffice dialogs in Open/Save dialogs to display the LibreOffice dialogs
on a computer display, as shown in Figure 1.
4) Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog.

Figure 1: Options LibreOffice dialog — General page

Figure 2: Options LibreOffice dialog — View page

12 | LibreOffice Draw User GuideIconsThe LibreOffice community has created icons for several icon sets, including Breeze, Colibre,
Elementary, Sifr, and Tango. Each user can select a preferred set. The icons used to illustratesome of the many tools available in LibreOffice may differ from the ones used in this guide. The
icons in this user guide have been taken from a LibreOffice installation that has been set todisplay the Colibre set of icons.
Change the icon set used in a LibreOffice installation as follows:
1) On Linux and Windows operating systems, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > View
on the Menu bar to open the dialog for view options.
2) On a Mac operating system, go to LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice > View on
the Menu bar to open the dialog for view options.
3) In Icon Theme select Colibre (SVG) from the options available in the drop down list as
shown in Figure 2.
4) In Icon Size, select Small from the drop down lists for Toolbar, Notebookbar and Sidebar,
as shown in Figure 2.
5) Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog.

Notes
Some Linux operating systems, for example Ubuntu, include LibreOffice as part ofthe installation and may not include the Colibre icon set. This icon set can be
downloaded from the software repository for the Linux operating system being
used.
Some previously included icon sets are now available only as extensions; see
https://extensions.libreoffice.org/?Tags%5B%5D=49 or search for specific ones.
For example, the People Gallery is available fromhttps://extensions.libreoffice.org/en/extensions/show/people-gallery.

Using LibreOffice on macOS
Some keystrokes and menu items are different on macOS from those used in Windows andLinux. Table 2 below gives some common substitutions for the instructions in this user guide. Fora more detailed list, see the application help.
Table 2: Example of macOS keyboard shortcuts
Windows or LinuxmacOS equivalent

EffectTools > Options on
Menu barLibreOffice > Preferenceson Menu bar

Access to setup options

Right-click

Ctrl+click and/or right-click
Opens a context menu
depending on computer
setup

Ctrl or Control⌘ and/or Cmd or Command,
Used with other keys
depending on keyboard

Alt⌥ and/or Alt or Option
depending on keyboard

Used with other keys

F11

⌘+T

Open the Styles deck in the
SidebarPreface | 13

Who wrote this user guide?
This user guide was written by volunteers from the LibreOffice community. Profits from sales
printed editions are used to benefit the community.

Frequently asked questions
How is LibreOffice licensed?
LibreOffice is distributed under the Open Source Initiative (OSI) approved Mozilla Public
License (MPL). See https://www.libreoffice.org/about-us/licenses/.
It is based on code from Apache OpenOffice made available under the Apache License
2.0 but also includes software that differs from version to version under a variety of other
Open Source licenses. New code is available under LGPL 3.0 and MPL 2.0.
Can LibreOffice be distributed to anyone?
Yes.
Can LibreOffice be sold?
Yes.
Can LibreOffice be used in a business?
Yes.
How many computers can LibreOffice be installed on?
As many as required.
Is LibreOffice available in different languages?
LibreOffice has been translated (localized for more than 80%, both UI and Help) into over46 languages, so a required language is probably supported. Localization is well under
way for another 30+ languages (50-80%) and for another 50+ languages help is morethan welcome. In addition, over 70 spelling, hyphenation, and thesaurus dictionaries areavailable for languages and dialects that do not have a localized program interface. The
dictionaries are available from the LibreOffice website at: www.libreoffice.org.
How can LibreOffice be freely available?
LibreOffice is developed and maintained by volunteers and has the backing of several
organizations. LibreOffice also relies upon donations from its users. To make a donation,
go to the following web page: https://www.libreoffice.org/donate/.
Can the programming code from LibreOffice be used when developing a software
application?
Yes, but follow the parameters set in the MPL and/or LGPL. Read the licenses:
https://www.mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.
Why is Java required to run LibreOffice? Is it written in Java?
LibreOffice is not written in Java; it is written in the C++ language. Java is one of several
languages that can be used to extend the software. The Java JDK/JRE is only required
for some features. The most notable one is the HSQLDB relational database engine.
Java is available at no cost. More information and download links to the appropriate
edition for an operating system can be found at: https://java.com/en/download/manual.jsp

Note
If the LibreOffice features that require Java are to be used, it is important that thecorrect 32-bit or 64-bit edition matches the installed version of LibreOffice. If Javais not to be used, nearly all LibreOffice features can still be used.

14 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

How can users contribute to LibreOffice?
Users can help with the development and user support of LibreOffice in many ways, andthere is no need to be a programmer. To start, check out this webpage:https://www.libreoffice.org/community/get-involved/. An interactive web page that guides
users in contributing with their best skills available at https://whatcanidoforlibreoffice.org.
Can the PDF copy of this user guide be distributed, or printed and copies sold?
Yes, as long as requirements are met for one of the licenses in the copyright statement at
the beginning of this user guide. There is no need to request special permission.
LibreOffice requests that users share with the LibreOffice project some of the profits madefrom sales of user guides, in consideration of all the work that LibreOffice volunteers have
put into producing user guides.
Donate to LibreOffice: https://www.libreoffice.org/donate/.

What is new in LibreOffice 7.5?
The LibreOffice 7.5 Release Notes are available at this link
https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/ReleaseNotes/7.5.
Also at this link, the release notes for earlier versions of LibreOffice are located giving more
information on the features that are included in LibreOffice.
Noticeable improvements or enhancements to this version include the following:• A new set of application and mime types icons as shown in Figure 3. The icon groups
are, from left to right, standard (apps), standard (mime types), macOS specific.
• Support for dark and high contrast operating system themes on Windows, macOS andLinux is improved.
• The Start Center can now filter recent documents by type.

Figure 3: New application icons

Preface | 15

Draw Guide 7.5

Chapter 1,
Introducing Draw

Introduction
LibreOffice Draw is a vector graphics drawing program, that can also perform some operations
on raster graphics (pixels). Using Draw, a wide variety of graphical images can easily and quickly
be created.
Vector graphics store and display an image as an assembly of simple geometric elements suchas lines, circles, and polygons, rather than a collection of pixels (points on the screen). Vector
graphics allow for easier storage and image scaling.
Draw is fully integrated into the LibreOffice suite simplifying exchanging graphics with all
LibreOffice modules. If an image is created in Draw, reusing it in a Writer document is relatively
easy. For example, select and copy the drawing in Draw and then paste the image directly into a
Writer document. Also, drawings can be worked on directly from within Writer or Impress, using a
subset functions and tools from Draw.
The functionality of LibreOffice Draw is extensive. Draw was not designed to rival high-end
graphics applications, but possesses more functionality than the drawing tools that are generally
integrated with the majority of office productivity suites. A few examples of drawing functions are
as follows:
Layer management
Magnetic grid-point system
Dimensions and measurement display
Connectors for making organization charts and other diagrams
3D functions for creating small three-dimensional drawings
Drawing and page-style integration
Bézier curves
This Draw Guide is not a course book to be worked through from beginning to end. Rather, it is areference work in which can be browsed for guidance on particular topics.
This document describes only the functions associated with Draw. Some concepts, such as file
management, or the way the LibreOffice environment works, are mentioned only briefly and arecovered in more detail in the Getting Started Guide.

Draw main window
Pages pane
In Draw, drawings can be split over several pages with multi-page drawings used mainly forpresentations. The Pages pane, on the left side of the Draw main window, provides an overview
pages created in a drawing. If the Pages pane is not visible, select View > Page Pane on the
Menu bar. To make changes to the page order, drag and drop one or more pages displayed in
the Pages pane.

Workspace
The large area in the center of the Draw main window (Figure 4) is the Workspace where
drawings are created. This drawing area can be surrounded with toolbars and information areas.
The number and position visible tools vary with the task being carried out, user preferences, andcomputer setup.
The maximum size of a drawing page in LibreOffice Draw is limited by the computer setup andthe page size that that can be set and used in the printer connected to the computer.

18 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 4: Draw Main Window
1)
2)
3)

Pages paneWorkspace
Sidebar4)
5)

Status bar
Layers bar

Sidebar
The Sidebar in Draw has five main decks and is similar to the Sidebar in the other LibreOfficemodules. To open a deck, click on its icon on the right of the Sidebar, or click on Sidebar
Settings at the top of the Sidebar and select a deck from the drop-down list. If the Sidebar is not
visible, select View > Sidebar on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+F5(macOS ⌘+F5).
Properties
Contains panels where properties of a selected object in a drawing are changed: Page,
Character, Paragraph, Area, Line, Effect, Shadow, Position and Size, Columns, andImage. Available panels depend on the selected object.
StylesProvides options to edit and apply available Drawing Styles to objects in a drawing.
When a style is edited or modified, changes are automatically applied to all elements
formatted using that style. In Draw, Presentation Styles are not available. New drawing
styles can be added to a drawing.
Gallery
Objects on the Gallery deck are inserted into a drawing either as a copy or as a link. The
Gallery is divided into themes: Arrows, BPMN (Business Process Model and Notation),
Bullets, Diagrams, Flow chart, Icons, Network, Shapes, and Sounds. New themes
are added to the Gallery. See Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques for more
information on using the Gallery.

Chapter 1, Introducing Draw | 19

Navigator
On the Navigator deck, pages and objects in a drawing are quickly selected. It is
recommended to use meaningful names for pages and objects in a drawing for easy
identification and location when using the Navigator.
ShapesProvides quick selection of some items available on the Drawing toolbar: Lines andArrows, Curves and Polygons, Connectors, Basic Shapes, Symbol Shapes, Block
Arrows, Flowchart, Callouts, Stars and Banners, and 3D Objects.

Status bar
The Status Bar (Figure 5) is located at the bottom of the Workspace in all LibreOffice modules.
To hide the Status Bar, select View on the Menu bar and deselect Status Bar from thesubmenu.

Note
The measurement units shown on the Status Bar are set by going to Tools >Options > LibreOffice Draw > General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >LibreOffice > General) on the Menu bar. These measurement units can bedifferent to the measurement units set for the rulers.
Slide (drawing) number
Shows the drawing pane number that is selected.
Information area
Shows which action is being carried out, or object type selected.
Master drawing
Indicates the master drawing in use.
Cursor position/Selected object sizeShows different information depending on whether objects are selected or not.
– When no object is selected, the position numbers show the current position (X and Y
coordinates) of the mouse cursor.
– When an object is selected and being resized with the mouse, the object size
numbers show the object size (width and height).

Figure 5: Status Bar
1)
2)
3)
4)

Slide (drawing) number
Information area
Master drawing
Cursor position

20 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

5)
6)
7)
8)

Selected object size
Document scaling factor
Unsaved changes
Digital signature

9)
10)
11)

Fit drawing
Zoom slider
Zoom percentage

– If an object is selected, the position numbers shows the X and Y coordinates of theupper-left corner and the object size number pair displays the object size. These
numbers do not relate to the object itself, but to the selection outline, which is thesmallest possible rectangle that can contain the visible object part or parts. See
Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Object Points for more information.
– When an object is selected, clicking in either of these areas opens the Position andSize dialog. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information.
Scaling factor of the document
Indicates how the drawing appears on the display. The default scaling factor is 1:1. Tochange the scaling factor, right-click on the scaling factor and select a scaling factor fromthe context menu that opens.
Unsaved changes
Indicates that the file needs saving. The icon displayed depends on the computer
operating system and setup. Clicking on this icon opens the Save as dialog if the file is
new and has not been saved before. If the file has been saved already, then clicking on
this icon automatically saves the file after any changes have been made.
Digital signature
Indicates if the document is digitally signed. The icon only appears if the drawing has adigital signature certificate. After the file has been saved, double clicking on this icon
opens the digital signatures dialog. See LibreOffice Help for more information on digital
signature certificates.
Fit drawing
Resizes the drawing so that the whole drawing appears in the Workspace.
Zoom slider and Zoom percentage
Adjusts and indicates the Workspace zoom percentage displayed. Double clicking onzoom percentage opens the Zoom & View Layout dialog.

Layers bar
A layer is a workplace where drawing elements and objects can be inserted. By default, theWorkspace consists of three layers (Layout, Controls and Dimension Lines) and the tabs forthese default layers appear at the Workspace bottom. The default layers cannot be deleted orrenamed, but layers can be added as and when necessary.
Tabs for layers appear in the Layers bar at the Workspace bottom. Use the Layers bar tonavigate between layers, add layers as required, or delete layers that have been created. For
more information on layers, see Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.

RulersRulers are positioned on the Workspace upper and left-hand sides. If the rulers are not visible,
select View > Rulers in the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+R(macOS ⌘+Shift+R). The rulers show the size of a selected object on the page using doublelines (highlighted in Figure 6). Also, rulers are used to manage object handles and guide lines
when positioning objects.
The page margins in the drawing area are represented on the rulers. Change the margins directlyon the rulers by dragging them with the cursor. The margin areas are normally indicated by agrayed out area on the rulers as shown in Figure 6, but this does depend on computer operating
system and setup.
To change the ruler measurement units, right-click on a ruler and select the measurement unit
from the drop down list, as shown in Figure 7 for the horizontal ruler. Measurement units for thehorizontal and vertical rulers can use different measurement units.
Chapter 1, Introducing Draw | 21

Figure 6: Rulers showing object size

Figure 7: Ruler measurement units

Toolbars
To display or hide the various Draw toolbars, select View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and selectthe toolbar required from the submenu. For example, the Standard and Drawing toolbars areshown by default, but the Line and Filling, Text Formatting, and Options toolbars are not shown.
The appearance of tool icons on toolbars depends on the computer operating system and theselection of icon style and size in Tools > Options > LibreOffice > View (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > LibreOffice > View).
The tools available on a toolbar are indicated, either, highlighting around the tool icon, or a check
mark as shown by the example in Figure 8. For more information about working with toolbars,
see Appendix B, Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide.
The four main toolbars used in Draw are as follows:Standard toolbar
The Standard toolbar (Figure 9) is similar for all LibreOffice components and is notdescribed in detail in this chapter. By default, it is locked into position at the top of theDraw main window.
Drawing toolbar
The Drawing toolbar (Figure 10) contains all the necessary functions for drawing various
geometric and freehand shapes, and for organizing them in the drawing. By default, it islocked into position on the left of the Draw main window. It is described in detail in
Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes.
22 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 8: Example of Visible Buttons

Figure 9: Standard toolbar

Figure 10: Drawing toolbar
Line and Filling toolbar
The Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 11) is used to modify the main properties of a drawing
object. The tools and pull-down lists vary according to the type of object selected. For
example, to change the style of a line, click on the up and down arrows for Line Style andselect the required style.
The functions on the Line and Filling toolbar are used to change the color, style, and widthof the line drawn, the fill color and style, and other properties of a selected object. If theselected object is a text frame, the Line and Filling toolbar is replaced by the Text
Formatting toolbar. For more information, see Chapter, 4 Changing Object Attributes.
Text Formatting toolbar
The Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 12) is similar to the Formatting toolbar in Writer. It isonly available when text, or a text object, has been selected in a drawing, replacing theLine and Filling toolbar. For more information, see Chapter, 4 Changing Object Attributes,
and Chapter 9 Adding and Formatting Text.

Chapter 1, Introducing Draw | 23

Figure 11: Line and Filling toolbar

Figure 12: Text Formatting toolbar

Adding and removing tools
The default set of tools on each toolbar can be modified using Visible Buttons. Adding or
removing a tool is as follows:
1) Either, right-click in an empty area on the toolbar, or click on the triangle ▼ in the toolbar
title and select Visible Buttons from the context menu.
2) Click on a tool name in the submenu that opens to add or remove the tool.

Note
For more information on the available tools that can be added to a toolbar, see
Appendix B, Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide. When a tool is added to a
toolbar, its position on the toolbar (from left to right) is the same as its position in
the Visible Buttons context menu.

Available toolsets
Some tools on a toolbar have a triangle ▼ to the right side of the tool icon indicating that the tool
has additional tools available in a sub-toolbar. Clicking on this triangle ▼ displays the full set ofavailable tools (Figure 13).
This palette, or sub-toolbar, can be turned into a floating toolbar. Click the area at the top of thetoolset (highlighted in Figure 13) and drag it across the screen to a convenient location, thenrelease the cursor. To close a floating toolbar, click on the X on the right of the toolbar title.

Tip
When double-clicking on a tool, the command corresponding to that tool becomes
active and remains active. The tool command can be repeated as often as
required. To exit from this mode, press the Esc key or click on another tool.
Please note that this may not work for every tool on every toolbar.

24 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 13: Example of available toolsets

Figure 14: Example of toolbar handles

Note
When a sub-toolbar is made into a floating toolbar, the tool on the existing toolbar
remains in the toolbar and always shows the last tool used. This means that thetool icon on a screen may differ from the tool icon shown in this guide.

Unlocking and locking toolbars
By default when Draw is opened, any docked toolbars are locked into position and have to be
unlocked before becoming floating toolbars or repositioned on the Draw main window. The
locking status of toolbars is indicated by dotted handles at the left end of horizontal toolbars, as
shown highlighted in Figure 14. For vertically positioned toolbars, these dotted handles are
positioned at the toolbar top.

Notes
Make sure that all toolbars are docked into the required position in the LibreOfficewindow before using Lock Toolbars or Lock Toolbar Position.
No dotted handles on toolbars indicates that the toolbars are locked and thefollowing procedures have to be used to unlock toolbars.
All toolbars available in LibreOffice can be locked into position. This overrides any unlocking ofindividual toolbars. To unlock or lock all the toolbars, use the following procedure:
1) Make sure all open LibreOffice documents have been saved.
2) To unlock all toolbars, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Lock Toolbars
from the context menu.
3) Select Restart Now from the warning message that opens and all toolbars can now be
individually unlocked. Toolbar handles now appear on individual toolbars that are notlocked.
4) To lock all toolbars, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Lock Toolbars
from the context menu.
Chapter 1, Introducing Draw | 25

5) Select Restart Now from the warning message that opens and all toolbars are now
locked into position. Toolbar handles are no longer displayed.
Individual toolbars can be unlocked or locked using the following procedure:
1) To unlock a toolbar, right-click in a blank area on the toolbar and select Lock Toolbar
Position from the context menu. A toolbar handle appears at the end of the toolbar,
indicating that the toolbar is unlocked and can be moved.
2) To lock a toolbar into position, dock the toolbar into position, then right-click in a blankarea on the toolbar and select Lock Toolbar Position from the context menu. The toolbar
handle disappears from the end of the toolbar.

Note
There is no selection indication on Lock Toolbars, or Lock Toolbar Position in thecontext menus. The locking indication is only indicated by the toolbar handles.

Undocking toolbars
When Draw is opened, the Standard and Drawing toolbars, by default, are already docked into
their positions on the main Draw window. These toolbars can be undocked creating floating
toolbars as follows:
1) Make sure the toolbar handle is displayed indicating that the toolbar is unlocked. If there
is no toolbar handle displayed, see “Unlocking and locking toolbars” on page 25 for more
information.
2) Move the cursor to the far left of the toolbar and over the toolbar handle. The cursor
changes shape, normally to a grabbing hand, depending on computer setup andoperating system.
3) Click and drag on the toolbar handle and move the toolbar until it is undocked andbecomes a floating toolbar. This floating toolbar capability is common to all components ofLibreOffice.

Docking toolbars
To dock a floating toolbar use one of the following methods:• Press and hold the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘), then double click on the toolbar title. The
toolbar moves into available space at the top of the Draw main window.
• Click in the toolbar title and drag the toolbar to the docked position required. This can be
the top, bottom or one of the sides of the Draw main window.

Customizing toolbars
Draw toolbars can be customized by adding or removing commands to or from a toolbar. Also,
customization allows the creation of toolbars for specific purposes. Customizing toolbars is inaddition to using “Adding and removing tools” on page 24. For more information on adding newcommands, modifying toolbars, or creating toolbars, see Appendix B, Toolbars and the Getting
Started Guide.

Choosing and defining colors
Color palette
The Color Palette (Figure 15) provides quick access to a standard set of colors to use forselected objects and text in a drawing.

26 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 15: Color Palette (Color Bar)
1) Go to View on the Menu bar and select Color Bar to open the Color Palette.
2) Select an object or text.
3) Left click on the color required for the area fill, or text, and change the color of the object
or text.
4) Right click on the color required for the object, or text box border, and change the bordercolor.
5)

Go to View on the Menu bar and deselect Color Bar to close the Color Palette.

Note
The box with the X at the bottom left of the Color Palette corresponds to none (nocolor).

Specialized color palettes
In addition to the standard Color Palette, Draw has several specialized color palettes available,
giving a greater choice of color: for example, chart-palettes, material, html, and so on. After
selecting an object or text in a drawing, use one of the following to access the specialized color
palettes.
• Area or fill color — Color page in the Area dialog, Fill Color on the Drawing or Line andFilling toolbar, or Fill in the Area section in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
• Line color — Line page in the Line dialog, Line Color on the Drawing or Line and Filling
toolbar, or Color in the Line section in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
• Text color — Font Color tool on the Text Formatting toolbar, or Font Color in the
Character section in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
For more information on selecting a color and a color palette for an object or text, see Chapter 4,
Changing Object Attributes, Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text, and Chapter 11, Advanced
Draw Techniques.

Custom colors
In Draw, custom colors can be created using the Color Picker dialog, CMYK values, or RGB
values to match specific color schemes used, for example, by a company. For more detailed
information on creating custom colors and color palettes, as well as more information on CMYK
and RGB color schemes, refer to Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.
Chapter 1, Introducing Draw | 27

Grid, snap guides, and helplines
The grid, snap guides, and helplines in Draw act as drawing aids when moving and positioning
objects in a drawing. These drawing aids can be turned on or off as follows:• Line and Filling toolbar — click on Display Grid, or Helplines While Moving to turn thegrid or helplines on or off.
• Options toolbar — click on Display Grid, Display Snap Guides, or Helplines While
Moving to turn the grid, snap guides, or helplines on or off.
• Go to View > Grid and Helplines on the Menu bar and select, or deselect Display Grid,or Helplines While Moving on the submenu.
• Go to View > Snap Guides on the Menu bar and select, or deselect Display Snap
Guides on the submenu.
The grid and snap guides are displayed only on the screen and are not shown on a printed
drawing, or when the drawing is used in another LibreOffice module. The color, spacing andresolution of the grid points can be individually chosen for each axis. Draw also offers several
snap functions to position objects exactly in a drawing.
Helplines show the object position while moving and makes positioning an object much easier. If
this function is activated, pairs of vertical and horizontal lines enclosing the object are shown
while moving the object. These helplines extend to the drawing area edges.
For more information on the grid, snap guides, snap functions, and helplines, see Chapter 3,
Working with Objects and Object Points.

28 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Draw Guide 7.5

Chapter 2,
Drawing Basic Shapes

Introduction
LibreOffice Draw can create 2D and 3D objects and this chapter explains how to draw simple 2D
objects. The following chapters in this user guide describe how to work with and edit 2D objects.
For more information on 3D objects, see Chapter 7, Working with 3D Objects.
All shapes, such as lines, rectangles, and shapes are called objects. This is common notation invector drawing software.
Frequently used drawing tools are found on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 16) and this toolbar isnormally docked on the left side of the main Draw window. If the toolbar is not visible, go to View
> Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Drawing from the available options.
The Drawing toolbar can be unlocked and placed the Draw workspace as a floating toolbar.
Toolbars can be configured by adding, moving, hiding, or deleting tools. See Chapter 1,
Introducing Draw for more information.
When a shape is drawn, an object selected for editing, or text added to the drawing, theinformation field in the Status Bar (Figure 17) changes to reflect the action taken or in progress.
See Chapter 1, Introducing Draw for more information on the Status Bar.

Drawing basic shapes
Basic shapes, including text, are treated as objects in Draw. The default set of tools available fordrawing basic shapes on the Drawing toolbar are shown in Figure 16. To add more tools to the
Drawing toolbar, see Appendix B, Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide for more information.

Figure 16: Drawing toolbar

Figure 17: Status Bar
1)
2)
3)
4)

Slide (drawing) number
Information area
Master drawing
Cursor position

30 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

5)
6)
7)
8)

Selected object size
Scaling document factor
Unsaved changes
Digital signature

9)
10)
11)

Fit drawing
Zoom slider
Zoom percentage

Some tool icons on the Drawing toolbar change shape according to the last tool used from theselection of available tools. Each tool that has a triangle ▼ next to the tool icon indicates that
more tools are available. See “Drawing geometric shapes” on page 42 for information on theavailable shapes.

Note
When a basic shape is drawn, or one selected for editing, the information area atthe left side in the Status Bar changes to reflect the present action. For example
Line created, Text frame xxyy selected, and so on.

Straight lines
Creating lines
A straight line is the simplest element or object in Draw to create.
1) Use one of the following options to draw a straight line:– Click Insert Line on the Drawing toolbar.
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar and selectInsert Line from the options available.
– Click Insert Line in the Line and Arrows panel of the Shapes deck on the Sidebar(Figure 18).
2) Place the cursor at the starting point on the drawing, then click and drag the cursor to
draw a straight line.
3) Release when the end point is reached and a straight line is created. A selection handle
appears at each line end. The selection handle at the starting point of a line is slightly
larger than the selection handle at the end point (highlighted in Figure 19).
4) To snap the end of a straight line to the nearest grid point, hold down the Ctrl
(macOS ⌘) key while drawing the straight line. This is the default behavior of the Ctrl
key (macOS ⌘).
5) To restrict the drawing angle of a straight line to multiples of 45 degrees (0, 45, 90, 135,
and so on), hold down the Shift key while drawing a straight line. This is the default
behavior of the Shift key.

Figure 18: Lines and Arrows panel in Shapes deck on Sidebar

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 31

6) To draw a straight line symmetrically outwards in both directions from the start point, holddown the Alt (macOS ⌥) key to a straight line from the middle.

Notes
If the option View > Snap Guides > Snap to Grid on the Menu bar has been
selected, holding down the Ctrl (macOS ⌘) key while drawing a straight line
temporarily deactivates the Snap to Grid option.
If the option When creating or moving objects in the Constrain Objects sectionof Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Grid (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > LibreOffice Draw > Grid) has been selected, holding down the
Shift key temporarily deactivates this restriction.

Figure 19: Line starting point highlighted

Figure 20: Line dialog — Line page32 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 21: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 22: Line and Filling toolbar

Formatting lines
When a line is drawn, it uses default attributes for line style, line color, line width andtransparency. To change any of these attributes to the drawing requirements is as follows:
1) Select the straight line by clicking on it to display the selection handles.
2) Format the line style, line color, line width, or transparency from the options available
using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar to open the Line dialog (Figure 20).
– Right-click on the line and select Line from the submenu to open the Line dialog.
– Open the Line panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 21).
– Use the tools Line Style, Line Width, and Line Color on the Line and Filling toolbar(Figure 22).
3) Click on a line selection handle and drag the selection handle to increase or decrease theline length.

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 33

Lines and arrows
Draw classifies both lines and arrows as lines and are drawn like straight lines (for more
information, see “Straight lines” on page 31). Hovering the cursor over each tool in the Lines andArrows sub-toolbar (Figure 23), or the Line and Arrows panel in the Shapes deck on the
Sidebar, indicates what type of line or arrow each tool draws. The information field on the Status
Bar shows them only as lines.

Figure 23: Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar
Legend for Figure 23 numbered from left to right as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)

Insert Line
Line Ends with Arrow
Line with Circle/Arrow
Line with Square/Arrow

5)
6)
7)
8)

Line with Arrows
Line Starts with Arrow
Line with Arrow/Circle
Line with Arrow/Square

9)10)

Dimension Line
Line (45º)

Creating lines or arrows

Note
The tool icon for the last tool used on a sub-toolbar is already selected on the
Drawing toolbar. This makes it easier to use the same tool again.
1) Use one of the following methods to draw a line or arrow:– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar and selectthe type of line or arrow required from the options in the Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar(Figure 23).
– Select the type of line or arrow required in the Lines and Arrows panel of the Shapes
deck on the Sidebar (Figure 18 on page 31).
2) Place the cursor at the starting point for the line or arrow, then click and drag the cursor.
The arrowheads are drawn at the line ends when the line is completed.
3) For more information on how to draw lines and arrows, see “Straight lines” on page 31.

Formatting lines or arrows
After drawing a line or arrow, make sure it is selected and format the line or arrow to the drawing
requirements using one of the following methods:
1) To format the line used for an arrow, see “Straight lines” on page 31 for more information.
2) To format an arrow using the same arrowhead style for both arrow ends:a) Select the arrow so that the selection handles are displayed.
b) Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar or right-click on the arrow to open the Linedialog.
c) Click on Arrow Styles to open the Arrow Styles page (Figure 24) and select an arrowstyle from the options available in the Arrow style drop-down list.
d) Click OK to apply the arrow style and close the Line dialog.
e) Click in an empty space on the drawing to deselect the arrow.
34 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 24: Line dialog — Arrow Styles page

Figure 25: Arrowhead styles in Line panel on Properties deck in Sidebar
3) To format an arrow using different arrowhead styles for each arrow end:a) Select the arrow so that the selection handles are displayed.
b) Open the Line panel on the Properties deck of the Sidebar (Figure 25).

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 35c) In Line, click on Arrow Style to open the drop-down list for arrowhead styles.
d) Select an arrowhead style from the left-hand list of arrowhead styles for the arrow startpoint.
e) Select an arrowhead style from the right-hand list of arrowhead styles for the arrow
end point.
f) Click in an empty space on the drawing to deselect the arrow.

Rectangles or squares
1) Use one of the following methods to start drawing a rectangle or square:– Click on Rectangle on the Drawing toolbar.
– Select the type of rectangle or square in the Basic Shapes panel in the Shapes deckon the Sidebar (Figure 26).

Figure 26: Shapes deck on Sidebar

Figure 27: Legacy Rectangles toolbar
36 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar and select thetype of rectangle or square required from the drop-down list.
– Select the type of rectangle or square on the Legacy Rectangles toolbar (Figure 27).
To display the Legacy Rectangles toolbar, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar
and select it.
2) Place the cursor at the starting point for the rectangle or square, then click and drag the
cursor until the required size is drawn. The rectangle or square is drawn from the starting
point using the bottom right corner as the anchor point for the cursor.
3) If necessary, use one of the following options to draw a rectangle or square:– If a rectangle option is selected, hold down the Shift key while dragging the cursor
to draw a square.
– If a rectangle option is selected, hold down the Alt key while dragging the cursor to
draw a rectangle from its center.
– If a rectangle option is selected, hold down the Shift and Alt keys while dragging
the cursor to draw a square from its center.
– If a square option is selected, hold down the Shift key while dragging the cursor to
draw a rectangle.
– If a square option is selected, hold down the Alt key while dragging the cursor to
draw a square from its center.

Note
If the option When creating or moving objects has been selected in the Constrain
Object section of Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Grid (macOS
LibreOffice> Preferences > LibreOffice Draw > Grid), the action of the Shift
key reversed. A square is drawn instead of a rectangle. To draw a rectangle, holddown the Shift key. This reversal of Shift key action also applies whendrawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and segments.

Ellipses or circles
1) Use one of the following methods to start drawing an ellipse or circle:– Click on Ellipse on the Drawing toolbar.
– Select the type of ellipse or circle in the Basic Shapes panel in the Shapes deck on
the Sidebar.
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar and select thetype of ellipse or circle required from the drop-down list.
– Select the type of ellipse or circle on the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar(Figure 28). To display the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar, go to View > Toolbars
on the Menu bar and select it.

Figure 28: Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 37

2) Place the cursor at the starting point for the ellipse or circle, then click and drag the cursor
until the required size is drawn. The ellipse or circle is drawn from the starting point using
the bottom right corner as the anchor point for the cursor.
3) If necessary, use one of the following options while drawing an ellipse or circle:– If an ellipse option is selected, hold down the Shift key while dragging the cursor to
draw a circle.
– If an ellipse option is selected, hold down the Alt key while dragging the cursor to
draw an ellipse from its center.
– If an ellipse option is selected, hold down the Shift and Alt keys while dragging the
cursor to draw a circle from its center.
– If a circle option is selected, hold down the Shift key while dragging the cursor to
draw an ellipse.
– If a circle option is selected, hold down the Alt key while dragging the cursor to draw
a circle from its center.

Tip
To quickly insert a line, rectangle, ellipse, or text, press and hold down the Ctrl
(macOS ⌘) key and then click on Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, or Text and astandard sized object is drawn automatically in the Workspace. The size, shape,and color are all standard values. These attributes can be changed later, if
desired. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information.

Dimension lines
Dimension lines display a measurement of an object in the drawing (Figure 29). A dimension line
does not belong to the object itself, but is positioned close to it. An object can have as many
dimension lines as necessary to indicate the size of its sides, edges, and distances.
To format the display of a dimension line and its components, right-click on the dimension line
and selecting Dimensions from the context menu to open the Dimension line dialog (Figure 30).

Inserting dimension lines
1) Use one of the following options to start drawing a dimension line:– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar and selectDimension Line from the drop-down list.

Figure 29: Example of dimension lines for an object

38 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 30: Dimension Line dialog– Click on Dimension Line in the Lines and Arrows panel of the Shapes deck on the
Sidebar.
2) Place the cursor at the point close to the object to position the dimension line start.
3) Click and drag to draw the dimension line. As the dimension line is drawn, the dimension
is displayed and automatically calculated.
4) Select the dimension line, then right-click on the dimension line and select Dimensions
from the context menu to open the Dimension Line dialog.
5) Format the dimension line using the options available in the Dimension Line dialog. For
more information dimension line options, see Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Dimension Line dialog.
7) Click in an empty space on the drawing to deselect the dimension line.

Note
The measurement units used for dimension lines can be changed by going toTools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Grid on the Menu bar and select ameasurement unit from the available options in the Units of measurement
drop-down list.

Arcs and segments
1) Use one of the following methods to start drawing an arc or segment (partial circles or
ellipses):– Select the type of arc or segment in the Basic Shapes panel in the Shapes deck on
the Sidebar.
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar and select thetype of arc or segment required from the drop-down list.
Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 39

– Select the type of arc or segment from the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar. To
display the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar
and select it.
2) Click, hold and drag the cursor to start creating an arc or segment. Release when therequired object size is reached.
3) Move the cursor to the position where the arc or segment starts and click to start drawing
the arc or segment. The Status Bar indicates the angle in degrees.
4) Move the cursor to the end position of where the arc or segment finishes. The Status Bar
shows the angle in degrees.
5) Click again to complete the arc or segment.

Curves, polygons or freeform lines
Curves1) Select the type of curve required using one of the following methods:– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Curves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar andselect the type of curve from the drop-down list.
– Select the type of curve in the Curve and Polygons panel of the Shapes deck on the
Sidebar.
2) Click, hold and drag the cursor from the starting point to draw a line.
3) Release and continue to drag the cursor to bend the line into the required curve shape.
4) Click to set the curve and position end point of the curve on the drawing.
5) Continue dragging the cursor to draw straight lines at the curve end. Each click sets a
corner point and allows drawing of another straight line from each corner point.
6) Double-click to end the drawing of a curve and straight lines.

Note
A filled curve automatically joins the last point to the first point to close off theobject and fills it with the selected fill. A curve without filling is not closed at theend of the drawing.

Polygons
1) Select the type of polygon required using one of the following methods:– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Curves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar andselect the type of polygon from the drop-down list.
– Select the type of polygon in the Curve and Polygons panel of the Shapes deck on
the Sidebar.
2) Click, hold and drag the cursor to draw a line between the first and second corner points.
3) Click again to end the drawing between the first and second corner points of the polygon.
4) Move the cursor to draw the next line and click to finish drawing to the next corner point.
Each click sets a corner point and draws another line.
5) Double-click to end the drawing of a polygon.

40 | LibreOffice Draw User GuideNote
A filled polygon automatically joins the last corner point to the first corner point toclose off the figure and fills it with the selected fill. A polygon without filling is not
closed at the end of the drawing.

Polygons 45°
Like ordinary polygons, these are formed from lines, but the angles between lines are restricted
to 45 or 90 degrees. If required, hold down the Shift key as the line is drawn so that the line isdrawn at an angle other than 45 or 90 degrees.

Freeform lines
Using freeform line tools is similar to drawing with a pencil on paper.
1)

Click, hold and drag the cursor to the line shape required, then release to complete thefreeform line drawing.

2) If Freeform Line Filled is selected, the end point is joined automatically to the start point
and the object is filled with the selected fill.

Note
The points in curves, polygons and freeform lines can be moved and edited. See
Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques formore information.

Gluepoints and connectors
Gluepoints
All Draw objects have gluepoints, which are not normally displayed, and only become visible
when Connectors is selected on the Drawing toolbar, or a connector tool is selected in theConnectors panel on the Shapes deck in the Sidebar.

Figure 31: Example of gluepoints in an object

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 41

Figure 32: Gluepoints toolbar

Figure 33: Example of a connector between two objects
Most objects have four gluepoints, as shown in the example in Figure 31. More gluepoints can be
added and customized using the Gluepoints toolbar (Figure 32). Go to View > Toolbars >Gluepoints on the Menu bar to open the toolbar.
Gluepoints are not the same as the selection handles of an object. Selection handles are formoving or changing the shape of an object. Gluepoints are used to fix or glue a connector to an
object so that when the object moves, the connector stays fixed to the object. For a more detailed
description on the use of gluepoints, see Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Object Points andChapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts.

Connectors
Connectors are lines or arrows whose ends automatically snap to a gluepoint of an object.
Connectors are not the same as lines and arrows. When objects are moved or reordered, theconnectors remain attached to a gluepoint. Figure 33 shows an example of two objects and aconnector.
Draw offers a range of different connectors and connector functions. On the Drawing toolbar,
click on the triangle ▼ next to Connectors and select a connector type from the drop-down list, or
select a connector from the Connectors panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar. For a moredetailed description using connectors, see Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization
Charts.

Drawing geometric shapes
The tools for drawing geometric shapes are located on the Drawing toolbar and the Shapes deckin the Sidebar. The use of these tools for geometric shapes is similar to the tools used fordrawing rectangles and squares, or ellipses and circles. For more information, see “Drawing
basic shapes” on page 30.

42 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 34: Example of creating a floating sub-toolbar
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of a tool icon on the Drawing toolbar opens a drop-down list
giving access to the toolset for that shape. If necessary, this drop-down list can be “torn off” tocreate a floating sub-toolbar.
•

Click and hold on the dotted line at the toolset top (highlighted in Figure 34), then drag it
across the screen to the Workspace and release to create a floating toolbar• To close a floating toolbar, click on the X on the right of the toolbar title.

Notes
The tool icons on the Drawing toolbar always indicate the last geometric shapedrawn and may not be the same as the tool icons shown on the Drawing toolbar
in this chapter. The last tool used remains on the Drawing toolbar making it easier
to use the same tool again.
Text can be added to all of these geometric shapes. For more information, see
Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.

Basic shapes
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar opens the Basic
Shapes sub-toolbar (Figure 35). This sub-toolbar also includes rectangle and ellipse tools thatare identical to the ones already displayed on the Drawing toolbar. Alternatively, select therequired tool from the Basic Shapes panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 35: Basic Shapes sub-toolbar

Symbol shapes
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Symbol Shapes on the Drawing toolbar opens the
Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar (Figure 36). Alternatively, select the required tool from the Symbol
Shapes panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 36: Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar
Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 43

Block arrows
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Block Arrows on the Drawing toolbar opens the Block
Arrows sub-toolbar (Figure 37). Alternatively, select the required tool from the Block Arrows
panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 37: Block Arrows sub-toolbar

Flowcharts
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Flowchart on the Drawing toolbar opens the Flowchart
sub-toolbar (Figure 38) for symbols. Alternatively, select the required tool from the Flowchart
panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar. The creation of flowcharts, organization charts, andsimilar planning tools are further described in Chapter 8 Connections, Flowcharts andOrganization Charts.

Figure 38: Flowchart sub-toolbar

Callouts
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Callout on the Drawing toolbar opens the Callouts
sub-toolbar (Figure 39). Alternatively, select the required tool from the Callouts panel in the
Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 39: Callouts sub-toolbar

Stars and banners
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Stars and Banners on the Drawing toolbar opens theStars and Banners sub-toolbar (Figure 40). Alternatively, select the required tool from the Stars
and Banners panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

Figure 40: Stars and Banners sub-toolbar

3D Objects
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of 3D Objects on the Drawing toolbar opens the
3D-Objects sub-toolbar (Figure 41). Alternatively, select the required tool from the 3D-Objects
panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.

44 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 41: 3D-Objects sub-toolbar

Adding, inserting and formatting text
In Draw text can be added, inserted, and formatted to in text boxes, objects, and shapes. For
more information on how to add, insert, and format text in a drawing, see Chapter 9, Adding andFormatting Text.

Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes | 45

Draw Guide 7.5

Chapter 3,
Working with Objects

Introduction
This chapter explains the tools and functions for modifying existing drawings. Tools and functions
only used and applied to a selected object or a group of selected objects. Selected objects areindicated by selection handles on a rectangular frame that is large enough to contain the object.
Where several objects are selected, the frame around the objects corresponds to the smallest
rectangle contains all objects. This frame is called the selection rectangle, or marquee.

Note
The color and shape of selection handles changes depending on the tool and thefunction selected to change object properties. The color of selection handles also
depends on the computer operating system and computer set up.

Selecting objects
Direct selection
Direct clicking on an object is the easiest way to select it. For objects that are not filled, click on
the object border to select it. To select more than one object, hold the Shift key down while
clicking on objects. To deselect an object, move the cursor into a blank space and click.

Selection by framing
Several objects are selected by clicking and dragging the cursor around the objects drawing a
selection rectangle around the objects. Only objects that lie entirely within a selection rectangle
are selected. Make sure Select on the Drawing toolbar is active when selecting multiple objects
by framing, as shown in Figure 42.

Selecting hidden objects
Objects located behind other objects and not visible can still be selected. When a hidden object
is selected, its selection handles appear through the objects covering the selected object.
• Windows, Mac or Linux — press the Tab key to select and cycle through objects in a
drawing, stopping at the hidden object to select it. To cycle through objects in reverse
order, press Shift+Tab.
•

Windows or Mac only — select an object in front of a hidden object, then press the Alt
key (macOS ⌥) and click to select the hidden object. If there are several hidden objects,
keep holding down the Alt key (macOS ⌥) and click until the required object isreached. To cycle through the objects in reverse order, hold down the Alt+Shift keys
(macOS ⌥+Shift) and click.

Figure 42: Drawing toolbar
48 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 43: Line and Filling toolbar

Arranging objects
In a complex drawing, several objects may be stacked on top of one another. Use one of thefollowing methods to rearrange the stacking order by moving an object forward or backward:• Select an object, go to Shape > Arrange on the Menu bar, or right-click on the object andselect Arrange from the drop down menu, then use one of the following options:– Bring to Front (Ctrl+Shift++) (macOS ⌘+Shift++)– Bring Forward (Ctrl++) (macOS ⌘++)– Send Backward (Ctrl+–) (macOS ⌘+–)– Send to Back (Ctrl+Shift+–) (macOS ⌘+Shift+–)– In Front of Object– Behind Object• Select an object, then select one of the Arrange tools at the left end of the Line andFilling toolbar (Figure 43). When the cursor hovers over a tool, its function is indicated.

Positioning and adjusting objects
Using zoom
For positioning and adjustment of objects, Draw has a zoom function that reduces or enlarges
the screen display of the current drawing. For example, zoom in to position objects on a drawing
with greater accuracy; zoom out to see the complete drawing. Zooming is controlled using the
Status Bar, Zoom & View Layout dialog, or Zoom toolbar.

Note
Zooming is handled differently in Linux operating systems. Drawings saved with
100% zoom factor in Windows or macOS are displayed at a larger zoom factor inLinux.

Status bar
The zoom controls are located on the right side of the Status Bar (Figure 44) giving easy accessto zooming. Use one of the following methods to change the zoom factor:• Fit slide to current window – fits the drawing to the open window.
• Zoom Out — minus sign (–) on the zoom slide control reduces the zoom factor.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 49

Figure 44: Status Bar zoom controls
1)
2)
3)

Fit slide to current window
Zoom slide control
Zoom percentage

Figure 45: Zoom & View Layout dialog• Zoom In — plus sign (+) on the zoom slide control increases the zoom factor.
• Click and drag the zoom slide control to increase or decrease the zoom factor.
• Right-click on the zoom percentage number and select a zoom option from the context
menu that opens.

Zoom & View Layout dialog
Open the Zoom & View Layout dialog (Figure 45) using one of the following methods:• Click on the zoom percentage number in the Status Bar.
• Go to View > Zoom > Zoom on the Menu bar.
The Zoom & View Layout dialog provides the following options for controlling how a drawing isviewed on a display.
Zoom Factor
Sets the zoom factor for displaying the current document and all documents of the same
type that are subsequently opened.
OptimalResizes the display to fit the text width in the document.
Fit width and height
Displays the entire page on the screen.
Fit width
Displays the complete document page width. The top and bottom page edges may not
be visible.
100%
Displays the document at its actual size.

50 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 46: Zoom toolbar
VariableEnter a percentage in the box for the zoom factor to display the document.
View Layout
Used to set the view layout and is not available for drawings. View layout is normally usedin text documents to see the effects of different layout settings.

Zoom toolbar
Go to View > Toolbars > Zoom on the Menu bar to open the Zoom toolbar (Figure 46). The tools
available on this toolbar, from left to right, are as follows:
Zoom In
Displays the drawing at twice its current size each time the tool is selected.
Zoom Out
Displays the drawing at half its current size each time the tool is selected.
100%
Displays the drawing at its actual size.
Zoom Previous
Returns the drawing display to the previous zoom factor applied.
Zoom Next
Undo the action of the previous zoom command.
Entire Page
Displays the whole drawing in the Workspace.
Page Width
Displays the complete drawing width. The slide top and bottom edges may not be visible.
OptimalResizes the display to include all objects on the drawing.
Object Zoom
Resizes the display to fit the selected object(s).
Zoom & Pan
Zooms in for each click. Ctrl+click (macOS ⌘+click) zooms out for each click.
Shift+click allows panning of a drawing.
Shift
Moves the drawing within the Workspace. Place the cursor on the drawing and drag tomove the drawing.

Moving and adjusting object size
When moving an object or changing its size, check the Status Bar left-hand area at the bottomof the Workspace (Figure 47). From left to right, this area shows a shape is selected, its positionon the drawing in X/Y coordinates and object dimensions. The measurement units are selected inTools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > General (macOS Preferences > LibreOffice >LibreOffice Draw > General).

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 51

Figure 47: Left end of Status Bar with object selected

Figure 48: Example of moving objects

Moving objects
To move an object (or a group of objects), select it, then click and drag within the object borders.
During movement, a ghost object image appears to help with repositioning, as shown in
Figure 48. When the object reaches its new location, release the object.

Adjusting object size
To change the size of a selected object (or a group of selected objects), move the cursor to aselection handle. The cursor changes shape to indicate the direction of movement for that
selection handle.
Click on a selection handle and drag it to change object size. The results depend on which
selection handle is used.
• To resize an object in one axis, use a side, top, or bottom handle.
• To resize using both axes, use a corner handle.
As the object size changes, a ghosted object outline appears, as shown in Figure 49. When therequired object size is reached, release the object.

Note
Pressing and holding the Shift key while resizing an object. changes the size
symmetrically keeping the aspect ratio of width to height the same. This Shift
key behavior works on all selection handles.

52 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 49: Example of adjusting objects

Figure 50: Example of modifying arcs

Modifying arcs
The size of an arc is changed by adjusting the positions of the start and end points of an arc. The
selection handle at the start point of an arc is larger than the end point of an arc.
1) Select an arc, then right click on the arc and select Points from the drop down menu, orpress the F8 key. Two handles appear at the start and end of the arc, as shown in
Figure 502) Click and drag on the start or end handle to change the arc shape.
3) Release the selected handle when the required arc shape is achieved.

Rotating and slanting objects
Rotating objects
To rotate an object (or a group of objects), select the object and change to rotation mode using
one of the following methods.
1) Select an object so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Use one of the following methods to switch to rotation mode. The selection handles
change shape and color and a center of rotation indicator appears in the object center, as
shown in Figure 51.
– Click again on a selected object.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 53

Figure 51: Example of rotation mode

Figure 52: Transformations toolbar– Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Transformations on the Line and Filling toolbar
and select Rotate from the pop up menu.
– Go to View > Toolbars > Transformations on the Menu bar to open theTransformations toolbar (Figure 52) and select Rotate.
3) Move the cursor over a corner selection handle and the cursor changes shape to indicate
rotation mode.
4) Click on the corner selection handle and drag it to rotate the object. Release the selection
handle when the required object rotation is reached.

Notes
The rotation center is normally located at the center of an object. To change therotation center position, click on the rotation center and drag it until it is at thedesired position. This rotation center can even be outside of the object.
Rotation works in a slightly different way for 3D objects because it occurs in athree dimensional space and not in a single plane. See Chapter 7, Working with
3D Objects for more information.

Slanting objects
The axis used for slanting an object is the object edge directly opposite the midpoint handle
being used to slant the object. This axis is fixed in location while the other sides of the object
move in relation to it as the selection handle is dragged. In Figure 53 the selection handle at theobject bottom has been used to slant the object.
1) Select an object and use one of the following methods to switch to rotation mode. The
selection handles change shape and color and a center of rotation indicator appears in
the object center.
– Click again on a selected object.

54 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 53: Example of slanting objects– Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Transformations on the Line and Filling toolbar
and select Rotate from the pop up menu.
– Go to View > Toolbars > Transformations on the Menu bar to open theTransformations toolbar and select Rotate.
2) Move the cursor over a selection handle at the midpoint of the object top, bottom, left or
right sides and the cursor changes shape to indicate slanting direction.
3) Click and drag the selection handle to slant the object. Release the cursor when thedesired object slant is reached. A ghosted object outline being slanted appears and thecurrent angle of slanting is shown in the Status Bar.

Note
Press and hold the Shift key while rotating or slanting an object restricts
movement to 15° steps. This is the default behavior of the Shift key. However, if
When creating or moving objects has been selected in Tools > Options >LibreOffice Draw > Grid (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice
Draw > Grid), the Shift key action is reversed and rotation or slanting is
restricted to 15° of movement unless the Shift key is pressed.

Setting exact position, size, rotation and slant
Using the cursor to position and resize objects is not exact. If greater accuracy is required toposition and size an object, it is recommended to use the Position and Size dialog (Figure 54), or
the Position and Size panel (Figure 55) in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
• To open the Position and Size dialog, select an object and use one of the following
methods:– Go to Format > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Position and Size from the context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.
•

To open the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, select anobject, then click on Properties on the Sidebar and click on the chevron > on the
Position and Size title bar to open the panel.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 55

Figure 54: Position and Size dialog

Figure 55: Position and Size panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

56 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Position and Size
Position
Specify the selected object location on the page. The units of measurement used for
X//Y coordinates, and the object width and height are set by going to Tools > Options> LibreOffice Draw > General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice
Draw > General).
Position X
Enter the horizontal distance required to move the object relative to the base point
selected in the grid.
Position Y
Enter the vertical distance required to move the object relative to the base point
selected in the grid.
Base point
Select a base point in the grid and then enter the amount required to shift the object
relative to the base point that is selected in the Position Y and Position X boxes. Thebase points correspond to the selection handles on an object. This option is only
available in the Position and Size dialog.
Size
Specify the amount required to resize the selected object with respect to the selectedbase point.
WidthEnter a width for the selected object.
HeightEnter a height for the selected object.
Keep ratio
Maintains proportions when resizing the selected object.
Base point
Select a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected
object in the Width and Height boxes. This option is only available in the Position andSize dialog.
Protect
This option is only available in the Position and Size dialog.
Position
Prevents changes to the position or the selected object size .
SizePrevents object resizing.
Adapt
Specifies, if the size of a text box should be adjusted to fit the size of entered text. This
option is only available in the Position and Size dialog for text boxes.
Fit width to text
Expands the object width to the text width, if the object is smaller than the text.
Fit height to text
Expands the object height to the text height, if the object is smaller than the text.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 57

Note
The base points default location for position and size is the upper left corner ofthe drawing area. This base point can be temporarily changed to makepositioning or dimensioning simpler by clicking on a position corresponding to thebase point location. This change in base point is only valid for single use and thebase point is reset to the standard position of top left corner when the Position
and Size dialog is closed.

Rotating objects
To accurately rotate an object, click on the Rotation tab of the Position and Size dialog to open
the Rotation page (Figure 56). The options available allow the rotation angle and the pivot point
location to be defined. Alternatively, use the available options for rotation in the Position andSize panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
Pivot Point
The selected object is rotated around a specified pivot point and is only available in the
Position and Size dialog. The default position for the pivot point is at the object center.
The pivot point can be moved from its default central position by changing the setting for
Position X and/or Position Y, or selecting a position in Default settings.
Position X
Enter horizontal distance from the page left edge to change the pivot point position.
Position Y
Enter vertical distance from the page top edge to change the pivot point position.
Default settings
Select the pivot point position. Default position is the object center. Changing the pivot
point is valid for single use only and is reset to the default central position when the
Position and Size dialog is closed.

Figure 56: Position and Size dialog — Rotation page

58 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 57: Position and Size dialog — Slant & Corner Radius page
Rotation Angle
Specify the number of degrees required to rotate the selected object. This option is only
available in the Position and Size dialog.
Angle
Enter the number of degrees that required to rotate the selected object.
Default settings
Click on the indicator to rotate the object. The number of degrees rotated is shown in
the Angle box.

Slant and corner radius
To accurately set the corner radius or slant angle of an object, click on the Slant & Corner
Radius tab of the Position and Size dialog (Figure 57). Options for slant and corner radius are
only available in the Position and Size dialog.
Corner RadiusThis option is only available for the corners of a rectangular or square object that has
been created using the Legacy Rectangles toolbar. This toolbar is optional and is opened
by going to View > Toolbars > Legacy Rectangles on the Menu bar. If this option isgrayed out, the corner radius cannot set.
RadiusEnter the circle radius that is to be used to round corners. The larger the value forcorner radius set, the rounder corners of a rectangle or square become.
Slant
Slants the selected object along the object bottom edge.
Angle
Enter the slant axis angle. The slant angle relates to how much an object inclines orslants from its normal vertical position on a drawing.
Control Point 1/Control Point 2
These control points are special handles or dots that are available on some shapes andare used to change the properties of a shape. If these options are grayed out, then the
shape does not have a special handle and coordinates cannot be set.
Enter a value to set the special handle X and Y coordinates in relation to the shape top
left corner. The example shown in Figure 58 shows the shape change after adjusting the
X coordinate of Control Point 1 of the special handle.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 59

Figure 58: Example of corner point adjustment

Note
For more information on this special handle used for control points, see“Changing object shape” on page 66.

Using grid and snap functions
Position objects accurately using the grid and snap functions available in Draw. It is
recommended to use the highest practical zoom value for a drawing when using the grid andsnap functions. Two different functions can be used at the same time, for example, snapping to a
guide line and the page edge. It is also recommended to activate only snap functions that arenecessary.

Configuring grid and snap
To configure the grid and snap functions in a drawing, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice
Draw > Grid (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Draw > Grid) on the Menu bar
to open the Grid dialog (Figure 59). Grid and snap functions are displayed and switched on or off
using one of the following methods:• Using Options LibreOffice Grid dialog (Figure 59).
• Right clicking on a drawing and selecting options from the context menu.
• Using the tools on the Options toolbar (Figure 60). If the Options toolbar is not open, go
to View > Toolbars > Options on the Menu bar.

Grid and snap functions
Grid
Specifies the settings for the configurable grid in a drawing and helps to determine theexact position of objects. Also, this grid can be set in line with the magnetic snap grid. If
the snap grid is activated, but want to move or create individual objects without snap
positions, keep the Shift key pressed to deactivate this function.
Snap to gridSpecifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid
points. To change the snap grip status only for the current action, drag an object while
holding down the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘).
Visible gridSpecifies whether to display the grid.

60 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 59: Options LibreOffice Draw dialog — Grid page

Figure 60: Options toolbar
Resolution
Horizontal
Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis.
VerticalDefines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis.
Synchronize axes
Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically. The resolution andsubdivision for the X and Y axes remain the same.
Subdivision
Horizontal
Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the X-axis.
VerticalSpecify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the Y-axis.
Snap
To snap lines
Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when the click is released.
This setting can also be defined using Snap to Snap Guides on the Options toolbar.
To the page margins
Specifies whether to align the graphic object contour to the nearest page margin. The
cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. This function
can also be accessed using Snap to Page Margins in the Options toolbar.
To object frame
Specifies whether to align the graphic object contour to the border of the nearest
graphic object. The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap
range. This function can also be accessed with Snap to Object Border in the Options
toolbar.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 61

To object points
Specifies whether to align the graphic object contour to the points of the nearest
graphic object. This only applies if the cursor or a contour line of the graphics object isin the snap range. This function can also be accessed with Snap to Object Points in
the Options toolbar.
Snap range
Defines the snap distance between the cursor and the object contour. Snaps to a snap
point if the cursor is closer than the distance selected.
Constrain Objects
When creating or moving objects
Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°)
when creating or moving them. This setting can be temporarily deactivated by pressing
the Shift key.
Extend edges
Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the
Shift key is pressed before releasing the click. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle
is created based on the ellipse longest diameter). When Extend edges is not selected,
a square or a circle is created based on the shorter side or diameter.
When rotating
Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that isselected. To rotate an object outside the defined angle, press the Shift key whenrotating. Release the key when the desired rotation angle is reached.
Point reduction
Defines the angle for point reduction. When working with polygons, this maybe usefulin reducing the editing points.

Snap to gridUsing Snap to Grid
Using Snap to Grid helps in moving an object onto a grid point in a drawing. This function is
selected using one of the following methods:• Go to View > Snap Guides > Snap to Grid on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on a drawing and select Snap Guides > Snap to Grid from the context menu.
• Click on Snap to Grid on the Options toolbar.

Displaying gridUse one of the following methods to display or turn off the grid in a drawing:• Go to View > Grid and Helplines > Display Grid on the Menu bar.
• Click on Display Grid on the Options toolbar.
• Right-click on a drawing and select Grid and Helplines > Display Grid from the context
menu.
• Select Visible grid in the Options LibreOffice Draw Grid dialog.

Changing color of grid points
By default and depending on the computer setup, grid points are gray and not always easy tosee. Change the grid point color as follows:

62 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > Application Colors (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > LibreOffice > Application Colors) to open the Application Colors dialog(Figure 61).
2) Go to Drawing/Presentation and select a more suitable color for the grid from thedrop-down list.
3) Click on OK to save the changes and close the dialog.

Snap points and lines
Snap lines and snap points are not part of the grid, but are inserted to position an object at a
specific position in a drawing. Snap lines can either be horizontally or vertically and appear as
dashed lines. Snap points appear as small crosses with dashed lines. Snap points and snap lines
do not appear in printed output.

Figure 61: Options LibreOffice dialog — Application Colors page

Figure 62: New Snap Object dialog

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 63

Inserting snap points and snap lines
To insert a snap point or snap line, go to Insert > Snap Guide on the Menu bar to open the New
Snap Object dialog (Figure 62).
Position
Sets the position of a selected snap point or line relative to the top left page corner.
X:
Enter the amount of space required between the snap point or line and the page leftedge.
Y:Enter the amount of space required between the snap point or line and the page top
edge.
Type
Specifies the type of snap object being inserted.
Point
Inserts a snap point.
VerticalInserts a vertical snap line.
Horizontal
Inserts a horizontal snap line.

Displaying snap points and lines
Use one of the following methods to display snap points and lines in a drawing:• Go to View > Snap Guides > Display Snap Guides on the Menu bar.
• Click on Display Snap Guides in the Options toolbar.
• Right-click on a drawing and select Snap Guides > Display Snap Guides from thecontext menu.

Editing snap points
1) Right-click on the snap point and select Edit Snap Point from the context menu to open
the Edit Snap Point dialog (Figure 63).
2) Enter new X and Y coordinate settings for the snap point and click OK.
3) Alternatively, click and drag a snap point to a new position on a drawing.

Editing snap lines
1) Right-click on the snap line and select Edit Snap Line from the context menu to open the
Edit Snap Line dialog (Figure 64).

Figure 63: Edit Snap Point dialog

64 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 64: Edit Snap Line dialog
2) Enter a new X coordinate setting for vertical snap lines or a new Y coordinate setting forhorizontal snap lines and click OK.
3) Alternatively, click and drag a snap line to a new position on a drawing.

Deleting snap points and lines
To delete a snap point, drag it back to a ruler or right-click on the snap point and select Delete
Snap Point from the context menu.
To delete a snap line, drag it back to the ruler or right-click on the snap line and select Delete
Snap Line from the context menu.

Configuring snap range
To configure the snap range of when an object snaps to a position in the drawing:1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Grid (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences> LibreOffice Draw > Grid) on the Menu bar to open the Options LibreOffice Grid dialog.
2) Enter the number of pixels to set the proximity of when the object snaps into position in
the Snap range box. The default setting is 5 pixels.
3) Click OK to set the new snap range and close the dialog.

Using Helplines
Helplines are a Draw function for positioning of objects. Helplines are displayed while the object
is being moved. Helplines extend from the object edges to the rulers at the top and left side of adrawing and do not have a snap function (Figure 65).
1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > View (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences> LibreOffice Draw > View) on the Menu bar to open the Options LibreOffice Draw View
dialog (Figure 66).

Figure 65: Example of using helplines while moving objects

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 65

Figure 66: Options LibreOffice Draw dialog — View page2) Select Helplines when moving option or click Helplines While Moving in the Options
toolbar.
3) Click OK to save the selection and close the dialog.

Changing object shape
Regular shapes
When creating regular shapes in a drawing, some shapes have one or more control dots
displayed in a different color to the selection handles when an object is selected. When the
cursor hovers over one of these dots, it changes shape. Clicking and dragging on these dots
modifies the object shape. For example, increasing corner radius of a rounded rectangle orsquare, changes the angles of an arc, and so on. These dots perform different functions
according to the shape selected.

Note
After converting a regular shape to a curve or polygon, the shape of a regularshape can be changed and points can be edited. See “Curves and polygons” onpage 69 and “Editing points” on page 70 for more information.

Basic shapes
The following basic shapes (Figure 67), from left to right, have adjustment dots.

Figure 67: Basic Shapes sub-toolbar
Basic Shapes

Adjustment dot description

Rectangle, Rounded

Changes the curve radius that replaces the angled corners of arectangle or square.

Square, Rounded

Changes the curve radius that replaces the angled corners of arectangle or square.

Parallelogram

Changes the internal angles between the sides.

Trapezoid

Changes the internal angles between the sides.

Circle Pie

Changes the size of the filled sector.

66 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Block Arc

Changes both internal diameter and size of the filled area.

Isosceles Triangle

Changes the shape and type of the triangle.

HexagonChanges the internal angles between the sides.

OctagonChanges the internal angles between the sides.

CylinderChanges the perspective.

Cube

Changes the perspective.

Folded Corner

Changes the folded corner size.

Cross

Changes the thickness of the cross four arms.

Frame

Changes the frame thickness.

Ring

Changes the ring internal diameter.

Symbol Shapes
The following symbol shapes (Figure 68), from left to right, have adjustment dots.

Figure 68: Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar
Symbol Shapes

Adjustment dot description

Smiley Face

Changes the smile on the face.

Heart

Changes the symbol shape.

Sun

Changes the symbol shape.

Moon

Changes the symbol shape.

Prohibited

Changes the ring thickness and the diagonal bar.

Square Bevel

Changes the bevel thickness.

Octagon Bevel

Changes the bevel thickness.

Diamond Bevel

Changes the bevel thickness.

Double Bracket

Changes the bracket curvature.

Left Bracket

Changes the bracket curvature.

Right Bracket

Changes the bracket curvature.

Double Brace

Changes the bracket curvature.

Left Brace

Changes the brace curvature and the position of the point.

Right Brace

Changes the brace curvature and the position of the point.

Block Arrows
The following block arrows (Figure 69), from left to right, have adjustment dots.

Figure 69: Block Arrows sub-toolbar

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 67

Block Arrows

Adjustment dot description

Right Arrow

Changes the arrow shape and thickness.

Left Arrow

Changes the arrow shape and thickness.

Down Arrow

Changes the arrow shape and thickness.

Up Arrow

Changes the arrow shape and thickness.

Left and Right Arrow

Changes the arrow shape and thickness.

Up and Down Arrow

Changes the arrow shape and thickness.

Circular Arrow

Changes the arrow shape and thickness.

4-way Arrow

Changes the arrow shape and thickness.

ChevronChanges the angle between the sides and the shape.

Pentagon

Changes the angle between the sides and the shape.

Striped Right Arrow

Changes the arrow shape and thickness.

Up, Right and Down
Arrow

Changes the arrow shape and thickness.

Notched Right Arrow

Changes the arrow shape and thickness.

Up and Right Arrow

Changes the arrow shape and thickness.

Right Arrow Callout

Changes the callout shape and thickness.

Left Arrow Callout

Changes the callout shape and thickness.

Down Arrow Callout

Changes the callout shape and thickness.

Up Arrow Callout

Changes the callout shape and thickness.

Left and Right Arrow
Callout

Changes the callout shape and thickness.

Up and Down Arrow
Callout

Changes the callout shape and thickness.

4-way Arrow Callout

Changes the callout shape and thickness.

Up and Right Arrow
Callout

Changes the callout shape and thickness.

Callouts
For all callouts (Figure 70) use the adjustment dots to change the length, position and angle ofthe pointer.

Figure 70: Callouts sub-toolbar

68 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Stars and Banners
The following stars and banners (Figure 71), from left to right, have adjustment dots.

Figure 71: Stars and Banners sub-toolbar
Stars and Banners Adjustment dot description
4-Point Star

Changes the star points thickness and shape.

8-Point Star

Changes the star points thickness and shape.

24-Point Star

Changes the star points thickness and shape.

Vertical Scroll

Changes the scroll width and shape.

Horizontal Scroll

Changes the scroll width and shape.

Doorplate

Changes the inward curvature of the corners.

Curves and polygons
Bézier curves
The editing of curves and polygons depends on the mathematics of Bézier curves1. Fully
explaining Bézier curves goes beyond the scope of this Draw Guide. For more information on
drawing and manipulating Bézier curves, see Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.
Editing a Bézier curve is the movement of points or tangents passing through a point. Eachtangent has a control point at each end and a junction point where it meets a curve. The relative
angle and distance between control points determines the curve shape. Figure 72 shows what
happens to a square and changing only one point on the square.

Converting objects to curve or polygon
When changing the shape of an object and before modifying the points on an object, it must be
converted to a curve or a polygon. Depending on what kind of shape and effect required to
produce using one of the following methods to create a curve or a polygon:• After selecting an object, go to Shape > Convert on the Menu bar and select either To
Curve or To Polygon.
• Right click on an object and select Convert > To Curve or To Polygon from the context
menu.

1

Bézier curves were invented by Pierre Bézier, who developed the technique in the 1960s and while asan engineer with the Renault car manufacturer. The technology was intended to make modeling thesurface of vehicles easier.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 69

Figure 72: Example of creating different shapes by changing tangent points

Figure 73: Edit Points toolbar

Note
After switching to points editing mode, the selection handles become points. The
number of points may increase or reduce in number. This change in number
depends on the object shape and is normal behavior.

Editing points
Many different shapes can be created by moving either the point, or one or both of the roundhandle points at either end of the tangent, as shown in Figure 72. Points can be added, deleted,or points type changed using tools available on the Edit Points toolbar (Figure 73).
After converting a shape to a curve or polygon, object points are edited as follows:1)

Select the object and select points editing mode using one of the following methods.
– Go to Edit > Points on the Menu bar.
– Click on the Points tool on the Standard toolbar.
– Right click on the converted object and select Points from the context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F8.

2) Click on an object point to change the object shape. The Edits Points toolbar opens andthe tools become active when a point is selected. Tangents also appear attached to theselected point.
3) Use the various tools on the Edit Points toolbar to add, delete, or change the point type.
4) Click and drag a point to move the point and change object shape.
5) If the selected object is a curve, click on and drag the round points at the end of a tangent
to change the object shape.

70 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

6) When satisfied with the shape, click outside of the object to cancel points editing modeand close the Edit Points toolbar.

Point types
The available tools on the Edit Points toolbar depend on the object and type of object point thathas been selected.
Move Points
Activates a mode allowing movement of points. Click, hold and drag the selected point toanother location.
Insert Points
Activates the insert mode allowing points to be inserted. A point is inserted onto aselected object each time a click is made. The object also changes shape to include a
new point into the object border. Inserted points are a smooth point.
Delete Points
Deletes points from the selected object. Select Delete Points and then click on a point todelete. To delete several points, hold down the Shift key as each point is selected fordeletion, then click on Delete Points.
Convert To Curve
Converts a curve into a straight line, or a straight line into a curve. If a single point isselected, the curve before the point is converted. If two points are selected, the curve
between both points is converted. If more than two points are selected and each time
Convert to Curve is clicked, a different portion of the curve is converted. If necessary,round points are converted into corner points and corner points are converted into roundpoints.
If a curve section is a straight line, the line end points have a maximum of one control
point each. They cannot be modified to round points unless the straight line is converted
back to a curve.
Close Bézier
Closes a curve. A curve is closed by connecting the last point with the first point, indicatedby an enlarged square.
Split Curve
Select the point or points, then click on Split Curve.
Corner Point
Converts a selected point or points into corner points. Corner points have two movable
control points, which are independent from each other. A curved line does not go straight
through a corner point, but forms a corner.
To create a corner point, a smooth or a symmetrical point must be inserted first and thenconverted to a corner point by clicking on Corner Point.
Smooth Transition
Converts a corner point, or symmetrical point into a smooth point. Both control points of acorner point are aligned in parallel and are only moved simultaneously. Control points
may maybe different lengths, allowing variation in the degree of curvature.
Symmetric Transition
Converts a corner point or a smooth point into a symmetrical point. Both control points ofa corner point are aligned in parallel and have the same length. They can only be moved
simultaneously and the degree of curvature is the same in both directions.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 71

Eliminate Points
Marks selected points for deletion when a point is located on a straight line. When using
Convert to Curve to convert a curve or a polygon into a straight line, or alter a curveusing the cursor so that a point lies on the straight line, the selected point is deleted. The
angle from when a point is deleted is 15° by default.

Tangents
Before using tangents on an object, it must be converted to a curve. Tangents are only used on
curves. If an object has been converted to a polygon and a tangent is added, the object is
automatically converted to a curve.

Note
The tangent angle relates to an object shape that is changed by selecting atangent control point at the end of a tangent and moving it. As the tangent angle
is changed, the object shape changes in response.

Symmetric transition
Symmetric transition converts a corner or smooth point into a symmetrical point. Tangents havethe same length and are aligned in a straight line, as shown in Figure 74. Tangents can only be
moved simultaneously and the degree of curvature is the same in both directions.

Figure 74: Example of symmetric transition

Figure 75: Example of smooth transition
1) Convert an object to a curve or polygon.

72 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

2) Switch the selected object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the point to be changed to a symmetrical point.
4) Click on Symmetric Transition in the Edit Points toolbar. The straight line on each sideof the symmetric transition point is converted to a curve.
5) Click and drag a tangent control handle to change the object curvature and shape. Anychange to one tangent is carried over symmetrically to the other tangent.

Smooth transition
Smooth transition converts a corner or symmetrical point into a smooth point. Tangents arealigned in a straight line and move simultaneously. Tangents can have different lengths with thecurvature controlled by the longest tangent which is the largest curvature, as shown in Figure 75.
1) Convert the object to a curve or polygon.
2) Switch the selected object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the point to be changed to a symmetrical point.
4) Click on Smooth Transition on the Edit Points toolbar.
5) Click and drag a tangent control handle to change the object shape. This creates anasymmetric tangent with the largest curvature on the tangent longest side.

Corner point
Converts selected points into corner points. Corner points have two movable control points,
which are independent from each other. It is possible to independently change the angle on eachside of a tangent using the tangent central point as a corner point, as shown in Figure 76.
1) Convert the object to a curve or polygon.
2) Switch the selected object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the point to be changed to a symmetrical point.
4) Click on Corner Point on the Edit Points toolbar.
5) Click and drag the end of a tangent to change its angle. Each tangent can be moved
independently to create spikes and troughs in an object shape.

PointsMoving points
When moving points, the object border on both sides of the point follows the point movementchanging the object shape.
1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the selected object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the point to be changed to a symmetrical point.
4) Click on Move Points on the Edit Points toolbar.

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 73

Figure 76: Example of changing corner point

Figure 77: Example of moving points

Figure 78: Example of inserting points
5) Place the cursor on the selected point, then click and drag the point to create a newshape. Figure 77 illustrates how a different shape can be created from a circle bydragging the left hand side point to the left.

Inserting points
A point is inserted into a selected object each time there is a click. Clicking inside the object
border, the object changes shape to include the new point into the object border, as shown in
Figure 78. The inserted point is a smooth point.
Points can also be moved in insert point mode. Hover the cursor over the point until it changes
shape, then click and drag the point to change the object shape.
74 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the selected object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Click on Insert Points on the Edit Points toolbar.
4) Click on the object border to insert a point at the required position on the border.
5) Alternatively, click inside the object border to insert a point. The object automaticallychanges shape to include the new point into the object border.

Deleting points
Figure 79 shows what happens when three points on the left were deleted from a circle. The left
image is a the full circle and the right image is where three points have been deleted creating a
new shape.
1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the selected object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) To delete a single point, proceed as followsa) Select the point for deletion.
b) Click on Delete Points on the Edit Points toolbar.
4) To delete several points at the same time, proceed as follows:a) Hold down the Shift key.
b) Select all the points for deletion.
c) Click on Delete Points on the Edit Points toolbar.

Figure 79: Example of deleting points

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 75

Figure 80: Example of converting a curve into a line
1)
2)
3)

Curve with points displayed.
Sections between points converted to line.
Point deleted to create a line section.

Eliminating points
The Eliminate Points tool on the Edit Points toolbar only functions on lines with multiple points.
These lines are created when a curve is converted to a line using the Convert to Curve tool. An
example of creating a straight line and eliminating points is shown in Figure 80.
1) Convert the curve to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the curve into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the curve with multiple points and convert to a line, see “Converting curves orlines” below.
4) Select the point or points on the line for elimination. The selected point is emphasized.
5) Select the Eliminate Points tool on the Edit Points toolbar.
6) Accurately position the cursor over the selected point, then click and drag the selected
point. As the cursor is dragged, a dotted line forms between the neighboring points.
7) When this dotted line appears to be a straight line between the neighboring points,
release the click. The selected point is eliminated and a straight line now exists between
the neighboring points.

Converting curves or lines
Curves and lines are converted using the Convert to Curve tool on the Edit Points toolbar. Whena curve is converted to a line, a straight line is created between selected points on a curve. Whena line is converted to a curve, a curve is created between selected points on a line. An example
of converting a curve to a line is shown in Figure 80.
1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the points for converting from curve to line or from line to curve.

76 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

4) Click on Convert to Curve on the Edit Points toolbar. Between the selected points, acurve is converted into a line or a line is converted into a curve.
5) Delete a point on the converted line to create a straight line.

Splitting objects
1) Convert the object to a curve or a polygon.
2) Switch the object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select the point or points on the object where it is to be split. Keep the Shift key pressed
down when selecting more than one point.
4) Click on Split Curve on the Edit Points toolbar to split or cut the object border at the
selected point. If the object is filled, it will be emptied because the object border is nolonger closed, as shown in Figure 81.
5) Deselect the object, then drag the cut segment and move it away from the original object.

Note
The point where the object was split is now larger than the remaining points
visible on the object.

Figure 81: Example of splitting objects

Figure 82: Example of closing objects

Chapter 3, Working with Objects | 77

Figure 83: Example of distorting objects

Closing objects
1) Select an open object (Figure 82).
2) Switch the object into editing points mode and open the Edit Points toolbar.
3) Select a point where the object has been split. Note that the start point of an object islarger than the other points visible on the object.
4) Click on Close Bézier in the Edit Points toolbar to close the object. If the open object was
originally a closed and filled object, then the original color fills the object when it is closed.

Distorting objects
1) Select the object and switch into editing points mode to display the points on the object.
This also opens the Edit Points toolbar.
2) Select a point on the object and drag it to a new position to distort the object (Figure 83).

78 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Draw Guide 7.5

Chapter 4,
Changing Object Attributes

Formatting lines
In LibreOffice the term Line indicates a freestanding segment (line), the outer edge or border of ashape, or an arrow. The properties of a line that can be modified are style (solid, dashed,invisible, and so on), width, color and type of arrowhead.

Tip
Hovering the cursor over a tool icon on a toolbar, or in the Sidebar, a pop up
displays the name of the tool.

Note
For more information on using color when formatting lines, line styles, arrows,
and arrow styles, see “Working with area fills” on page 91.

Line and Filling toolbar
1) Select line in the drawing.
2) If necessary, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Line and Filling fromthe drop-down list to open the Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 84):3) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Line Style and select a line style from one of theoptions in the drop-down list.
4) Either type the line width in the Line Width text box, or use the up and down arrows tochange the line width.
5) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Line Color and select a color from one of theavailable color palettes.
6) If necessary, click on Shadow to add a shadow to the line. The shadow applied uses thesettings set in the Line dialog (Figure 106 on page 108).
7) If necessary, select from the Select start and end arrowheads for lines drop-down list
the arrowhead type for each end of the line and change the line into an arrow. The leftdrop-down list adds an arrow head to the beginning of the line. The right drop-down list
adds an arrow head to the end of the line.
8) Deselect the line to save the changes to the line.

Sidebar
1) Select a line in the drawing.
2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar to open the Properties deck.

Figure 84: Line and Filling toolbar

80 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 85: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar3) Click on Line to open the Line panel (Figure 85).
4) If required, in Line click on Select start and end arrowheads for lines to open thedrop-down lists for arrowhead types for each end of the line and change the line into anarrow. The left drop-down list adds an arrowhead to the beginning of the line. The rightdrop-down list adds an arrowhead to the end of the line.
5) In Line, select the type of line required from the Line Style drop-down list.
6) In Width, select a line width from the options available in the Width drop-down list, or
enter a width in the Custom Line Width text box.
7) In Color, click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Line Color and select a color from one of
the available color palettes.
8) If required, in Transparency enter a percentage amount for line transparency.
9) If required, in Corner style select a corner style for the line from the drop-down list.
10) If required, in Cap style select a cap style for line ends from the drop-down list.
11) Deselect the line to save changes made to the line.
12) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar and open the Line dialog
for more control over formatting lines.

Line dialog
1) Make sure a line is selected on a drawing.
2) Open the Line dialog (Figure 86) using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the line and select Line from the context menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the Line panel title on the Sidebar.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 81

Figure 86: Line dialog — Line page3) Format the line using the options available in the Line dialog. A preview box at the bottomof the dialog shows the effect of the changes on a line.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog.

Line properties
The Line page in the Line dialog is where the basic parameters of the line are set. It is divided
into three sections as follows.
Line properties
Style
Select a line style from the drop-down list.
Color
Select a predefined color from one of the available color palettes.
WidthSpecifies the thickness of the line.
Transparency
Sets the transparency of a line. Figure 87 shows the effects of different percentages intransparency levels to lines when placed over an object.
Arrow Styles
This section is only applicable to individual lines and is not used for lines that form theborders of an object.
Start style
Select from the drop-down list an arrow style or arrowhead for the start of a line.
End style
Select from the drop-down list an arrow style or arrowhead for the end of a line.
WidthSpecifies the thickness of the arrow endings.
82 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 87: Example of line transparencies

Figure 88: Example of arrow endings
1)2)

Default ending
Centered ending

CenterMoves the center of the arrow endings to the end point of the line. Figure 88 shows theeffects of selecting this option.
Synchronize ends
Makes the two line ends identical.
Corner and Cap Styles
Determines how the connection between two segments of a line looks. To appreciate thedifference between these styles, choose a thick line style and observe how the preview
changes.
Corner style
Select the shape to be used at the corners of the line. For a small angle between lines,
a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape.
Cap style
Select the style of the line end caps. The caps are added to inner dashes as well.

Line shadows
The Shadow page (Figure 89) of the Line dialog provides options to add and format a shadow toa selected line. The settings on this dialog page are the same as those for shadows applied toother objects, described in “Working with shadows” on page 107.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 83

Figure 89: Line dialog — Shadow page

Figure 90: Line dialog — Line Styles page
To quickly apply a shadow to a line, click on Shadow on the Line and Filling toolbar. This createsa shadow using the settings from the Shadow page in the Line dialog.

Line styles
When adding several lines using the same format, line styles reduce the need to format individual
lines. LibreOffice includes line styles that can be used in a drawing. Also, line styles can becreated, saved, and deleted. The Line Styles page in the Line dialog (Figure 90) provides
options to use predefined line styles and to create or change line styles.

Creating line styles
1) Create a line in a drawing.
2) Open the Line dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar.
84 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

– Right-click on the line and select Line from the context menu.
3) Click on the Line Styles tab in the Line dialog to open the Line Styles page.
4) In the Line style drop-down list, select a pre-defined line style similar to the style to becreated. An example of the line style selected is displayed at the bottom of the dialog
page. This example changes as changes are made to the line style.
5) In the Type drop-down menus, select either Dots or Dash.
– For one type for the line, select the same type in both Type boxes.
– To alternate two line types within a single line, select different types in both Typeboxes.
6) In the Number boxes, specify the number of dots or dashes selected in Type. For different
sized groups of dots or dashes, set a different quantity in each Number box.
7) In the Length boxes, specify the Dash length as a percentage of the line. The Length
option is not available for Dots.
8) In the Spacing box, specify the spacing between the dashes and/or dots as a percentageof the line. The Spacing option is not available when the option Fit to line width isselected.
9) If necessary, select Fit to line width so that the new style fits the line width when used in a
drawing.
10) For the current document only, create a new line style, or modify a line style as follows:a) Click on Add or Modify to open the Name dialog.
b) Enter a unique name for the new or modified line style.
c) Click on OK to save the new or modified line style and close the Name dialog.
11) Click on OK to close the Line dialog and the new line style is ready for use in the current
drawing only.

Notes
To use the new or modified line style in other drawings, the line style must be
saved using Save Line Styles. See "Saving line styles" below for more
information.
When creating or modifying a line style, it is recommended to use a unique namefor the line style. This prevents one of the LibreOffice line styles from being
overwritten and causing formatting problems in other drawings or documents thatuse LibreOffice line styles.

Saving line styles
1) Create a new line style, described in “Creating line styles” above, but do not close theLine dialog.
2) Click on Save Line Styles at the bottom right of the Line Styles page to open a filebrowser window at the correct location for line styles.
3) Enter a unique filename using the file extension SOD for the line style in the Name box.
4) Click on Save to save the line style and close the file browser window. The new line style
is now available for use in new drawings and documents.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 85

Importing line styles
LibreOffice line styles are available when LibreOffice is installed on a computer. However,compatible line styles can be imported and used in LibreOffice. Any line styles loaded into
LibreOffice must use the file extension SOD.
1) Create a line in a drawing.
2) Open the Line dialog and click on the Line Styles tab to open the Line Styles page.
3) Click on Load Line Styles at the bottom right of the Line Styles page to open a filebrowser window at the correct location for line styles.
4) Select a style from the list of saved styles in the file browser window. The file extension
for line styles is SOD.
5) Click Open to load the line style into LibreOffice. The line style becomes available forother LibreOffice drawings and documents.
6) Click OK to close the Line dialog and save any changes made.

Deleting line styles
1) Open the Line dialog and click on the Line Styles tab to open the Line Styles page.
2) Select the line style for deletion from the Line style drop-down list.
3) Click on Delete and confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes in the confirmation dialog.
4) Click OK to close the Line dialog and save any changes made.

Note
When deleting line styles, make sure the line style has not been used in anotherdocument. It is recommended to only delete line styles that have been created, or
imported, and do not delete one of the LibreOffice predefined line styles. This
prevents any formatting problems in other documents where the line style has
been used.

Arrow styles
Use the Arrow Styles page (Figure 91) in the Line dialog to create new arrow styles, modify
existing arrow styles, or load previously saved arrow styles.

Creating arrow styles
Any shape can be used as an arrowhead, but the shape must be convertible to a curve. A curve
is something drawn without lifting a pencil. For example, a star can be converted to a curve, but asmiley face cannot.

Note
The part of the shape being used as the point in an arrowhead must be at the topof the shape when creating a new arrowhead. If necessary, rotate the shape until
the point is at the top of the shape.
1) Select a shape, or create a shape that can be converted to a curve for use as a newarrowhead. The part of the shape that is going to be point of the arrowhead must face
upward. An example of a new arrowhead is shown in Figure 92.

86 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 91: Line dialog — Arrow Styles page

Figure 92: Example of a created arrowhead
2) Select the shape and convert to a curve using one of the following methods:– Right-click on the shape and select Convert > To Curve from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Convert > To Curve on the Menu bar.
3) With the shape selected, open the Arrow Styles page in the Line dialog.
4) Click on Add and type a unique name for the new arrow style in the Name dialog that
opens, then click OK. The new arrowhead style is displayed in the preview box of the Linedialog and at the bottom of the Arrow style drop-down list.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Line dialog. The new arrow style is available
only in the current document.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 87

NoteSome shapes cannot be used as an arrowhead. This is indicated by rectangular
blocks appearing at each end of the line in the preview box on the Line Styles
page in the Line dialog.
When creating an arrow style, it is recommended to use a unique name for thearrow style. This prevents one of the standard arrow styles in LibreOffice frombeing overwritten and causing formatting problems in other drawings that use thestandard arrow styles.
The new arrow style created is available only for use in the current drawing. To
use the new arrow style in other drawings, the arrow style must be saved using
the Save Arrow Styles option.

Saving arrow styles
1) Create a new arrow style as described in “Creating arrow styles” on page 86, but do not
close the Line dialog.
2) Click on Save arrow styles at the bottom right of the Arrow Styles page to open a filebrowser window at the correct location for arrow styles.
3) Enter a unique filename using the file extension SOE for the arrow style.
4) Click on Save to save the arrow style and close the file browser window. The new arrowstyle is now available for use in new documents.

Importing arrow styles
LibreOffice provides standard arrow styles when installed on a computer. However, compatiblearrow styles can be loaded and used in LibreOffice. Any arrow styles loaded into LibreOffice must
use the file extension SOE.
1) Open the Line dialog and click on the Arrow Styles tab to open the Arrow Styles page.
2) Click on Load arrow styles at the bottom right of the Arrow Styles page to open a filebrowser window at the correct location for arrow styles.
3) Select an arrow style from the list of saved styles in the file browser window
4) Click Open to load the arrow style into the drawing. The arrow style also becomes
available for other LibreOffice documents.
5) Click OK to close the Line dialog and save any changes made.

Deleting arrow styles
1) Open the Line dialog and click on the Arrow Styles tab to open the Arrow Styles page.
2) Select the arrow style for deletion from the Arrow style drop-down list.
3) Click on Delete and confirm the deletion by clicking on Yes in the confirmation dialog that
opens.
4) Click OK to close the Line dialog and save any changes made.

Note
When deleting arrow styles, make sure the arrow style is not used in anotherdocument. It is recommended to only delete arrow styles that have been created,or imported, and not to delete one of the LibreOffice predefined arrow styles. This
prevents formatting problems in other documents using LibreOffice arrow styles.

88 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 93: Examples of area fill types
1)
2)

None
Color

3)
4)

Gradient
Image or Bitmap

5)
6)

Pattern
Hatch or Hatching

Area fills
Area fill refers to the inside of an object that has an unbroken border, for example a rectangle,
circle, star, pentagon and so on. An area fill can be none, color, gradient, image/bitmap, pattern,or hatch/hatch, as shown by the examples in Figure 93. Also, an area fill can be partly or whollytransparent and throw a shadow.
The Area dialog provides tools and options for selecting and editing area fills. Area fills are alsoavailable in drop-lists in the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar and in Area
Style/Filling on the Line and Filling toolbar, but have reduced options and different fill types.

Area dialog formatting1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog (Figure 94) using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Area on the Menu bar.
– Click on Area in the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Right-click on the selected object and select Area from the context menu.
– Click on More Options on the right of the Area section title on the Sidebar.
3) Click on the Area tab to open the Area page.
4) Select the type of area fill from the available options (None, Color, Gradient, Image,Pattern, or Hatch).
5) Select the required area fill options that become available for each type of area fillselected.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes to the area fill.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 89

Figure 94: Area dialog — Color page

Figure 95: Area panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Sidebar formatting1) Make sure an object with an area fill is selected in a drawing.
2) Click on Properties on the Sidebar, then click on the down chevron ˅ on the left of the
Area titlebar to open the Area panel (Figure 95).
3) Select a fill type (None, Color, Gradient, Hatching, Bitmap, or Pattern) from the Filldrop-down list.
4) Select a fill effect from the options available for each fill type from the Fill drop-down list.

90 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 96: Line and Filling toolbar5) If required, select a transparency type and a transparency percentage from theTransparency drop-down lists.
6) Deselect the object to save the changes to the area fill.

Note
The type of transparency effect selected for an area fill changes the options
available for a transparency in the Area panel on the Sidebar.

Line and Filling toolbar formatting
1) If Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 96) is not open, go to View > Toolbars > Line andFilling on the Menu bar.
2) Select an object so that the selection handles are displayed.
3) Select a fill type (None, Color, Gradient, Hatching, Bitmap, or Pattern) from the Area
Style/Filling drop-down list.
4) Select a fill effect from the options available for each fill type from the Select the effect toapply drop-down list.
5) Deselect the object to save the changes to the area fill.

Working with area fills
The following instructions on area fills use the Area dialog as the main method of selecting andediting an area fill. The tools and options available in the Area panel in the Properties deck on
the Sidebar and on the Line and Filling toolbar are similar, but have reduced options and different
names.

Color fills
The following procedures to select and format colors for area fills uses the Area dialog. Using thetools on the Line and Filling Toolbar and the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar issimilar, but have fewer options available.

Selecting color fill
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog (Figure 94 on page 90), then click on Color toopen the options available for a color fill.
3) In Colors, select the required palette from the available options in the Palette drop-down
list.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 91

4) Click on the color required in the selected palette. All color fills available are solid colors.
The Active preview box shows the present color fill of a selected object. After selecting acolor, a preview of the selected color appears in the New preview box.
5) Alternatively, use one of the following methods to select a color.
– Enter the RGB values on a 0 to 255 scale, or Hex number of a color in theappropriate text box.
– If a color has been used before, then select the required color from the colors
available in Recent Colors.
6) To revert back to the original color, click on Reset and any changes made are removed.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The color area fill is thenchanged in the selected object.

Creating custom colors using Area dialog
1) Select a filled object to create a color.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Color toopen the options available for a color fill.
3) Create a custom color using one of the following methods:– Specify the values of Red (R), Green (G), and Blue (B) on a 0 to 255 scale.
– Click on Pick to open the Pick a Color dialog (Figure 97), see “Creating custom colors
using Pick a Color dialog” below.
4) Click on Add in Custom Palette and enter a name for the color in the Name dialog that
opens.
5) Click OK to close the Name dialog and the color is added to the Custom palette.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The new custom color appears
as a fill in the selected object and is available for use in other drawings or documents.

Creating custom colors using Pick a Color dialog
1) Select a filled object to create a color.
2) Open the Pick a Color dialog (Figure 97) using one of the following methods:– Click on Pick on the Colors page of the Area dialog.
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Fill Color in the Area panel of the Properties deck on
the Sidebar and select Custom Color.
– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Fill Color on the Line and Filling toolbar and selectCustom Color.
3) Create a custom color using one of the following methods. A preview of the color being
created is shown on the left side of the original color box below the color selection box.
– Select a color range from the colored bar, then, using the cursor, move the target in
the colored box until the cursor is on the color required.
– Enter values for Red (R), Green (G), and Blue (B) in the RGB text boxes.
– Alternatively, if known, enter the Hex# number in the text box. Hex numbers arenormally used when a specific color has been created for a company logo orcompany name.

92 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 97: Pick a Color dialog– Alternatively, enter values for Hue (H), Saturation (S), and Brightness (B) in the HSB
text boxes. HSB values do not change the color, but how a color looks.
– Alternatively, enter values for Cyan (C), Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Key (K) (black)in the CMYK text boxes.

Note
Changing one set of color values also changes the color values in the other setsof color values.
4) Click OK to close the Pick a Color dialog and save the changes.
5) Click on Add in Custom Palette and enter a name for the color in the Name dialog that
opens.
6) Click OK to close the Name dialog and the color is added to the Custom palette.
7) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The new color appears as a fillin the selected object and is available for use in other drawings or documents.

Deleting custom colors
1) Select a filled object that uses the color fill for deletion.
2) Open the Area dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Area on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Area from the context menu.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 93

– Click on More Options on the right of the Area section title on the Sidebar.
3) Click on Area, then click on Colors to open the Colors page.
4) In Colors, select Custom from the Palette drop-down list.
5) Select the color for deletion and click on Delete. There is no confirmation given whendeleting a color.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
Only custom colors available in the custom palette can be deleted using the Area
dialog. Colors that are available in LibreOffice color palettes cannot be deleted.

Gradient fills
Several predefined gradients are included when LibreOffice is installed. It is recommended tocreate custom gradients that match the requirements rather than modifying the installed
predefined gradients. Predefined gradients may have been used in other objects in a drawing orother documents.
Custom gradients are saved with a unique name allowing the custom gradient to be used in otherdrawings or documents. Custom gradients are placed at the end of the gradients displayed in theGradient box on the Gradient page of the Area dialog (Figure 98).

Selecting gradient fills
The following procedure to select a gradient for an area fill uses the Area dialog. Using the toolson the Line and Filling Toolbar, and the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar is asimilar procedure, but the available options are reduced.
1) Make sure the object to be filled is selected in a drawing.

Figure 98: Area dialog — Gradient page94 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient toopen the options available for a gradient fill.
3) In Gradient, select the required gradient from the list of available gradients and thegradient appears in Preview.
4) To override the default gradient transition of a selection, deselect Automatic in Options
and then enter the values for Type, Increment, Center, Angle, Border, From Color and To
Color to modify the gradient to the requirements. As changes are made, the gradientdisplayed in Preview also changes indicating how the gradient will look. For more
information on gradient options, see “Table 3: Gradient options” below.
5) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The gradient area fill thenappears in the selected object.

Note
Selecting and modifying a gradient using the above method only allows thegradient to be used in the drawing being created. If a modified gradient is to be
used in other drawings or documents, then create a custom gradient and save itwith a unique name. See “Creating custom gradients” below.
Table 3: Gradient options
Gradient property

Meaning

Linear gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in astraight line.

Axial gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color fromthe object center to the object edges in two opposite directions.

Radial gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in acircular pattern.

Ellipsoid gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color in an
elliptical pattern.

Quadratic gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color fromthe object edges to the object center in four directions.

Square gradient

The color transitions from the starting color to the end color fromthe object edges to the object center in a square pattern.

Increment

Enter the number of steps for blending the two colors of thegradient. By default this is set to Automatic.

Center X

For Radial, Ellipsoid, Square and Rectangular gradients, modify
these values to set the horizontal offset of the gradient center.

Center Y

For Radial, Ellipsoid, Square and Rectangular gradients, modify
these values to set the vertical offset of the gradient center.

Angle

For all gradient types, modifies the angle of the gradient axis.

BorderIncrease this value to make the gradient start further away from theborder of the shape.

From Color

The start color for the gradient. In the edit box enter the intensity of
the color: 0% corresponds to black, 100% to the full color.

To Color

The end color for the gradient. In the edit box enter the intensity of
the color: 0% corresponds to black, 100% to the full color.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 95

Creating custom gradients
To use a modified gradient in other drawings or documents, a custom gradient has to be savedwith a unique name.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient toopen the options available for a gradient fill.
3) Select a gradient and modify it using the options given in “Table 3: Gradient options”
above. As changes are made, the gradient displayed in Preview also changes indicating
how the modified gradient will look.
4) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.
5) Enter a unique name for the new gradient, then click OK to close the Name dialog. The
custom gradient is placed at the end of the gradients displayed in Gradient and becomes
available for use in other drawings and documents.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Modifying custom gradients
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient toopen the options available for a gradient fill.
3) Select a custom gradient in Gradient. Custom gradients appear below the predefined
gradients in Gradient.
4)Enter the new values for the gradient options that need to be changed. See “Table 3:
Gradient options” above for more information on gradient options. Depending on the typeof gradient selected, some options may not be available.

5) If necessary and to revert back to the original gradient, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click on Modify to permanently change the selected custom gradient. There is no
confirmation given when modifying a custom gradient.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Note
Using the Modify option on the Gradient page in the Area dialog permanently
changes a gradient and cannot be undone. It is recommended to only modify
custom gradients and not the installed LibreOffice gradients.

Renaming gradients
1) Select the object that uses the gradient that is going to be renamed.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Gradient toopen the options available for a gradient fill.
3) Right-click on the gradient and select Rename from the context menu.
4) Enter a name for the gradient in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK save the change and close the Name dialog.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

96 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Deleting custom gradients
1) Select an object that uses a gradient fill.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog, then click on Gradient.
3) In the Gradient box, select the custom gradient for deletion.
4) Right click on the gradient and select Delete from the context menu. Click on Yes toconfirm the deletion.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
It is recommended to only rename or delete custom gradients that have beencreated. Deleting or renaming one of the predefined gradients that are installedwith LibreOffice may cause problems in drawings and documents that use one of
the gradients.

Advanced gradient controls
LibreOffice provides advanced gradient controls on the Transformations toolbar (Figure 99).
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog, then click on Gradient.
3) Go to View > Toolbars > Transformations on the Menu bar, or click on theTransformations tool on the Line and Filling toolbar to open the Transformations toolbar.
4) Click on Interactive gradient tool in the Transformations toolbar. This displays a dashedline connecting two colored squares (Figure 100). The colors show the From Color and
To Color used for the selected gradient.
5) Select the type of gradient required for the object from the options in the Type drop-downlist. Properties available for adjustment depend on the gradient type selected, as
explained below. Moving the squares has different effects depending on gradient type.
– Linear — move From Color square to change where the gradient starts (bordervalue). Move the To Color square to change the orientation (angle value).

Figure 99: Transformations toolbar

Figure 100: Example of using interactive gradient

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 97

– Axial — move the To Color square to change both the angle and border properties of
the gradient. Only the To Color square can be moved.
– Radial — move the From Color square to modify the border property to set the widthof the gradient circle. Move the To Color square to change the point where thegradient ends (Center X and Center Y values).
– Ellipsoid — move the From Color square to modify the border property to set thesize of the gradient ellipsoid. Move the To Color square to change the angle of theellipsoid axis and the axis itself.
– Quadratic — move the From Color square to modify the border property to set thesize of the gradient square or rectangle and the angle of the gradient shape. Move
the To Color square to change the center of the gradient.
– Square — move the From Color square to modify the border property to set the sizeof the gradient square or rectangle and the angle of the gradient shape. Move the To
Color square to change the center of the gradient.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
Moving the squares creates different effects depending on the type of gradient.
For example, for a linear gradient, the start and end squares of the gradient arealways situated either side of the center point of the object.

Image fills
Several predefined images are included when LibreOffice is installed on a computer. The content
of the supplied images cannot be edited, but the display settings can be changed. Also, images
can be imported from other sources.

Figure 101: Area dialog — Image page

98 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Selecting images
The following procedure to select an image for an area fill uses the Image page of the Area
dialog (Figure 101). Using the tools on the Line and Filling Toolbar, and the Area panel in theProperties deck on the Sidebar is a similar procedure, but the available options are reduced.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image toopen the options available for an image fill.
3) In Image, select the required image from the list of available images and it appears inPreview. Alternatively, click on Add/Import to open a file browser window, then select afile to use as an image fill.
4) If necessary, change the values in Style, Size, Position, Tiling Position, and Tiling Offset
to modify the image to the requirements. For more information on image options, see“Table 4: Image options” below.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original image, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The image fill then appears inthe selected object.
Table 4: Image options
Bitmap option

Meaning

Style — Custom
position/size

When this option is selected, the position and size of the image
in the object can be specified.

Style — Tiled

When this option is selected, the image is tiled to fill the area.
The size of the image used for the tiling is determined by theSize settings

Style — Stretched

When this option is selected, an image is stretched to fill theobject area.

Size — Width

Sets the width of the image. For example, 100% means that theimage is resized to occupy the whole fill area width, 50% meansthat the width of the image is half that of the fill area.

Size — Height

Sets the height of the image. For example, 100% means that theimage is resized to occupy the whole fill area height, 50% meansthat the height of the image is half that of the fill area.

Size — Scale

When selected, image size is given as a percentage for Widthand Height. When deselected, the actual size of the image is
given for Width and Height.

Position

Specifies the anchoring point of the image.

Tiling Position —X-Offset

Sets the offset for the width of the image in percentage values.
50% offset means that Draw places the middle part of the image
width at the anchor point and start tiling from there.

Tiling Position —Y-Offset

Sets the offset for the height of the image in percentage values.
50% offset means that Draw places the middle part of the image
height at the anchor point and start tiling from there.

Tiling Offset

Offsets the columns of tiled images by the percentage entered in
the box so that two subsequent columns of images are notaligned.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 99

Figure 102: Examples of image fills
1)
2)
3)

Original image.
Width and height 25% scaled. Anchor top left
corner. No offset.
Width and height 25% scaled. Anchor top right.
Row offset 50%.

Editing images
1) Select an object for editing that contains an image as a fill, or insert an image into aselected object
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image toopen the options available for an image fill.
3) Select an image from the options available in Image to use and edit as a fill. Note thatimported images are also available. The selected image appears in Preview.
4) Change the values for Style, Size, Position, Tiling Position, and Tiling Offset to therequirements. For more information on image options, see “Table 4: Image options”
above. Examples of image or bitmap fills and the properties used are shown in
Figure 102.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original image, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
Supplied images cannot be edited, but the display settings for placement andtiling can be changed.

Importing images
1) Select an object to import an image into the object.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image toopen the options available for an image fill.
3) Click on Add/Import and a file browser window opens.
100 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

4) Navigate to the directory containing the image file, then select the file and click Open.
5) Enter a unique name for the new image in the Name dialog that opens, then click OK toclose the Name dialog. The imported image appears at the bottom of the images
displayed in Image.
6) Select the imported image in Image.
7) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The imported image fill appears
in the selected object.

Renaming images
1) Select an object that uses an image.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Image toopen the options available for an image fill.
3) Right-click on the selected image and select Rename from the context menu.
4) Enter a new name for the image in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the change and close the Name dialog.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Deleting images
1) Make sure the object containing an image fill is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog, then click on Image.
3) Right click on the selected image being deleted, then select Delete from the context
menu. Click on Yes to confirm the deletion.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
It is recommended to only rename or delete images that have been created orimported. Renaming or deleting images that are installed with LibreOffice may
cause problems in documents that uses one of these images.

Pattern fills
Several LibreOffice pattern fills are installed during a LibreOffice installation. Custom patterns
can also be created and modified in LibreOffice.

Selecting pattern fills
The following procedure selects a pattern for an area fill using the Area dialog. The tools on theLine and Filling Toolbar, and the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar have a similar
procedure, but the available options are reduced.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern toopen the options available for a pattern fill (Figure 103).
3) In Pattern, select the required pattern and the selected pattern appears in Preview.
4) If necessary, change the foreground and background colors, or the pattern itself, as
described in “Creating custom patterns” below. As changes are made, the patterndisplayed in Preview also changes indicating how the pattern will look. Any changes willaffect only the object being filled.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 101

Figure 103: Area dialog — Pattern page5) If necessary and to revert back to the original pattern, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The pattern fill then appears inthe selected object.

Creating custom patterns
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page.
3) Select the required pattern in Pattern to use as a starting point and the selected pattern
appears in Preview.
4) In Options, select a color from the available color palettes for the Foreground Color andBackground Color. The pattern remains the same, but the colors change.
5) In Pattern Editor, click on individual squares to change the color from Foreground Color to
Background Color, or from Background Color to Foreground Color creating a new pattern.
6) In Preview, check the pattern being created to see if the desired effect is being achieved.
7) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.
8) Enter a unique name for the new pattern, then click OK to close the Name dialog. The
custom pattern is placed at the end of the patterns displayed in Pattern and becomes
available for use in other drawings and documents.
9) If necessary and to revert back to the original pattern, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
10) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Note
To use a modified pattern in other drawings or documents, the custom pattern has
to be saved with a unique name.
102 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Modifying custom patterns
Using the Modify option on the Pattern page in the Area dialog permanently changes a patternand cannot be undone. It is recommended to only modify custom patterns and not the LibreOfficepatterns that were installed.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern.
3) Select a custom pattern from the patterns displayed in Pattern and the selected pattern
appears in Preview. Custom patterns are located below the predefined patterns in the
Pattern.
4) In Pattern Editor, click on each square to change the color from Foreground Color to
Background Color, or from Background Color to Foreground Color modifying the selected
pattern.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original pattern, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click on Modify to permanently change the selected custom pattern. There is no
confirmation given when modifying a custom pattern.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Renaming patterns
1) Select an object that contains a pattern, or insert a pattern into the selected object.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern toopen the options available for a pattern fill. The selected pattern appears in Pattern
Editor.
3) Right-click on the pattern for renaming in Preview and select Rename from the context
menu.
4) Enter a name for the pattern in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the renaming and close the Name box.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Deleting custom patterns
1) Select an object that contains a pattern, or insert a pattern into the selected object.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Pattern toopen the options available for a pattern fill. The selected pattern appears in Pattern
Editor.
3) Right-click on the pattern for deletion in the Preview box and select Delete from thecontext menu.
4) Click on Yes to confirm the deletion.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
It is recommended to only modify, delete or rename custom patterns that havebeen created. Modifying, deleting or renaming one of the LibreOffice patterns thatare installed may cause problems in drawings and documents using one of thepatterns.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 103

Figure 104: Area dialog — Hatch page

Hatch fills
Hatch fills are similar to pattern fills, but use lines instead of squares. Several predefined hatch
fills are included when LibreOffice is installed on a computer. Custom hatch fills can also becreated and modified.

Selecting hatch fills
The following procedure to select a hatch for an area fill uses the Area dialog. Using the tools on
the Line and Filling Toolbar, and the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar is similar,
but the available options are reduced.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch toopen the options available for a hatch fill (Figure 104).
3) Select a hatch from the options shown in Hatch and the selected hatch fill appears in thePreview.
4) If necessary, change the colors or other options, as described in “Creating custom hatch
fills” below. As changes are made, the hatch fill displayed in Preview also changes.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original hatch fill, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The hatch fill then appears in theselected object.

Creating custom hatch fills
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch toopen the options available for a hatch fill.

104 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

3) Select the required hatch fill in Hatch as a starting point and the selected hatch fillappears in Preview.
4) Change the values for Spacing, Angle, Line type, Line color, and Background color to edit
the hatch fill to the requirements. For more information on hatch fill options, see “Table 5:
Hatch fill options” below.
5) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.
6) Enter a unique name for the new hatch fill, then click OK to close the Name dialog. The
custom hatch fill is placed at the end of the hatch fills displayed in Hatch and becomes
available for use in other drawings and documents.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes. The new hatch fill appears in theselected object.
Table 5: Hatch fill options
Hatching option

Meaning

Spacing

Determines the spacing between two lines of the hatch fill. As thevalue is changed, the preview window is updated.

Angle

Use the mini map below the numerical value to quickly set theangle formed by the line to multiples of 45 degrees. If the required
angle is not a multiple of 45 degrees, enter the desired value in theedit box.

Line typeSet single, double, or triple line for the style of the hatch fill.

Line color

Use the list to select the color of the lines that will form the hatch fill.

Background color

When selected, adds a color fill behind the lines used for the hatch
fill.

Modifying custom hatch fills
Using the Modify option on the Hatch page in the Area dialog permanently changes a hatch fill
and cannot be undone.
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch toopen the options available for a hatch fill.
3) Select a custom hatch fill in Hatch and the selected hatch fill appears in Preview. Custom
hatch fills are located below the predefined hatch fills in Hatch.
4) Change the values for Spacing, Angle, Line type, Line color, and Background color to edit
the hatch fill. For more information on hatch options, see “Table 5: Hatch fill options”
above.
5) If necessary and to revert back to the original hatch fill, click on Reset and any changes
made are removed.
6) Click on Modify to permanently change the selected custom hatch fill. There is no
confirmation given when modifying a custom hatch fill.
7) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Renaming hatch fills
1) Select the object that contains the hatch fill that is to be renamed.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Area to open the Area page, then click on Hatch toopen the options available for a hatch fill.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 105

3) Right-click on the hatch fill displayed in Hatch and select Rename from the context menu.
4) Enter a name for the hatch fill in the Name dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the renaming and close the Name dialog.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Deleting custom hatch fills
1) Select an object that uses the hatch fill for deletion.
2) Open the Area page on the Area dialog, then click on Hatch.
3) In the Hatch box, select the custom hatch fill for deletion.
4) Right-click on the hatch fill and select Delete from the context menu. Click on Yes toconfirm the deletion.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog.

Note
It is recommended to only modify, rename or delete hatch fills that have beencreated. Modifying, renaming or deleting hatch fills that were installed with
LibreOffice may cause problems in documents that use one of these hatch fills.

Background image fills
Background image fills are used to allow an object create windows in a drawing and display abackground image that has been placed on the drawing. Figure 105 shows an example of anellipse, the topmost object, being used as a window through the underlying pentagon andrectangle objects to show a portion of the background image.
1) Select a page in a drawing that uses a background image.
2) Insert several objects onto the drawing page and position the objects into a stack.
3) Add an object that is going to be used as window onto the object stack as the topmost
object and make sure it is selected.
4) Change the fill of the selected object to a background image fill using one of the following
methods:

Figure 105: Example of using Background Fill106 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

– On the Line and Filling toolbar, select Use Slide Background from the options
available in the Area/Style Filling drop-down list.
– In the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, select Use Slide
Background from the options available in the Fill drop-down list.
5) Deselect the object and the background image appears in the object creating a window.

Notes
There are no options available for using a background image fill. When abackground image fill is applied to an object, the whole of the object area is used
for the area fill.
The option Use Slide Background is not available as an option for area fills in
the Area dialog.

Working with shadows
Shadow options
Shadows can be applied to objects such as lines, shapes and text. The options available forshadows are as follows:• Position – select one of nine points determining the direction in which the shadow is
cast.
• Distance or Angle – determines the offset distance between the object and the shadow.
• Color – sets the color used for the shadow.
• Blur – sets how much the edges of a shadow are blurred or softened.
• Transparency – determines the amount of transparency for the shadow: 0% opaqueshadow, 100% transparent shadow.

Default shadows
To quickly apply a shadow to an object, select the object and click on Shadow in the Line andFilling toolbar. The shadow applied to an object uses the default shadow settings in LibreOffice.

Note
For more control when applying shadows, use the Shadow page in Area or Linedialogs. The following information uses using the Shadow page in the Area dialog(Figure 106), but can also be applied to the Shadow page in the Line dialog.

Formatting shadows
For a more control when adding shadows to an object, use the Shadow page on the Area or Linedialog as follows:
1) Select an object where a shadow is going to be applied.
2) Open the Area dialog and click on Shadow to open the Shadow page (Figure 106).
3) Select Use shadow in Properties and the shadow options become active.
4) Select from one of nine points the direction in which the shadow is going to be cast in
relation to the object.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 107

5) In Color, select the color palette from the drop-down list of available palettes and thenselect the color required for the shadow.
6) In Distance, enter a distance to set spacing between the object and the shadow.
7) In Blur, enter a value to soften the edges of the shadow.
8) In Transparency, enter a percentage for the shadow transparency.
9) Click OK to close the Area or Line dialog and save the changes.

Figure 106: Area dialog — Shadow page

Figure 107: Shadow panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

108 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Sidebar shadow formatting1) Select an object where a shadow is going to be applied.
2) Click on Properties to open the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
3) Click on Shadow to open the Shadow panel (Figure 107) in the Properties deck.
4) Select Enable and the shadow options become active.
5) In Angle, select from one of the options in the drop-down list to set the direction of where
the shadow is going to be cast in relation to the object.
6) In Color, select the color palette from the drop-down list of available palettes and thenselect the color required for the shadow.
7) In Distance, enter a distance to set spacing between the object and the shadow.
8) In Blur, enter a value to soften the edges of the shadow.
9) In Transparency, move the slider or enter a percentage in the text box to set the shadowtransparency.
10) Deselect the object to save the changes made.

Working with transparencies
Transparencies can be applied to objects and shadows that have been applied to an object. In
Draw, two types of transparencies can be applied to an object – uniform transparency andgradient transparency.. For more information on gradient transparencies, including an example ofcombining a color gradient with a gradient transparency, see “Gradient fills” on page 94.
Transparencies can be applied to area fills as well as shadows and lines.
• To use transparencies on lines, refer to “Who is this user guide for?” on page 8 for more
information.
• To use transparencies on shadows, refer to “Working with shadows” on page 107 formore information.
The following procedure applies a transparency to an object area fill using the Area dialog(Figure 108):
1) Make sure the object is selected in a drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog, then click on Transparency to the open the Transparency page
and access the available options.
3) To create a uniform transparency, select Transparency and enter a percentage in the textbox.
4) To create a gradient transparency so that the area becomes gradually transparent, selectGradient and select the type of gradient transparency from the drop-down list: Linear,
Axial, Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic or Square. See “Table 3” on page 95 for more
information on gradient types.
5) Set the parameters for the type of the gradient transparency selected above. Refer to“Table 6: Transparency parameters” below for a description of the properties. The
parameters available depends on the type of gradient transparency selected above.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog and save the changes.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 109

Figure 108: Area dialog — Transparency page
Table 6: Transparency parameters
Transparency
parameters

Meaning

Centre X

For Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square gradients. The
values to set the horizontal offset of the gradient center.

Center Y

For Radial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square gradients. The
values to set the vertical offset of the gradient center.

Angle

For Linear, Axial, Ellipsoid, Quadratic and Square gradients.
Specifies the angle of the gradient axis.

BorderIncrease this value to make the gradient start further awayfrom the border of the object.

Start value

Value for the starting transparency gradient. 0% is fully
opaque, 100% means fully transparent.

End value

Value for the ending transparency gradient. 0% is fully opaque,
100% means fully transparent.

Drawing styles
If the same area fill, line thickness, and border are to be applied to a set of objects, this repetitive
process is simplified by using styles. Styles allows format to be defined and applied to multiple
objects. For more information on styles, see the Writer Guide.

Note
The drawing styles included with LibreOffice Draw cannot be deleted or renamed,but can be modified to the drawing requirements. Drawing styles can be hidden
when not required, except for drawing styles that have been used in a drawing.

Style categories
All Styles
Displays all the drawing styles available for use.

110 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 109: Styles deck on Sidebar

Tips
Hierarchical styles are used when multiple objects differ in one or two options but
are otherwise identically formatted. Create a parent style for the objects including
borders, area fill, font, and so on. Then create a hierarchical or child styles, which
differ, for example, in fill color. If the font size or the thickness of a border needs tobe changed, it is sufficient to change the parent style and all the child styles arechanged accordingly.
At the bottom of the Styles deck on the Sidebar there is a drop-down list allowing
selection of the style category. The style categories available are Hierarchical, All
Styles, Hidden Styles, Applied Styles, and Custom Styles.
Applied Styles
Displays drawing styles that have been used in the selected drawing.
Hierarchical Styles
Displays the drawing styles in a hierarchical list (also known as a linked or parent/childstyles). To view the styles in a sub-level, click on the triangle ► or chevron > next to thestyle name listing the styles available in the sub-level, as shown in Figure 109.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 111

Custom Styles
Displays all the user created drawing styles that are available for use.
Hidden Styles
Displays all the drawing styles that a user has hidden when not required.

Note
When an object is placed into a drawing, the Default Drawing Style isautomatically applied.

Selecting styles
Styles can only be selected and applied to objects using the Styles deck on the Sidebar(Figure 109).
1) Select the object for style application.
2) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar using one of the following methods:– Go to View > Sidebar on the Menu bar, then click on Styles at the right side of the
Sidebar.
– Click on Show the Styles Sidebar on the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Go to View > Styles on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F11.
3) Select a style category from the drop-down list at the bottom of the Styles deck.
4) In the Styles deck, double-click on the style required for the selected object.
5) If necessary, create a custom style or modify the selected style to the requirements.

Note
It is recommended to create custom styles rather than modify the drawing styles
installed with LibreOffice. Modifying drawing styles installed with LibreOffice may
cause problems if the style has been used in other drawings.

Creating custom styles
After creating a custom style, it is placed in All Styles and Custom Styles categories in the
Styles deck of the Sidebar. When the custom style is applied to an object, the custom style also
appears in Applied Styles.

Using Styles deck1) Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar.
2) Right click on the style required as a starting point to create a custom style and selectNew from the context menu to open the Graphic Styles dialog (Figure 110).
3) Click on the Organizer tab to open the Organizer page in the Graphic Styles dialog.
4) In the Name text box, enter a unique style name.
5) In Inherit from text box, select None from the drop-down list if the new drawing style is
NOT going to be linked. When the object was created, it was allocated the Default
Drawing Style and this new drawing style is linked by default to the Default Drawing Style.

112 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 110: Graphic Styles dialog — Organizer page6) If the new style is to inherit settings from an existing style, select a style from the Inherit
from: drop-down list.
7) Use the options on the various pages of the Graphic Styles dialog to format andcategorize a new style.
– Organizer – contains a summary of the style and its hierarchical position.
– Font, Font Effects, Indents & Spacing, Alignment, and Tabs – sets the attributesof the text inserted into a text box or graphic object.
– Dimensioning – sets the style of dimension lines when used on an object.
– Text, Text Animation, Connector, Line, Area, Shadowing, Highlighting andTransparency – sets the attributes for the object format..
8) Click OK to save the new style and close the Graphic Styles dialog.

Note
Any new drawing style created is automatically placed in the Custom Styles
category.

Using New Style from Selection
Using New Style from Selection allows all formatting to be made to an object first and thencreate a drawing style from the formatting changes.
1) Select an object to create a new style from, or create a new object in a drawing.
2) Format the object using the tools and options from the Graphic Styles dialog, Area dialog,
Line dialog, Properties deck on the Sidebar, or Line and Filling toolbar.
3) Make sure the object is selected and create the new style using one of the following
methods:– Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar and click on New Style from Selection at the
top right of the deck.
– Go to Format > Styles > New Style from Selection on the Menu bar.
4) In the New Style from Selection dialog, type a unique name for the new style. This dialog
also shows existing custom styles.
5) Click OK to save the new style and close the New Style from Selection dialog.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 113

Modifying styles
1) Select an object in a drawing.
2) Click on Styles on the left of the Sidebar to open the Styles deck.
3) Open the Graphic Styles dialog using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Styles > Edit Style on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Edit Style from the context menu.
– Right-click on the style that is highlighted in the Styles deck on the Sidebar and selectModify from the context menu.
4) Use the options on the various pages of the Graphic Styles dialog to modify the style.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Graphic Styles dialog.

Note
It is recommended to only modify custom styles. Modifying styles installed with
LibreOffice may cause problems in other documents using one of these styles.

Editing hierarchical or parent styles
If an object uses a style that is linked to a hierarchical or parent style, then it is possible to edit
the hierarchical or parent style.
1) Select an object in a drawing that uses a linked style.
2) Open the Graphic Styles dialog and click on Organizer to open the Organizer page in
the Graphic Styles dialog.
3) Check that the style name in the Inherit from text box is the hierarchical or parent style forediting, then use the options on the various pages in the Graphic Styles dialog to edit thestyle.
4) If the hierarchical or parent style is NOT the one required:a) Click on Edit Style to the right of the Inherit from text box until the name of the style isdisplayed.
b) Use the options on the various pages in the Graphic Styles dialog to edit the style.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Graphic Styles dialog.

Note
It is recommended to create custom hierarchical styles rather than modify the
LibreOffice hierarchical styles. Modifying hierarchical styles installed with
LibreOffice may cause problems if the style has been used in other drawings.

Updating styles
Using Update Style allows all the formatting to an object to be made first and then update thedrawing style used by the object.
1) Select the object to modify the drawing style the object uses.
2) Format the object using the tools and options from the Graphic Styles dialog, Area dialog,
Line dialog, Properties deck on the Sidebar, or Line and Filling toolbar.

114 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

3) Update the drawing style using one of the following methods. There is no confirmation
when updating a drawing style.
– Open the Styles deck on the Sidebar and click on Update Style at the top right.
– Go to Format > Styles > Update Selected Style on the Menu bar

Note
Make sure to only update custom styles that have been created. Updating styles
that are part of the default installation of LibreOffice could cause problems inother documents that use LibreOffice drawing styles.

Applying styles
Drawing styles are applied to an object using the Styles deck on the Sidebar as follows:
1) Select the object to apply a drawing style.
2) Click on Styles on the Line and Filling toolbar, or click on Styles on the Sidebar.
3) Double click on the style name to apply the drawing style to the selected object.

Deleting styles
Predefined styles in LibreOffice cannot be deleted, even if the styles are not being used. Only
custom styles can be deleted.
1) To open a list of styles, use one of the following methods:– Click on Styles on the Line and Filling toolbar.
– Click on Styles on the Sidebar.
2) Select Applied Styles from the drop-down list at the bottom of the Styles deck on the
Sidebar.
3) Right click on the style name in the styles list and select Delete from the context menu.
4) If the style is used on an object, a warning message appears stating that the selected
object will revert back to the default drawing style. Select Yes to confirm deletion of thestyle.
5) If the style is not in use, select Yes to confirm deletion of the style and there is no
confirmation message.

Note
Before deleting a custom style, it is recommended to make sure the drawing style
is not in use by checking the list of drawing styles in the Applied Styles category.

Special effects
As well as the basic actions of moving and resizing an object, a number of special effects canalso be applied to objects in Draw. Several of these effects are readily available in theTransformations toolbar. If the Transformations toolbar (Figure 99 on page 97) is not open, go to
View > Toolbars > Transformations on the Menu bar and select Transformations.
The tools on the Transformations toolbar are described in the following sections with the
exception of the In 3-D Rotation Object tool, which is described in Chapter 7, Working with 3D
Objects.
Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 115

Figure 111: Example of manual rotation

Rotating objects
Manual rotation
1) Select an object for rotation so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Use one of the following methods to switch the selected object into rotation mode. The
selection handles change shape and color when in rotation mode (Figure 111).
– Click again on the selected object.
– Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Transformations on the Line and Filling andselect Rotate from the context menu.
– If the Transformations toolbar is open, click on Rotate.
3) Move the cursor over one of the corner handles and the cursor changes shape. Only
corner selection handles are active for rotation.
4) Click and hold on a corner selection handle and drag the object to rotate it.
5) To restrict the rotation angles to multiples of 15 degrees, press and hold the Shift key
while rotating the object. This is useful for rotating objects through 90 deg.
6) When satisfied with the rotation, release the corner selection handle.
7) By default, the rotation pivot point is a small circle in the center of the selected object. Tochange the center of object rotation, click and hold the rotation pivot point, then drag it toa new position. The rotation pivot point can be positioned outside of the selected object.

Sidebar rotation
1) Select the object for rotation so that the selection handles are displayed.
2) Open the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 112).
3) Rotate the object using one of the following options:– Click on and drag the Rotation Angle indicator in Rotation.
– Enter a rotation angle in the Select the angle for rotation text box.
4) After rotating the object, click outside the object to deselect the object and save thechanges.

116 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 112: Position and Size panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 113: Position and Size dialog — Rotation page

Position and Size dialog
1) Select the object for rotation so that the selection handles are displayed.

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 117

2) Open the Position and Size dialog (Figure 113) using one of the following methods:– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.
– Select Format > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Position and Size from the context menu.
3) Click Rotation to open the Rotation page.
4) If required, in Pivot Point enter a value for Position X and Position Y to move the positionof the pivot point. The default position of the pivot point is the center of the object.
Alternatively, select a pivot point from one of the 9 positions in Default settings.
5) In Rotation Angle, rotate the object using one of the following methods:– In the Angle text box, enter the degrees of rotation required.
– Click on and drag the rotation indicator in Default settings.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Position and Size dialog.

Flipping objects
Quick flipping
1) Select the object for flipping to display the selection handles.
2) Use one of the following methods to flip the object vertically or horizontally:– Right click on the object and select Flip > Horizontally or Flip > Vertically from thecontext menu.
– In the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, click on Flip
Vertically or Flip Horizontally.
– In the Line and Filling toolbar, click on Vertically or Horizontally.
– Go to Shape > Flip > Vertically or Horizontally on the Menu bar.

Flip tool
Using Flip on the Transformations toolbar (Figure 99 on page 97), the position and angle that theobject flips over can be changed, as shown by the example in Figure 114.
1) Select the object for flipping to display the selection handles.
2) Click on Flip on the Transformations toolbar and the symmetry axis appears as a dashedline through the middle of the object. The object is flipped about this symmetry axis.

Figure 114: Example of using Flip tool
1)

Flip selected

118 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

2)

Symmetry axis moved

3)

Flip result

1) Click and drag one or both ends of the symmetry axis setting the axis orientation.
2) Place the cursor over one of the object selection handles until it changes shape.
3) Click and hold the selection then drag the object across to the other side of the symmetry
axis until the object appears flipped over. The angle and position of the flip depends on
the angle and position of the symmetry axis.
4) Release the selection handle and the object is flipped.

Note
Pressing and holding the Shift key while moving the symmetry axis allows
rotation in 45 degree increments

Mirror copies
At the moment there is no mirror command available in Draw. However, mirroring an object canbe emulated by copying and flipping the object as follows:
1) Select the object to copy the object to the clipboard.
2) Flip the object using the procedures in “Flipping objects” above.
3) Click in an empty area on the drawing to deselect the object.
4) Paste the copy of the original object back into its original location creating a mirror copy.
5) If necessary, select both objects and align them using one of the following methods:– Go to Shape > Align on the Menu bar and use one of the alignment options.
– Right-click the selected objects and select Align from the context menu, then selectone of the alignment options.

Distorting images
Three tools on the Transformations toolbar allow an object to be distorted.
• Distort – distorts an object in perspective.
• Set to circle (slant) and Set in Circle (perspective) – both create a pseudo 3D effect.

Note
Before distorting an object, the object must be converted to a curve. Transforming
an object into a curve is a safe operation, but cannot be reversed other than byclicking Format > Undo on the Menu bar.

Figure 115: Example of using Set in Circle (perspective) tool1)

Original object

2)

Set in Circle (perspective) distortion

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 119

Set in circle (perspective)
An example of distorting an object with the Set in Circle (perspective) tool is shown in
Figure 115.
1) Select an object and click on the Set in Circle (perspective) in the Transformations
toolbar.
2) Click Yes to convert the object to a curve. If the object is already a curve, this dialog does
not appear.
3) Click and drag one of the selection handles to give a pseudo 3D perspective using the
opposite side as an anchor point. A ghosted image appears as the object is distorted togive an indication of how the resulting object will look.

Set to circle (slant)
An example of distorting an object with the Set to circle (slant) tool is shown in Figure 116.
1) Select an object and click on the Set to circle (slant) in the Transformations toolbar.

Figure 116: Example of using Set in circle (slant) tool1)

Original object

2)

Set in circle (slant) distortion

3)
4)

Vertical distortion
Horizontal distortion

Figure 117: Example of using Distort tool
1)
2)

Original object
Corner distortion

120 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

1) Click Yes to convert the object to a curve. If the object is already a curve, this dialog does
not appear.
2) Click and drag one of the selection handles to give a pseudo 3D perspective using the
opposite side as an anchor point. A ghosted image appears as the object is distorted togive an indication of how the resulting object will look.

DistortExamples of distorting an object with the Distort tool are shown in Figure 117.
1) Select an object and click on Distort on the Transformations toolbar.
2) Click Yes to convert the object to a curve. If the object is already a curve, this dialog does
not appear.
3) Click and drag a corner selection handle to distort the object using the opposite corner
selection handle as an anchor point for the distortion.
4) Click and drag the vertical selection handles to distort the object using the opposite
vertical side as an anchor point for the distortion.
5) Click and drag the horizontal selection handles to distort the object using the opposite
horizontal side as an anchor point for the distortion.

Dynamic gradients
Transparency gradients are controlled in the same manner as color gradients and both types ofgradient are used together. With a transparency gradient, the direction and degree of object fillcolor changes from opaque to transparent. In a color gradient, the fill changes from one color toanother, but the degree of transparency remains the same.
Two icons on the Transformations toolbar dynamically control transparency and color gradients.
Even if an object with a color fill is not assigned transparency, the transparency can be controlled
by clicking on Interactive transparency tool. This defines a transparency gradient and a dashedline connecting two squares appears on the object. Move the two squares to modify the gradient.
Define the direction of the gradient (vertical, horizontal, or at any angle) and the spot at which thetransparency begins.
A regular color gradient is defined in the same manner. Select an object, then select a gradientarea fill (see “Gradient fills” on page 94 for more information). The Interactive gradient tool is
now active on the Transformations toolbar. When clicking on Interactive gradient tool, a dashedline connecting two squares appears on the object, just as it does for a transparency gradient.

Figure 118: Example of a dynamic gradient

Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes | 121

In both transparency gradient and gradient fill, click outside the object to set the gradient.
In the example shown in Figure 118 there is a single color object and a transparency gradient,
covering part of the underlying object. This gradient transparency can be dynamically adjusted.
Direction of transparency is changed by moving the white square and the distance over which itis applied by moving the green square.

Note
Moving the squares has different effects, depending on the type of gradient. For
example, for a linear gradient, the start and end squares of the gradient arealways situated on either side of the center point of the object.

122 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Draw Guide 7.5

Chapter 5,
Combining Multiple Objects

Grouping objects
Grouping of objects is similar to placing objects into a container. Objects within a group are
moved together as one object and any changes made are applied globally to the objects within
the group. A group can always be ungrouped and the objects that make up the group can always
be manipulated separately.

Temporary grouping
A temporary grouping is when several objects are selected together. Any changes to object
parameters are applied to all of the objects within the temporary group. For example, a temporarygroup of objects can be rotated in its entirety and is created using one of the following methods:• Click and drag the cursor over several objects surrounding the objects with a selection
rectangle. This selection rectangle is also known as a marquee. Release the cursor when
all the objects required for a temporary group are selected.
• Click the first object, then hold down the Shift key and click on the remaining objects
for the temporary group.
• To cancel a temporary group of objects, simply click outside of the selection handles
displayed around the objects.

Grouping
When objects are grouped, any editing carried out on the group are applied to all objects within
the group. Click on one object in a group and the whole group is selected. Objects within a groupretain their own individual properties and can be edited independently. See “Editing individual
group objects” on page 125 for more information.
1) Select objects for a group using one of the following methods. Selection handles appear
around all objects selected for the group (Figure 119).
– Click on each object required while holding down the Shift key.
– Make sure Select on the Drawing toolbar is selected and draw a selection rectangle
around the objects required for the group using the cursor.
– To select all the objects in a drawing, go to Edit > Select All on the Menu bar, or use
the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+A (macOS ⌘+A).

Figure 119: Example of grouping objects
2) Create a group of selected objects using one of the following methods:
124 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

– Right-click on an object within the selected group and select Group from the context
menu.
– Go to Shape > Group > Group on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+G (macOS ⌘+Shift+G).

Ungrouping
1) Select a group of objects and selection handles appear around objects within the group(Figure 119).
2) Ungroup a group of objects using one of the following methods:– Right-click on the selected group and select Ungroup from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Group > Ungroup on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+Shift+G (macOS ⌘+⌥+Shift+G).

Editing individual group objects
An object within a group can be edited individually without ungrouping the objects.
1) Select a group, then enter the group using one of the following methods.
– Right-click on the group and select Enter Group from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Group > Enter Group on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F3.
– Double-click on the selected group.
2) Click on an object to select and individually edit it, as shown by the example in
Figure 120.
3) After editing and saving changes to an individual object within a group, exit the groupusing one of the following methods:– Right-click on the group and select Exit Group from the context menu.

Figure 120: Example of editing individual objects within a group– Go to Shape > Group > Exit Group on the Menu bar.

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects | 125

– Use the keyboard combination Ctrl+F3 (macOS ⌘+F3).
– Double-click outside the group.

Note
After entering a group, any other objects outside the group cannot be selected forediting until exiting from the selected group.

Nesting groups
A group of groups can be created and this is commonly known as nesting groups. When nested
groups are created, Draw retains the individual group hierarchy and remembers the order inwhich groups were selected. That is, the last individual group selected is on top of all the othergroups within a nested group. Ungrouping and entering a nested group works in exactly thesame way as for individual groups.

Tip
If group and ungroup commands are regularly used, or any other command, tools
can be added to a toolbar so that they are readily available. See Appendix B,
Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide for more information on customizing
toolbars.

Combining, splitting, breaking, and connecting
Combining objects
Combining objects is a permanent merging of objects creating a new object. The original objects
are no longer available as individual objects and cannot be edited as individual objects.
1) Select several objects that are overlapping each other.

Figure 121: Example of area fill on combined objects
1)

Overlapping individual objects

126 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

2)

Combined overlapping objects

Figure 122: Example of area fill on combined objects
1)

Overlapping individual objects

2)

Combined overlapping objects

1) Combine the selected objects into a single object using one of the following methods:– Right-click on the selection and select Shapes > Combine from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Combine on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard combination Ctrl+Shift+K (macOS ⌘+Shift+K).
At first glance, the results can seem rather surprising, but the following explains how combining
objects works.
• The attributes (for example, area fill) of the resulting object are those of the object
furthest back. In Figure 121, it is the ellipse and in Figure 122 it is the yellow rectangle.
• Where objects overlap, the overlapping zone is either filled or empty depending onwhether the overlap is even numbered or odd numbered. Figure 122 shows where theoverlap number is even, an empty space is created and where the overlap number isodd, a filled area is created.

Splitting combined objects
An object which has been created from combining several objects can be split into individual
objects. However, the original objects retain the formatting of the combined object and do notrevert back to their original formatting.
Select the combined object and use one of the following methods to split the combined object:• Go to Shape > Split on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+Shift+K (macOS ⌘+⌥+Shift+K).
In Figure 123, the left graphic is the original example of overlapping area fills before combining.
The right graphic is the result of splitting the combined object. The individual overlapping objects
have taken the formatting of the object (Rectangle 1) at the rear of the overlapping objects.

Breaking objects
An object that consists of more than one part can be broken into its individual parts as follows.
For example, a star is broken into separate lines and the area fill is lost, as shown by the center
graphic in Figure 124.
1) Select an object that consists of more than one part.

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects | 127

Figure 123: Example of splitting combined objects
1)

Overlapping objects before combining

2)

Split result of combined overlapping
objects

3)

Individual parts edited

Figure 124: Example of breaking an object
1)
2)

Original object
Object broken

1) Convert the object to a curve or polygon using one of the following methods:– Go to Shape > Convert > To Curve or To Polygon on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Convert > To Curve or To Polygon on thecontext menu.
2) Go to Shape > Break on the Menu bar and the object is broken into individual parts.
3) Move, format or delete the individual parts as necessary, as shown by the right object inFigure 124.

Connecting lines
The individual parts of an object or individual objects can be connected together as follows:
1) Select all the objects that are going to be connected.
2) Go to Shape > Connect on the Menu bar. Individual lines or lines in a border are
converted to curves and the end points of each line connected.

Note
The shape created when connecting individual parts or lines is not a closed
shape. The new shape has to be closed to create an area fill.

128 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Closing objects
Closing objects creates an object that uses an area fill.
1) Select an object that has a gap in its border.
2) Right-click on the selected object and select Close Object from the context menu toclose the gap.
3) Format the area fill created to requirements. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes
for more information on working with area fills.

Merging, subtracting, or intersecting objects
After selecting more than one object, the merge, subtract, and intersect functions become
available allowing creation of a new object with a new shape.

Merge
When merging objects, a new object is created with a shape that follows the shape of the merged
objects. The area fill of the merged object is determined by the area fill of the object that is at therear of all the other objects, as shown in Figure 125.
After selecting several objects, use one of the following methods to merge the objects:• Go to Shape > Merge on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on the selected objects and select Shapes > Merge from the context menu.

Subtract
When subtracting objects, the objects at the front are subtracted from the object behind. This
leaves a blank space the subtracted objects occupied creating a new shape, as shown in
Figure 126. After selecting several objects that overlap each other, use one of the following
methods to subtract objects:• Go to Shape > Subtract on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on the selected objects and select Shapes > Subtract from the context menu.

Figure 125: Example of merging objects

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects | 129

Figure 126: Example 0f subtracting objects

Figure 127: Example of intersecting objects

Intersect
When intersecting objects, the front objects and the exposed area of the rear object are removed.
This creates a new object from the area of the rear object that was covered by the front objects,
as shown in Figure 127. After selecting several objects that overlap each other, use one of thefollowing methods to intersect objects:• Go to Shape > Intersect on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on the selected objects and select Shapes > Intersect from the context
menu.

Practical example
The following example shows how to use the merge, subtract, and intersect functions to create aknife with a wooden handle.
1) Draw an ellipse and then a rectangle overlapping half of the ellipse width.

130 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

2) Select both shapes and select Shapes > Subtract on the Menu bar.

3) Draw another rectangle and put it over the top half of the ellipse.

4) Select both shapes and select Shapes > Subtract on the Menu bar.

5) Draw a small ellipse covering just the lower right corner.

6) Select both shapes and select Shapes > Subtract on the Menu bar. The knife blade
shape is now complete.

7) To make the handle, draw a rectangle and an ellipse.

8) Merge the shapes together.

9) Position the handle on the blade. Select the handle and blade, then group together tocreate a drawing of the knife.

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects | 131

Figure 128: Duplicate dialog

Duplication and cross-fading
Duplication
Duplication makes copies of an object while applying a set of changes to the duplicate copies,
such as color or rotation.
1) Select an object or group of objects, then use one of the following methods to open the
Duplicate dialog (Figure 128):– Go to Edit > Duplicate on the Menu bar.
– Go to Shape > Duplicate on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Shift+F3.
2) Select the number of copies, placement, enlargement, and the start and end colors for the
duplicate copies.
3) Click OK and duplicate copies are created. An example of a duplication is shown in
Figure 129. Each duplicate object is a separate object.
4) To group the duplicate objects into one group, see “Grouping objects” on page 124.
5) To combine the duplicate objects into one object, see “Combining, splitting, breaking, andconnecting” on page 126.

132 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 129: Example of duplication
The following options are available when using the Duplicate dialog:
Number of copies
Enter the number of copies required.
Placement
Sets the position and rotation of duplicated objects in relation to the original object.
X axisEnter the horizontal distance between the centers of the selected object and the
duplicate objects. Positive values shift the duplicate object to the right and negativevalues shift the duplicate object to the left.
Y axisEnter the vertical distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate
objects. Positive values shift the duplicate object down and negative values shift the
duplicate object up.
Angle
Enter the angle (0 to 359 degrees) required for rotating the duplicate object. Positive
values rotate the duplicate objects in a clockwise direction and negative values in acounterclockwise direction.
Enlargement
Sets the size of the duplicate objects.
WidthEnter the amount to enlarge or reduce the width of the duplicate objects.
HeightEnter the amount to enlarge or reduce the height of the duplicate objects.
Colors
Sets the colors for the selected object and the duplicate objects. For more than one copy,
these colors define the start and end points of a color gradient.
Start
Select a color for the selected object.

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects | 133

End
Select a color for the duplicate object. If making more than one copy, this color isapplied to the last copy.

Cross-fading
Cross-fading transforms one object shape into another object shape. The result is a new group ofindividual objects that includes the start and end objects. The intermediate steps show thetransformation from one object shape to another object shape. The cross-fading is carried out
from the first object selected to the second object selected.
1) Select two objects and go to Shape > Cross-fading on the Menu bar to open the
Cross-fading dialog (Figure 130).
2) In Settings, select the number of Increments for the transformation.
3) If necessary, in Settings, select Cross-fade attributes and Same orientation.
4) Click OK to cross-fade the selected objects and close the Cross-fading dialog. An
example of cross-fading is shown in Figure 131 with Same orientation deselected. The
object created is a group of objects.
5) To ungroup this group of objects and use the individual objects, see “Ungrouping” onpage 125.

Figure 130: Cross-fading dialog

Figure 131: Example of cross-fading objects

134 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

The following options are available in the Cross-fading dialog:
Increments
Enter the number of steps created between the selected objects.
Cross-fade attributes
Applies cross-fading to the line and fill properties of the selected objects. For example, if
the selected objects are filled with different colors, a color transition between the twocolors is applied.
Same orientation
Applies a smooth transition between the selected objects.

Positioning objects
Arranging objects
When combining, merging, subtracting, or intersecting objects, the end result varies dependingon which object is at the front and which object is at the back. Each new object placed on a
drawing automatically becomes the front object and all the other objects move backwards inpositioning order. Arranging objects changes the order of a group of objects.
To change the arrangement position of an object, select one or more objects and then use one of
the following methods• Right-click on the selected object(s), then select Arrange from the context menu and oneof the available options.
• Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Arrange on the Standard toolbar to open the
Position sub-toolbar (Figure 132) and select one of the available tools.
• Click one of the arrangement tools on the Line and Filling toolbar.
• Click on Shape > Arrange on the Menu bar and select an arrangement option.
• Use the Arrange tools in Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
• Use a keyboard shortcut available for each arrange option.
The arrangement options available are as follows:
Bring to Front
Brings the selected object to the front of a group of objects (Shift+Ctrl++)(macOS ⌘+Shift++).
Bring Forward
Brings the selected object forward one step (Ctrl++) (macOS ⌘++).
Send Backward
Sends the selected object one step backward (Ctrl+–) (macOS ⌘+–).
Send to Back
Sends the selected object to the back of a group of objects (Shift+Ctrl+–)(macOS ⌘+Shift+–).

Figure 132: Position sub-toolbar

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects | 135

Figure 133: Align Objects toolbar
In Front of Object
Moves the selected object in front of another selected object.
Behind Object
Moves the selected object behind another selected object.
Reverse
Reverses the order of the selected objects. This tool is grayed out if only one object isselected.

Aligning objects
To make a drawing look more professional, objects can be aligned with each other. Select one ormore objects and use one of the following methods to align objects:• Right-click on the selected object(s), then select Align Objects from the context menu
and one of the available options.
• Click on one of the alignment tools on the Line and Filling toolbar.
• Go to Shape > Align Objects on the Menu bar and select the alignment required.
• Use the Align tools in the Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
• Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Align Objects to open the Align
Objects toolbar (Figure 133).
The alignment tools available are as follows:
Left
Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the left edge ofthe object is aligned to the left page margin.
Centered
Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the center of theobject is aligned to the horizontal center of the page.
Right
Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the right edgeof the object is aligned to the right page margin.
Top
Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected, thetop edge of the object is aligned to the top page margin.
Center
Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected, the center of theobject is aligned to the vertical center of the page.
Bottom
Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected,
the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the bottom page margin.

136 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 134: Distribute Selection toolbar

Distributing objects
Distributing objects allows three or more objects to be evenly spaced along a horizontal orvertical axis. Objects are distributed using the outermost objects in the selection as base points
for spacing.
Select at least three objects, then use one of the following methods to distribute the objects:• Right-click on the selected objects, then select Distribute Selection from the context
menu and one of the available options.
• Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Distribute Selection to open theDistribute Selection toolbar (Figure 134).
• Go to Shape > Distribute Selection on the Menu bar and select a distribution option.
•

Right-click on the selected objects and select Distribute Selection from the context
menu, then select a distribution option.

The distribution options available are as follow:
Horizontal Left
Distributes the selected objects so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spacedfrom one another.
Horizontal Center
Distributes the selected objects so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly
spaced from one another.
Horizontal Spacing
Distributes the selected objects horizontally so that the objects are evenly spaced fromone another.
Horizontal Right
Distributes the selected objects so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spacedfrom one another.
Vertical Top
Distributes the selected objects so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spacedfrom one another.
Vertical Center
Distributes the selected objects so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly
spaced from one another.
Vertical Spacing
Distributes the selected objects vertically so that the objects are evenly spaced from one
another.
Vertical Bottom
Distributes the selected objects so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spacedfrom one another.

Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects | 137

Draw Guide 7.5

Chapter 6,
Editing Images
Raster Graphics

Introduction
Previous chapters in this Draw Guide have dealt only with vector graphics and the most common
types of vector graphics in use are as follows:
SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics)
An Extensible Markup Language (XML) based vector image format for two-dimensionalgraphics with support for interactivity and animation.
EPS (Encapsulated PostScript)
A PostScript document format usable as a graphics file format. EPS files are selfcontained, PostScript documents that describe an image or drawing and can be placed
within another PostScript document.
AI (Adobe Illustrator)
A proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing single-page
vector-based drawings in either the EPS or PDF formats.
Draw also contains a number of functions for handling raster graphics or bitmaps such as
photographs and scanned pictures, including import, export, and conversion from one format toanother.
Draw can read the majority of graphic file formats using a subset of capabilities similar to rastergraphics programs like Gimp or Adobe Photoshop. Raster graphics are generally images or
pictures that use the most common formats in use:
JPG/JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
JPEG is the most common image format on websites and most digital cameras produce
JPEG images as default.
GIF (Graphics Interchange Format)
GIF is a bitmap image format that is popular because of its wide support and portability.
PNG (Portable Network Graphics)
PNG is a raster image format which supports lossless data compression and also
background transparency.
TIF/TIFF (Tagged Image File Format)
TIFF is flexible, adaptable, and capable of storing image data in a lossless format.
BMP (BitMaP)
Also known as bitmap image file, which is a dot matrix data structure.

Importing images
Inserting
To import image files into a drawing, go to Insert > Image on the Menu bar to open the Insert
Image dialog (Figure 135).
Draw contains import filters for the majority of graphic formats. If the file being imported uses agraphic format not covered by the import filters, it is recommended to use one of the many freegraphic conversion programs to convert the file into a format that Draw recognizes.
If Preview is selected, a preview of the file is shown on the right-hand side of the Insert Image
dialog. This makes it easier to select the file required and also checks that Draw can import thefile format used.

140 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 135: Insert Image dialog

Embedding
Embedding a graphic into a drawing makes it a permanent part of the drawing. Any changes
made to an embedded graphic only appear in the drawing where the graphic has been
embedded. The original graphic file is not affected. Embedding happens when a graphic is
imported into a drawing using one of the following methods:• Insert Image dialog.
• Copying and pasting.
• Scanning a graphic.
• Dragging and dropping between open files.
The main advantage of embedding graphics into a drawing is that the graphic is always available
no matter what computer is used to open the drawing.
The main disadvantage of embedding graphics is that it creates large file sizes, which may not bedesirable if there is limited storage capacity on a computer. Also, if the original graphic is altered,then the embedded graphic is not updated each time the drawing is opened.

Note
When a graphic is embedded into a LibreOffice drawing, make sure that Insert as
Link is not selected in the Insert Image dialog.

Linking
Linking to the original graphic does not insert the graphic into a drawing, but creates a link towhere the original graphic file is located. Each time the drawing is opened, any linked graphics
are displayed in the drawing.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 141

Figure 136: Confirm Linked Graphic dialog
The main advantage of linking a graphic file when inserted into a drawing is that if the originalgraphic file is altered or replaced with a graphic using the same filename, the version of thegraphic in the drawing is always up to date. The next time the drawing is opened, the latest
version of the graphic is also opened in the drawing. Also the file size of the drawing is muchsmaller and the original graphic is easily edited with specialized external applications.
The main disadvantage of linking graphics is that the link must be maintained between thedrawing and the embedded graphic file for linking to work correctly. If the original drawing orgraphic file is moved to another computer location, then any links must be updated to include the
new location.
1) Open the Insert Image dialog.
2) Select Insert as Link in the Insert Image dialog.
3) Select the required graphic file and click on Open to open the Confirm Linked Graphic
dialog (Figure 136).
4) Click on Keep Link to link the file and close the Confirm Linked Graphic dialog.
5) If necessary, click on Embed Graphic to embed the file instead of linking the file. This
also closes the Confirm Linked Graphic dialog.

Note
When a graphic file is linked to a LibreOffice drawing, the format of the linked
graphic is not changed.

Editing links
Links can be updated, modified, or broken as follows:
1) Go to Edit > External Links on the Menu bar to open the Edit Links dialog (Figure 137)
and select the link to be edited.
2) Click on Modify, Break Link, or Update as appropriate.
– Modify — changes the graphic file in the drawing andthe source file for the selectedlink.
– Break Link — breaks the link between the selected file and the current document.
The version of the graphic file in the drawing becomes embedded into the drawing. A
confirmation dialog opens asking if the link is to be broken. Click on Yes to confirm
the breaking of the link.
– Update — updates the selected link so that the most recent version of the linked fileis displayed in the drawing.
3) Click on Close to save the changes to the link and close the Edit Links dialog.
142 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 137: Edit Links dialog

Scanning
After scanning, the scanned images are inserted and embedded using PNG format into adrawing or document. To insert scanned images, make sure the scanner is configured for thecomputer and supported by the following systems:• SANE for a Linux operating system.
• TWAIN for a Windows or Mac operating system.
The following procedure is an example only. The actual scanning procedure depends on thescanner driver, interface, and computer operating system. Consult the scanner documentation for
more information.
1) Place a document, drawing, or photograph in the scanner and make sure that the scanneris switched on and ready.
2) If this is the first time the scanner has been used with LibreOffice, go to Insert > Media >Scan > Select Source on the Menu bar to select the scanner.
3) If the scanner has been used before, go to Insert > Image > Scan > Request on the
Menu bar.
4) Specify the scanning resolution, subject being scanned, and so on.
5) When the image has been scanned, Draw places it in the drawing. At this point thescanned image can be edited like any other graphic.

Note
If more than one scanning device is connected to the computer, the device isselected when the source is selected. This selection becomes the default source
for scanning until another scanner is selected and used as the scanning source.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 143

Copying and pasting
Copying and pasting a graphic also embeds a graphic file into a drawing. A copied graphic canbe an image already embedded in another document or drawing, or it can be a graphic file suchas a drawing, document, or photograph.
1) After copying the graphic file, go to Edit > Paste Special > Paste Special on the Menu
bar to open the Paste Special dialog.
2) Select the required format for pasting the copied graphic into a drawing. Available formats
for pasting depend on the type of file copied onto the clipboard.
3) Click OK to paste the graphic file and close the Paste Special dialog.

Note
When copying and pasting images into a drawing, please respect the copyrightand license of any file being copied.

Exporting images
Exporting files
By default Draw saves drawings in the Open Document format ODG and some software
programs are not compatible with this format. To make drawings available for other programs, afile can be exported in various formats. The export procedure used depends on the computer
setup and computer operating system being used. The following procedure is an example export
procedure.
1) Open the ODG file being exported.

Figure 138: Example of an export dialog

144 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide2) Go to File > Export on the Menu bar and open the Export dialog. An example of anexport dialog is shown in Figure 138.
3) Enter a new filename for the exported file and navigate to the folder where the exported
file is to be saved.
4) Select the required file format from the options in the drop-down list.
5) Click Export and the file is exported as a new file in the selected file format.
6) Depending on the file format selected, another dialog may open allowing options to be
selected for the export format.
7) Depending on the additional dialog that may open, click on Export, Create, or OK and
the file is exported as a new file in its new format.

Exporting objects
Exporting individual objects, or a group of objects, from a drawing file is similar to “Exporting files”
above. Open a drawing and select the object or objects for export. Make sure to choose theSelection option in the export dialog, as shown in Figure 138. Using this method, an imported
image can be modified, annotations added to it, and make any other changes, then select it andexport for use in another drawing or document.

Formatting images (raster objects)
Images (raster graphics) are edited and formatted to add or change filters and adjust theproperties of color, lines, areas, and shadows using one of the following methods:• Go to Format > Image on the Menu bar and use the tools in the sub-menu that opens.
• Use the tools on the Image toolbar (Figure 139). See “Image toolbar” below for more
information.
• Use the tools available in the Image panel on the Properties deck of the Sidebar.
• Some raster graphics may have a text element. For more information on formatting text,
see Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text.

Notes
Formatting changes made to a graphic using the tools in LibreOffice only appear
in the drawing where the graphic was modified. Original graphic file is notaffected.
Raster graphics included in a group behave like other objects when the propertiesof the group are edited and formatted.

Figure 139: Image toolbar

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 145

Naming images
Draw names objects, including inserted images, Shape 1, Shape 2, and so on, using theinsertion order into a drawing. It is recommended to rename objects, including images, using aunique name. Names make objects and images easily identifiable in the LibreOffice Navigator.
1) Select an image, then use one of the following methods to open the Name dialog andcreate a unique name for the selected image:– Go to Format > Name on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the image and select Name from the context menu.
2) Enter a name in the Name text box in the Name dialog that opens and click OK.

Image toolbar
The Image toolbar (Figure 139) appears when an image or object that is a raster graphic isselected. For more information on the Image toolbar and the available tools, see Appendix B,
Toolbars. The tools listed below for the Image toolbar are an example only.
Position and Size (F4)
Opens the Position and Size dialog. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects for more
information.
Align Objects
Opens a sub-toolbar giving access to alignment tools for aligning selected objects inrelation to each other. See Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects for more information.
Bring to Front
Brings the selected object to the front of a group of objects (Ctrl+Shift++)(macOS ⌘+Shift++).
Bring Forward
Brings the selected object forward one step (Ctrl++) (macOS ⌘++).
Send Backward
Sends the selected object one step backward (Ctrl+–) (macOS ⌘+–).
Send to Back
Sends the selected object to the back of a group of objects (Ctrl+Shift+–)(macOS ⌘+Shift+–).
In Front of Object
Moves the selected object in front of another selected object.
Behind Object
Moves the selected object behind another selected object.
Reverse
Reverses the order of the selected objects. This tool is grayed out if only one object isselected.
Line Style
Opens a drop-down list with different line styles used for the outline of the border. See
Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information.
Line Width
Used to change the width of a line. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more
information.

146 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Line Color
Used to change the color of a line. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more
information.
Area Style/Filling
Used to change the type of filling used in a shape. See Chapter 4, Changing Object
Attributes for more information.
Shadow
Sets the default shadow effect around the picture. The shadow attributes are adjusted
using the Shadow panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. See Chapter 4, Changing
Object Attributes for more information.
FilterOpens the Image Filter toolbar which is described in “Image filters” on page 152.
Image Mode
Changes the display of the image from color to grayscale, black and white, or awatermark. This setting affects only the display and printing of the image; the original
image file remains unchanged. The image mode setting can also be changed using Colormode in the Image panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 140).
Default
Image is displayed unaltered in color.
Grayscale
Image is displayed in 256 shades of gray.
Black/White
Image is displayed in black and white.

Figure 140: Image panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 147

Figure 141: Color sub-toolbar
WatermarkColor, brightness, contrast, and gamma settings are reduced so that the image can beused as a watermark (background). The default settings for Watermark can be adjusted
using the Color sub-toolbar (Figure 141).
Crop Image
Crops or trims an image. When using this tool, crop marks appear around the image.
Drag one or more of these marks to crop the image to the desired size. For more
information on cropping, see “Cropping images” on page 149.
Vertically
Flips the selected object vertically. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more
information.
Horizontally
Flips the selected object horizontally. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more
information.
Transformations
Opens the Transformations toolbar. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more
information.
Transparency
Adjusts the degree of transparency of the image between 0% (opaque) and 100% (fullytransparent). The transparency setting can also be adjusted using the Image panel in theProperties deck on the Sidebar.
Color
Opens the Color sub-toolbar (Figure 141) to adjust the values of the RGB colors,brightness, contrast, and Gamma. These adjustments do not affect the original image, but
the values are stored in Draw as a separate formatting set. The color settings can also be
adjusted using the Image panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
Red, Green, Blue
Select values between –100% (no color) to +100% (full intensity); 0% represents theoriginal color value of the image.
Brightness
Select a value between –100% (totally black) and +100% (totally white).

148 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Contrast
Select a value between –100% (minimum) and +100% (maximum).
Gamma
Affects the brightness of the middle color tones. Select a value between 0.10
(minimum) to 10 (maximum) Try adjusting this value if changing brightness or contrast
does not give the required result.

Cropping images
Cropping is a method of hiding unwanted areas of an image or changing the size of an image ina drawing. Changes made when cropping an image only change the display of the image in a
drawing and not the original image file.

Quick cropping
After selecting an image, it can be cropped quickly using one of the following methods:• Click on Crop Image on the Standard or Image toolbar.
• Go to Format > Image > Crop on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on the image and select Crop from the context menu.
Selection handles appear around the selected image (Figure 142) and the image is cropped asfollows:• Top, bottom, left, and right selection handles crop the image in one direction only.
• Corner selection handles crop the image vertically and horizontally in two directions.
• To maintain the ratio between vertical and horizontal dimensions, hold down the Shift
key while moving a selection handle.

Crop dialog
For more control and accuracy over the cropping functions, it is recommended to use the Cropdialog (Figure 143). Select an image and go to Format > Image > Crop Dialog on the Menu bar
to open the Crop dialog.

Figure 142: Example image in crop mode

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 149

Figure 143: Crop dialog
Crop
Trim or scale the selected image, or add white space around the image.
Keep scale
Maintains the original scale of the image when cropping so that only the size of theimage changes.
Keep image size
Maintains the image original size when cropping so that only the image scale changes.
To reduce the image scale, select this option and enter negative values in the croppingboxes. To increase the image scale, enter positive values in the cropping boxes.
Left and Right
If Keep scale is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left or right edge of theimage, or a negative amount to add white space to the left or right of the image. If Keep
image size is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the image horizontal scale,or a negative amount to decrease the image horizontal scale.
Top and Bottom
If Keep scale is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the image top or bottom, or anegative amount to add white space above or below the image. If Keep image size isselected, enter a positive amount to increase the image vertical scale, or a negative
amount to decrease the image vertical scale.
Scale
Used to change the image scale as it appears in a drawing.
WidthEnter a percentage value to change the image width.
HeightEnter a percentage value to change the image height.
Image Size
Used to change the image size.
150 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

WidthEnter a value for the image width.
HeightEnter a value for the image height.
Original Size
Original size of the image is displayed above the option. Clicking on this option and thenclicking OK resets the selected image to its original size.

Note
In the Crop dialog, the Width and Height are treated as independent values.
Changing one without the other can result in significant distortion of the image
and this may not be what is required.

Exporting cropped images
If a cropped image is to be used in another drawing, use one of the following methods after
selecting the cropped image:• Go to File > Export on the Menu bar to open the Export dialog. Navigate to thedestination folder, then enter a filename, choose the Selection option, and click on
Export. See “Exporting images” on page 144 for more information.
•

Go to Format > Image > Save on the Menu bar or right click on the cropped image andselect Save from the context menu. Click on Yes to save the modified image and open
an Image Export dialog. Select the file format required, navigate to the destination folder,then enter a filename and click on Save.

Compressing images
If a large image is inserted into a drawing and resized to fit into the layout of the drawing, thecomplete full-size original image is stored in the drawing file. This preserves the original image,possibly resulting in a large file to store or send by mail.
If some loss of image quality can be accepted, the image can be compressed reducing its data
volume while preserving its display in the page layout;
1) Open the Compress Image dialog (Figure 144) using one of the following methods:– Right-click on the image and select Compress from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Image > Compress on the Menu bar.
2) Select the type of compression and the resolution required.
3) Click on Calculate New Size to update the image information when the Compression
and Resolution settings are changed.
4) When satisfied with the new settings, click OK to apply the settings.
5) If the resulting image is not acceptable, use one of the following methods to undo thechanges and select another compression setting.
– Keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Z (macOS ⌘+Z).
– Go to Edit > Undo on the Menu bar.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 151

Figure 144: Compress Image dialog

Figure 145: Image Filter sub-toolbar

Image filters
Draw has eleven filter effects that work on selected images and these filters can be combined.
Filters always apply to the entire image and it is not possible to use filters to edit only a part of theimage.
1) Select an image to open the Image toolbar.
2) Apply an image filter using one of the following methods:– Click on Filter to open the Image Filter sub-toolbar (Figure 145), then select an image
filter to apply.
– Go to Format > Image > Filter on the Menu bar and select an image filter from thecontext menu.

Notes
If an image is embedded into a drawing, any image filters are applied directly tothe embedded image and the original image file is not changed. Save the drawing
to retain any filter effects applied to the embedded image in a drawing.
After a drawing is saved and closed, the effects of image filters become
permanent. If image filter effects are not satisfactory, use Edit > Undo on the
Menu bar to cancel the filter effects before saving the drawing.
When applying image filters to an image, the file size of the image must be taken
into account. On large file sizes, there is a time lag between applying an image
filter and the effect to be visible on the image.

152 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 146: Example image — no filter
Figure 146 is an example of an image with no image filters applied. The image filters available on
the Image Filter sub-toolbar are as follows with examples of the filter effect on the image.
InvertInverts or reverses the color values of a color image (similar to a color negative), or thebrightness values of a grayscale image. Apply the filter again to revert to the originalgraphic (Figure 147).

Figure 147: Example of Invert filter
SmoothSoftens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter. This reduces the contrast
between neighboring pixels and produces a lack of sharpness making the image appear
smoother. The effect of the smooth filter can be very subtle. Figure 148 shows the effectof applying a Smooth radius of 15 to an image. Selecting this filter opens the Smoothdialog (Figure 149) where the smooth radius parameter is set. The preview in the Smoothdialog shows the effect of applying the Smooth filter to an image.

Figure 148: Example of Smooth filter

Figure 149: Smooth dialog

SharpenSharpens the image by applying a high pass filter, adjusting the contrast between
neighboring pixels. The effect increases if the filter is applied several times making thecolors appear faded, as shown by the example in Figure 150.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 153

Figure 150: Example of Sharpen filter
Remove Noise
Removes noise by applying a median filter comparing every pixel with its neighbor. It thenreplaces any pixel with extreme values that deviate in color by a large amount from themean value with a pixel that has a mean color value. The amount of picture information
does not increase each time the filter is applied. However, there are fewer contrast
changes resulting in an image that looks smoother and the effect is very subtle(Figure 151).

Figure 151: Example of Remove Noise filter
Solarization
Solarization refers to an effect that looks when there is too much light during photodevelopment and the colors have become partly inverted. Dark areas appear light or lightareas appear dark. In the digital world of photography, solarization creates a change orreversal of color, similar to the effect of the Invert image filter. Figure 152 shows the effectof a Solarization filter applied using a threshold value of 50%.
Selecting Solarization opens the Solarization dialog (Figure 153), where the degree ofsolarization (Threshold value) can be specified. Entering a Threshold value above 70%
reverses the inversion effect on colors. Also, selecting Invert reverses the effect of the
Solarization image filter, as shown in the preview box in Figure 153.

Figure 152: Example of Solarization filter

154 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 153: Solarization dialog

AgingAging creates a look that resembles photographs developed in the early days ofphotography (Figure 154). All pixels are set to their gray values and then the green andblue color channels are reduced by the amount specified in Aging degree in the Aging
dialog. Red color channel is not changed.
Selecting the Aging filter opens the Aging dialog (Figure 155), where the Aging degree
can be defined and create an old look for an image.

Figure 154: Example of Aging filter

Figure 155: Aging dialog

Posterize
Posterizing reduces the number of colors in an image. For example, a photograph willprobably look like a painting when the number of colors is reduced (Figure 156). Selecting
Posterize opens the Posterize dialog (Figure 157), where the number of Poster colors
can be defined to produce the effect required.

Figure 156: Example of Posterize filter

Figure 157: Posterize dialog

Pop ArtChanges the colors of an image converting it to a pop-art format (Figure 158).

Figure 158: Example of Pop Art filter

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 155

Charcoal Sketch
Displays an image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in blackand the original colors are suppressed (Figure 159).

Figure 159: Example of Charcoal Sketch filter
ReliefCalculates the edges of an image in relief as if the image is illuminated by a light source(Figure 160). Selecting Relief opens the Emboss dialog (Figure 161) where the positionof the Light source is selected producing shadows that differ in direction and magnitude.

Figure 160: Example of Relief filter

Figure 161: Emboss dialog

MosaicThis image filter joins groups of pixels and converts them into rectangles of a single color
creating an image that appears to be a mosaic (Figure 162). The larger the individual
rectangles created, the fewer details in the mosaic graphic.
Selecting this image filter opens the Mosaic dialog (Figure 163), where the number ofpixels for Width and Height of the tiles is set. Selecting Enhanced edges enhances theedges of each tile, creating a sharper definition.

Figure 162: Example of Mosaic filter

156 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 163: Mosaic dialog

Replacing colors
The Color Replacer allows replacement or changing a color in an embedded graphic for anothercolor, or set a color as transparent. Up to four colors can be replaced at once. An area of thegraphic cannot be selected for editing as this tool only works on the entire graphic.
The replacement colors selection can only be from one of the available palettes in LibreOffice.
New colors cannot be defined here, but custom colors can be created before using the Color
Replacer. For more information on creating colors, see Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques.

Note
The Color Replacer can only be used on embedded graphics. If the Color
Replacer is used on a linked graphic, the following error message appears “Thisimage is linked to a document. Do you want to unlink the image in order to edit
it?”. Click on Yes to unlink and embed the graphic.

Color Replacer dialog
PipetteSwitches color selection on when selected.
Replace
Replaces the selected source colors in the selected image with the colors specified in the
Replace with boxes.
ColorsLists the source colors and the replacement colors.
Source color
Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that specified in
the Replace with box.
Tolerance
Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors
that are similar to the color selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range ofcolors, enter a higher value.
Replace with
Lists the available color palettes and replacement colors.

Figure 164: Color Replacer dialog
Chapter 6, Editing Images | 157

Transparency
Replaces transparent areas in the selected image with the color selected.

Replacing colors
1) Select an embedded image to start using the Color Replacer.
2) Go to Tools > Color Replacer on the Menu bar to open the Color Replacer dialog(Figure 164).
3) Click on Pipette at the top of the Color Replacer dialog to activate the color selectionmode.
4) Move the cursor over the color to be replaced in the selected image and a preview of thecolor appears in the box next to Pipette.
5) Click on the color. The selected color appears in the first Source color preview box and acheck mark appears next to it.
6) To select another color, place a check mark next to the second Source color preview box
and click on another color in the selected image. A maximum of four colors can beselected in the Color Replacer dialog.
7) Enter the amount of tolerance required for replacing each selected color in the Toleranceboxes. The default selection is 10% tolerance.
8) In Replace with, select a color palette from the drop-down list, then select the required
color from the color palette. Transparent is the default selection.
9) After selecting up to four colors for replacement, click Replace to replace the colors in theselected graphic. Examples of the original image and after image color replacement are
shown in Figures 165 and 166.

Figure 165: Example image before replacing colors

Figure 166: Example image after replacing colors

158 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide10) There is no preview of the effect. If the result is not satisfactory, select Edit > Undo >Color Replacer in the Menu bar and repeat the color replacement.

Notes
Using the Color Replacer replaces all occurrences of the Source color that are in
the selected image.
The default selection of Transparent in the Replace with boxes removes theselected color from the image and creates transparent areas in the selected
image.

Replacing transparent areas
To replace any transparent areas in an image with a color use the following procedure:
1) Go to Tools > Color Replacer on the Menu bar to open the Color Replacer dialog.
2) Select an image with transparent areas.
3) Select Transparency in the Color Replacer dialog so that a check mark appears next toTransparency.
4) Select a color palette from the drop-down list next to Transparency, then select a color
from the selected palette.
5) Click on Replace and the transparent areas are filled with the selected color.
6) There is no preview of the effect. If the result is incorrect, select Edit > Undo > Image
Color Replacer in the Menu bar.

Conversion
Contour conversion• Contour conversion converts a selected object to a polygon, or a group of polygons, withfour corner points.
• Converting an image to a contour, the converted image is set as a background graphic.
• If the conversion creates a group of polygons (for example, contour conversion of a text
object). Enter the polygon group before selecting an individual polygon within the group.
For more information on working with groups, see Chapter 5, Combining Multiple
Objects.
• After converting an image to a contour, the object can no longer be edited normally. The
converted image has to be edited using Edit > Points on the Menu bar to adjust its
shape. For more information on editing points, see Chapter 3, Working with Objects.

Notes
Any editing to an object must be completed before carrying out a contour
conversion because any further normal editing is not possible on the converted
object.
No confirmation dialog is provided for a contour conversion.
1) Carry out all necessary editing on the object before converting to a contour.
2) Make sure the object is selected.

Chapter 6, Editing Images | 159

3) Convert the object to a contour using one of the following methods:– Go to Shape > Convert > To Contour on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected object and select Convert > To Contour from the context
menu.

Polygon conversion
Polygon conversion is used to convert a selected image into a group of polygons filled with color.
The image is also converted to a vector graphic and can be resized with no loss of image quality
or distortion of any text. After conversion, the graphic can be broken into groups of polygons andthen split into individual polygons. Breaking and splitting allows editing or deletion of individualcolors within the graphic.

Conversion options and controls
Number of colors
Enter the number of colors to be displayed in the converted image. LibreOffice generates
a polygon for each occurrence of a color in the image. The range for the number of colors
is between 8 and 32.
Point reduction
Removes color polygons that are smaller than the pixel value entered. The range for point
reduction is between 0 and 32 pixels.
Fill holes
Fills the blank areas in the graphic that can be created when applying a point reduction.
Tile size
Enter the size of the rectangle for the background fill. Tile sizes range between 8 and 128
pixels.
Source image
Preview of the original image.
Vectorized image
Preview of the converted image.
Preview
Creates a preview of the converted image in Vectorized image without applying any
changes.
OK
Converts the image to a vector graphic consisting of polygons. The result is a metafile in
SVM format (StarView Metafile) used by LibreOffice and allows transfer of the converted
image to other LibreOffice documents.

Converting
1) Select an image in a drawing.
2) Convert the image into a polygon using one of the following methods and open theConvert to Polygon dialog (Figure 167).
– Go to Shape > Convert > To Polygon on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the image and select Convert > To Polygon from the context menu.
3) Select Number of colors and Point reduction to be used in the conversion.
4) Select Fill holes to prevent any blank areas appearing in the converted image.

160 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 167: Convert to Polygon dialog
5) Enter the number of pixels to use for Tile size.
6) Click Preview to check how the converted graphic will look.
7) Make any necessary changes to the settings and check the preview again.
8) If the converted image meets the expected requirements, click OK to convert the image toa polygon and close the Convert to Polygon dialog.

Breaking
After converting an image to polygons, the vectorized image can be broken into groups ofpolygons. Each group of polygons consists of one color and becomes an object that can be usedin another drawing.
1) Convert an image to polygons, see “Converting” above.
2) Make sure the converted image is selected, then use one of the following methods tobreak the image into groups of polygons:– Go to Shape > Break on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the image and select Break from the context menu.
3) Click on a color in the image and drag the group of polygons filled with that color out of
the image to create a new image.
4) Alternatively, press Delete and delete the color from the image.

SplittingAfter converting an image to polygons and breaking the image into polygon groups, thesepolygon groups can be split into individual polygons.
1) Convert an image to polygons, see “Converting” above.
Chapter 6, Editing Images | 161

2) Break the image into groups of polygons, see “Breaking” above.
3) Select the image, then use one of the following methods to split the polygon groups into
individual polygons:– Go to Shape > Split on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the image and select Shapes > Split from the context menu.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Alt+Shift+K (macOS ⌘+⌥+Shift+K)
4) Select an individual polygon (or several polygons) in the image and drag the polygon fromthe image to create a new image in the drawing.
5) Alternatively, press Delete to delete the selected polygon(s) from the image.

Bitmap conversion
All drawing objects placed into a LibreOffice drawing are vector graphics and these vector
graphics can be converted to a bitmap (raster graphic) in PNG format. Any transparency effects
in the original vector graphic are lost during conversion even though the PNG format used by
LibreOffice Draw supports transparencies. Use one of the following methods to convert a vector
graphic to a bitmap. There is no confirmation dialog is provided for a bitmap conversion.
• Go to Shape > Convert > To Bitmap on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on the graphic and select Convert > To Bitmap from the context menu.

162 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Draw Guide 7.5

Chapter 7
Working with 3D Objects

Introduction
Draw does not match the functionality of leading drawing or image editing programs, but it iscapable of producing and editing 3D drawings. Using Draw, 3D scenes and extruded 3D shapes
are created and edited. Depending on which 3D type is selected, there are different possibilities
for further editing of the object (rotation, illumination, perspective, and so on). Extruded 3D
shapes are simpler to set up and edit, but 3D scenes allow for greater customization.

3D object types
3D scenes
3D scenes are created from objects that yse dimensions for x, y, and z coordinates and cancontain object types, such as cube, sphere, extrusion object or rotation object. These object
types do not exist outside a 3D scene.
The Status Bar indicates when a 3D scene is selected (Figure 168) created from a 2D object
using body rotation or conversion. Alternatively, it is a ready-made 3D object that has been
inserted into a drawing.
A 3D scene is similar to a group. Just like a group, a 3D scene is entered for editing an individual
object in the 3D scene and exited after editing is completed. See Chapter 5, Combining Multiple
Objects for more information on entering, editing and exiting groups.
When a 3D scene is created from a selection of several 2D objects, a group is automaticallycreated as a single 3D scene. Enter this 3D scene so that individual objects within the 3D scene
can be changed, edited and rotated.

Note
Individual objects cannot be ungrouped when a 3D scene has been created froma selection of 2D objects.

3D shapes
2D shapes are flat with only width and height dimensions, but 3D shapes are solid objects thathave three dimensions of depth, width, and height.
A 3D shape is created when a 2D shape or an object from the Fontwork Gallery is converted into
3D using Toggle Extrusion. The Status Bar displays Shape selected when this type of 3D
object is selected (Figure 169).
View 3D shapes are viewed and edited in 3D or 2D mode. To edit in 2D mode, switch off
extrusion, make the editing changes, and switch back to 3D mode using Toggle Extrusion.

Note
Toggle Extrusion is only used when a 2D shape, or a 3D object that has been
extruded from a 2D shape, or an object from the Fontwork Gallery is selected in a
drawing. It is not available for text, lines, arrows, curves, and polygons.

Figure 168: Status Bar — 3D scene selected

Figure 169: Status Bar — Shape selected
164 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 170: Drawing toolbar with 3D tools installed

Figure 171: 3D-Objects toolbar

Creating 3D objects
3D ready made objects
3D ready made objects are 3D scenes inserted into a drawing using one of the following
methods. The selection and drawing of 3D objects is the same for all methods of inserting a 3D
ready made object.
• Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of 3D Objects on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 170)and select a 3D object from the sub-toolbar that opens. The 3D Objects icon displayedon the Drawing toolbar depends on the 3D object that has been previously selected andused.
• Go to View > Toolbars > 3D-Objects on the Menu bar to open the 3D-Objects toolbar(Figure 171). This toolbar has the same options available as the 3D Objects sub-toolbar
on the Drawing toolbar.
• Go to Shapes > Insert > 3D Objects on the Menu bar and select a 3D object from thesubmenu.
• Go to the 3D Objects panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar (Figure 172) and select a
3D object.

Note
Ready made 3D objects can be repositioned, resized, and edited in the same way
as 2D objects. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects for more information.

Converting 2D objects
Convert a 2D object into a 3D object use one of the following tools. These tools are available on
the Drawing toolbar (highlighted in Figure 170), by right-clicking on the object and selecting fromthe context menu, or the 3D Effects dialog:– To 3D — creates a 3D scene containing an extrusion object.
– To 3D Rotation Object — creates a 3D scene using a default rotation axis.
Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects | 165

Figure 172: Shapes deck on Sidebar– Toggle Extrusion — creates a 3D shape by extruding a 2D object into 3D. Only 3D
shapes that have been extruded can be converted back to a 2D object.
– Convert To Rotation Object — available in the 3D Effects dialog. Converts a
selected 2D object into a 3D rotation object. Also, selecting several ungrouped 2D
objects can be converted into a single 3D rotation object. For more information see“3D effects” on page 170.

Notes
Before creating 3D objects in a drawing, it is recommended that the extra 3D
tools (To 3D; To 3D Rotation Object; Toggle Extrusion) are added to the
Drawing toolbar using Visible Buttons or the Customize dialog. For more
information on using Visible Buttons and the Customize dialog, see Appendix B,
Toolbars and the Getting Started Guide.
After installing the 3D tools onto the Drawing toolbar, the tools only become
available for use when a 2D object is selected in a drawing.

Extrusion
Extrusion converts a 2D object into a 3D scene by extruding a 2D object toward the observer.
The scene is rotated by 20 degrees around the horizontal axis to make the 3D effect more
visible. Examples of 3D conversion using extrusion are shown in Figure 173.
166 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 173: Example of 3D conversion using extrusion

Figure 174: Example of 3D conversion using rotation
After selecting a 2D object, convert it to a 3D scene using one of the following methods:• Right-click on the 2D object and select Convert > To 3D from the context menu.
• Click on To 3D in the Drawing toolbar.
• Go to Shape > Convert > To 3D on the Menu bar.
• Click on Convert to 3D in the 3D Effects dialog. For more information see “3D effects” onpage 170.

Rotation
To 3D Rotation Object or Convert to Rotation Object converts a 2D object into a 3D scene byrotating the object using the left edge of the bounding box around the object as the axis ofrotation. Examples of 3D conversion using either of these rotation tools are shown in Figure 174.
The actual 3D scene created depends on the angle and shape of the object being rotated.
After selecting a 2D object in a drawing, convert it to a 3D scene using rotation with one of thefollowing methods:• Right-click on a 2D object and select Convert > To 3D Rotation Object from the context
menu.
• Click on To 3D Rotation Object in the Drawing toolbar.

Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects | 167

Figure 175: Example of 3D conversion using toggle extrusion• Go to Shape > Convert > To 3D Rotation Object on the Menu bar.
• Click on Convert To Rotation Object in the 3D Effects dialog. For more information see“3D effects” on page 170.

Toggle extrusion
Extrusion is where parallel surfaces are moved to create a 3D shape. In Draw, the 2D surface is
moved forwards out of the drawing level. At the same time the object is slightly tilted and central
projection turned on, creating the impression of a 3D shape. Draw uses a default value for thisextrusion (body depth) based on the size of the 2D object. The value can be changed after the
extrusion, see “Editing 3D objects” on page 168.
Extrusion conversion is carried out using Toggle Extrusion. Extrusion only works on Basic
Shapes, Symbol Shapes, Block Arrows, Flowcharts, Callouts, Stars and Banners, and Fontworkthat are included as a part of the default set of tools on the Drawing toolbar, or in the Shapes
deck on the Sidebar. Examples of toggle extrusion are shown in Figure 175.
1) Select a 2D object in a drawing created from Basic Shapes, Symbol Shapes, Block
Arrows, Flowcharts, Callouts, Stars and Banners, or Fontwork.
2) Click on Toggle Extrusion on the Drawing toolbar to convert the 2D object into a 3D
shape.
3) To convert a 3D conversion back into a 2D object, select the 3D object and click on
Toggle Extrusion on the Drawing toolbar.

Note
Extrusion cannot be used on text objects created using Insert Text Box or Insert
Vertical Text.

Editing 3D objects
Note
Where 3D scenes are created from more than one 2D object, a 3D scene groupis automatically created. This 3D scene group cannot be ungrouped and any
editing carried out affects all 3D objects within the group. To edit an individual 3D
object within this 3D scene group, enter the group. For more information on
working with groups, see Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects.

168 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 176: 3D-Settings toolbar

Figure 177: Example of changing 3D settings

Position, Size and Rotation
Editing the position, size and rotation of 3D objects is similar to 2D objects. See Chapter 3,
Working with Objects for more information.

3D settings
Go to View > Toolbars > 3D-Settings on the Menu bar to open the 3D-Settings toolbar(Figure 176). The 3D-Settings toolbar activates when a 3D shape is selected created from a 2D
object using “Toggle extrusion” on page 168.
Any changes made using the editing tools on the 3D-Settings toolbar are applied to the selected
3D shape immediately displaying the 3D effect. Figure 177 shows an example of tilting left,
increasing extrusion depth, and changing 3D color using the 3D-Settings toolbar.
The tools available for editing 3D shapes are as follows.
Tilt Down
Tilts an object downward (horizontal axis rotation) by 5 degrees each time the tool isused.
Tilt Up
Tilts an object upward (horizontal axis rotation) by 5 degrees each time the tool is used.
Tilt Left
Tilts an object left (vertical axis rotation) by 5 degrees each time the tool is used.
Tilt Right
Tilts the selected object right (vertical axis rotation) by 5 degrees each time the tool is
used.
Depth
Opens a pop-up menu where the extrusion depth can be set from an object by a fixed orcustom amount.
Direction
Opens a pop-up menu where the view direction can be set to create an extrusion in either
a perspective or parallel projection.

Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects | 169

LightingOpens a pop-up menu where the direction and intensity of the lighting can be set whencreating an extrusion.
Surface
Opens a pop-up menu where the surfaces of the object can be set as Wire Frame, Matt,
Plastic, or Metal display.
3D Color
Opens a pop-up menu where the color used for the extrusion can be set. This color does
not have to be the same as the color used for the original 2D object.

3D effects
The 3D Effects dialog (Figure 178) offers a wide range of possible settings for editing 3D readymade objects or 3D scenes. This dialog is also used to convert a 2D object to 3D using the tools
in the bottom left corner of the dialog. Open the 3D Effects dialog using one of the following
methods:• Click on 3D Effects on the Standard or Line and Filling toolbar.
• Go to Format > 3D-Effects on the Menu bar.
Any 3D effects applied to a 3D scene are not carried out until Assign is selected in the top rightof the 3D Effects dialog. This allows for all 3D effect changes to be carried out before application
to a 3D scene.

Notes
The 3D Effects dialog cannot be used on 3D shapes created using Toggle
Extrusion because the correct formatting results will not be achieved. If the 3D
Effects dialog is used in error, remove any incorrect formatting by going toFormat > Default Formatting on the Menu bar.
Any options grayed out in the pages in the 3D Effects dialog cannot be used for aselected object.

3D conversion
In the bottom left corner of the 3D Effects dialog are tools for converting a 2D object into a 3D
scene and changing the projection used in a 3D scene.
Convert to 3D
Converts the selected object into a 3D scene. This tool works in the same way as using“Extrusion” on page 166.
Convert to Rotation Object
Converts a 2D object into a 3D scene using body rotation. This tool works in the same
way as using “Rotation” on page 167.
Perspective On/Off
Switches perspective projection on or off for a 3D scene. Perspective projection is atechnique to create a linear illusion of depth. As objects get further away from the viewer,a perspective drawing decreases in size at a constant rate.

Note
The 3D Effects dialog has five pages to provide options for Geometry, Shading,Illumination, Textures, and Material. The tools to change pages for the different
types of 3D effects are located at the top of the 3D Effects dialog.

170 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 178: 3D Effects dialog — Geometry page

3D Effects — Geometry
Clicking on Geometry in the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 178) opens the options available on theGeometry page for changing the geometry of a 3D object.
Geometry
Defines the properties of an object in a 3D scene.
Rounded edges
Enter the amount required to round the corners of a 3D shape as shown by theexample in Figure 179. The default setting for rounded edges is 10%.
Scaled depthEnter the amount required to increase or decrease the frontal area of a selected 3D
object. Figure 180 shows an example where the scaled depth has been increased to150% and then decreased to 50%. The default setting for scaled depth is 100%.
Rotation angle
Enter the angle in degrees to rotate a 2D object that has been converted to 3D using To
3D Rotation Object. Figure 181 shows an example of a 2D circle where the rotation
angle is changed to 180 degrees.
Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects | 171

Figure 179: Example of rounded edges
1)
2)

10% rounded edges (default)
75% rounded edges

Figure 180: Example of changing scaled depth
1)
2)
3)

100% scaled depth (default)
50% scaled depth
150% scaled depth

Figure 181: Example of changing rotation angle
1)
2)
3)

2D circle
Converted using To 3D Rotation Object
Rotation angle changed to 180 deg

172 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 182: Example of increasing depth
1)
2)
3)

2D circle
Converted using To 3D
Depth increased to 3cm

Figure 183: Example of using segments
1)
2)

10 segments
30 segments

DepthEnter the extrusion depth for the selected 2D object that has been converted to 3D
using To 3D. Figure 182 shows an example of a 2D circle converted to a 3D cylinder
with the extrusion depth increased to 3 cm.
Segments
Changes the number of segments that Draw uses to draw a 3D rotation object. The
higher the number of segments, the smoother the object surface is. However, a highsegment number may increase the time it takes to generate the 3D object on a display.
Figure 183 shows the difference on a 3D sphere when the segments have been
increased from 10 to 30 segments horizontally and vertically.
Horizontal
Enter the number of horizontal segments used in the selected 3D rotation object.
VerticalEnter the number of vertical segments used in the selected 3D rotation object.
Normals
Modifies the rendering style of the 3D surface.
Object-SpecificRenders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circularshape is rendered with a spherical surface (Figure 184).

Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects | 173

Figure 184: Examples of using object specific, flat and spherical effects
1)
2)
3)

Object SpecificFlat
Spherical

Figure 185: Examples of invert normals and double sided illumination
1)
2)
3)
4)

Invert Normals off; Double Sided Illumination off
Invert Normals on; Double Sided Illumination off
Invert Normals off; Double Sided Illumination on
Invert Normals on; Double Sided Illumination on

Flat
Renders the 3D surface as polygons (Figure 184).
Spherical
Renders a smooth 3D surface regardless of the shape of the object (Figure 184).
Invert Normals
Inverted normal is a normal that is pointing in the wrong direction (Figure 185). This
tells a computer that an outside face is actually an inside face when it is not. If there isa hollow design, an inverted normal can be indicated because both surfaces facing are
in and out in the same model.
Double-Sided Illumination
Lights the outside and the inside of the object (Figure 185). This has only an effect, if
the inside is drawn at all, see Double-Sided. This is a setting for the whole of the 3D
scene and not for a single object within the scene.
Double-Sided
3D object has outside (front) and inside (back) faces (Figure 185). With Double-Sidedswitched off, only the outside face of the object is rendered. The effect, when looking
from outside, is that the object is solid, but, when looking from inside, the front face istransparent. If there is no view to the inside face, normal for an extruded 3D object withsolid texture, Double-Sided should be switched off to improve performance during
rendering. Any 3D object created using rotation often allows an inside view and it isrecommended that Double-Sided is switched on.

Note
Figure 185 demonstrates the 3D effect of using Invert Normals in conjunction withusing the 3D effect Double-Sided Illumination.

174 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 186: 3D-Effects dialog — Shading page

3D Effects — Shading
The Shading page of the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 186) provides options to set the shading,shadow, and camera effects on a selected 3D object.
ShadingSpecifies the mode of shading applied to a 3D object (Figure 187).
Gouraud
This shading mode is a method used in computer graphics to simulate the differing
effects of light and color across the surface of an object. In practice, it is used toachieve smooth lighting on low-polygon surfaces without the heavy computational
requirements of calculating lighting for each pixel.
PhongThis shading mode is an interpolation technique for surface shading calculating thenormal of a point in the polygon by interpolating the normals of the vertices. The angle
between normal and lighting direction determines how much of the lighting is used tocolor the pixel.

Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects | 175

Figure 187: Examples of shading mode
1)
2)
3)

Gouraud
Phong
Flat

Figure 188: Examples of shadow surface angle
1)
2)

0 deg shadow
50 deg shadow

FlatThis shading mode refers to the depiction of depth perception in 3D models or
illustrations by varying the level of darkness. It assigns a single color of shading to asingle segment on the surface of the object.
Shadow
Adds or removes a shadow from a selected 3D object (Figure 188). A shadow is
generated only from the first light source. Enter a Surface Angle from the light source tothe surface between 0 to 90 degrees to cast a shadow.
CameraSets the camera options for a selected 3D scene as if a camera is being used to take aphotograph (Figure 189). The settings affect only central perspective and not parallel
projection.
DistanceEnter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected 3D
scene. The default setting for distance is 2.6cm.
Focal length
Enter the focal length of the camera lens, where a small value corresponds to a fisheyelens and a large value to a telephoto lens. The default setting for focal length is 10cm.

176 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 189: Example of changing camera angle
1)
2)

Default settings — distance 2.6 cm; focal length 10 cm
Distance 10 cm; focal length 100 cm

Figure 190: 3D Effects dialog — Illumination page

Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects | 177

3D Effects — Illumination
The Illumination page of the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 190) defines how a 3D scene is lit and thesettings apply to all 3D objects in a scene. The light source direction, color, and ambient light are
specified for the 3D scene.
By default, one light source is already selected when the Illumination page is opened. A
maximum of eight sources can be used and each light source can use a different color.
The light source location and color are shown in the lower right corner of the Illumination page.
The vertical slider bar adjusts the lighting angle and the horizontal slider bar rotates the lightabout the object. Alternatively, click on the light point and drag the light source to the required
position.
To change the preview from a sphere to a cube, click on the small square to the right of thehorizontal slider bar and below the vertical slider bar.
Each light source selected is shown as a small colored sphere in the specified color. The larger
colored sphere indicates the active light source.
1) Select a Light source to turn the light source on. The icon changes to an illuminated bulb.
2) Click again on the selected light source to adjust the color for the light source.
3) Select a color for the light from one of the color palettes in the Light source drop-down list.
A different color can be used for each light source selected.
4) Select a color from one of the color palettes in the Ambient light drop-down list to set thecolor of the surrounding light.
5) To deselect a light source, select a light source already selected and click on it again.

3D Effects — Textures
On the Textures page of the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 191) the surface texture properties are set
for a selected 3D object. Textures is only available after the area fill of a 3D object is set to
Gradient, Image, Pattern, or Hatch. For more information on changing area fill, see Chapter 4,
Changing Object Attributes.
Type
Sets the color properties of the texture.
Black & White
Converts the texture to black and white.
Color
Converts the texture to color.
Mode
Shows or hides shading.
Only Texture
Applies the texture without shading.
Texture and Shading
Applies the texture with shading to lighten or darken the illumination.
Projection X
Sets the options for displaying the texture along the X axis. Only one of the threefollowing options can be selected.
Object-Specific
Automatically adjusts the texture for best fit based on the shape and size of the object.
This is the default setting except for extrusion objects.

178 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 191: 3D Effects dialog — Textures page
Parallel
Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis and is mirrored on the rear side of theobject. This is the default setting for extrusion objects.
Circular
Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around an object.
Projection Y
Sets the options for displaying the texture along the Y axis. Only one of the three following
options can be selected.
Object-Specific
Automatically adjusts the texture for best fit based on the shape and size of the object.
This is the default setting except for extrusion objects.
Parallel
Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis and is mirrored on the rear side of theobject. This is the default setting for extrusion objects.
Circular
Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around an object.

Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects | 179

Figure 192: 3D Effects dialog — Material page
Filtering
Filters out noise that can occur when a texture is applied to a 3D object.
Filtering On/Off
Applies a soft focus filter blurring the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles.

3D Effects — Material
On the Materials page of the 3D Effects dialog (Figure 192) the 3D object appearance ischanged to represent different materials. Materials and Textures can be combined with eachother and it is a matter of trial and error to achieve the desired result.
Material
Assigns a color from a color palette. For custom colors, see Chapter 11, Advanced Draw
Techniques for more information on creating custom colors.
Favorites
Select a material type for the selected object from the Favorites drop-down list.
Object color
Select a color from one of the color palettes in the Object color drop-down list to apply
to the object.
180 | LibreOffice Draw User GuideIllumination color
Select a color from one of the color palettes in the Illumination color drop-down list.
This illuminates the object and brightens parts of the object which lie in shadow making
the object seem more illuminated.
Specular
Sets the light reflection properties for the selected object simulating the reflecting capacityof the surface. The position of the illuminated point is determined by the setting of the firstlight source.
Color
Select a color to be reflected from the object from one of the color palettes in the Color
drop-down list.
Intensity
Enter the intensity of the specular effect as a percentage.
Colors Dialog
Opens the Pick a Color dialog where custom colors are defined using the 2D graphic andnumerical gradient chart. Any colors created are stored in the custom palette. See
Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques for more information on creating custom colors.

Note
Metallic and glass surfaces do not simulate well because the appearance of thesematerials is produced using reflection.

Tip
Do not use a very high brightness value for individual colors. Colors are additiveand it is easy to end up with a colored area that is white.

Combining objects
Multiple 3D objects cannot be combined using Shape > Combine on the Menu bar or the
keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+K (macOS ⌘+Shift+K). Multiple 2D objects have to becreated first, then a single 3D object created as follows (see Chapter 5, Combining Multiple
Objects for more information on combining objects):
1) Create multiple 2D objects and carry out all necessary editing changes.
2) Make sure all 2D objects are selected to create a single 3D object.
3) Create a single 3D object combining the selected 2D objects using one of the following
methods (examples of 3D objects are shown in Figure 193):– Click on To 3D or To 3D Rotation Object on the Drawing toolbar.
– Right-click on the selected multiple 2D objects and select Convert > To 3D or To 3D
Rotation Object from the context menu.
– Go to Shape > Convert > To 3D or To 3D Rotation Object on the Menu bar.

Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects | 181

Figure 193: Example of creating a 3D object from multiple 2D objects
1)
2)
3)

Multiple 2D objects
3D object created using To 3D
3D object created using To 3D Rotation Object

Figure 194: Example of assembling 3D objects

182 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Assembling 3D objects
3D objects that each form a separate 3D scene can be combined or assembled into a single 3D
scene. An example procedure for assembling 3D objects is as follows and shown in Figure 194:1) Select a 3D object (for example, a cube) from 3D Objects on the Drawing toolbar, orShapes deck on the Sidebar and place it in a drawing.
2) Select a second 3D object (for example, a sphere) from 3D Objects on the Drawing
toolbar, or Shapes deck on the Sidebar and place it in the drawing.
3) If necessary, set the area fill to None and the lines to Continuous to create wire frame
objects. This makes it easier to position both objects in the assembled 3D scene.
4) Select the second 3D object (sphere) and go to Edit > Cut on the Menu bar, or right-clickon the object and select Cut from the context menu.
5) Double-click the first 3D object (cube) to enter the group, or go Shape > Group > Enter
Group on the Menu bar.
6) Go to Edit > Paste on the Menu bar, or right-click on the first 3D object and select Pastefrom the context menu. The sphere now appears inside the cube and is now part of thesame group.
7) If required, edit the individual objects, or change their position within the group.
8) Double-click outside the 3D assembled scene to exit the group, or go to Shape > Group> Exit Group on the Menu bar.

Note
The second object also reappears in its original position when Paste is carriedout. This object is NOT part of the assembled 3D scene and can be deleted if
necessary.

Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects | 183

Draw Guide 7.5

Chapter 8,
Connections, Flowcharts,
and Organization Charts

Connectors and gluepoints
Connectors are lines or arrows whose ends automatically dock to a connection or gluepoint on
the border of an object. Connectors use connecting lines between objects and these connecting
lines remain connected to objects, even when objects are moved or rearranged. Also, when an
object with a connector attached is moved or resized, the connector automatically adjusts its
shape to accommodate the changes. For example, when creating a flowchart, or an organization
chart, using connectors instead of simple lines removes the need to redraw lines between objects
when making changes to a chart.
When a connector is drawn or selected, the selection handles are different to the normal
selection handles used on lines or objects. The termination points of a connector are round at thestart and end points of a connector, and square in the center of the lines that make up aconnector, as shown by the example of a straight connector in Figure 195. The square selection
handles on the selected connector are used to change the routing of a connector.

Connectors
Draw has a comprehensive selection of connectors, for example, when used in a flowchart ororganization chart. The default set of connectors can be accessed using one of the following
methods:• Click the triangle ▼ to the right of Connectors on the Drawing toolbar to open a pop-up
toolbar. The Connectors icon changes shape depending on the last connector used.
• Select a connector from the options available in the Connectors panel in the Shapes
deck on the Sidebar.

Connectors sub-toolbar
If necessary, the connectors on the Drawing toolbar can be displayed as a Connectors
sub-toolbar as follows:
1) Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Connectors on the Drawing toolbar to open a
pop-up toolbar.

Figure 195: Example of connectors between objects
1)2)

Straight connector with arrows
Curved connector with arrows

Figure 196: Connectors sub-toolbar
186 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

1) Click on the line at the top of the pop-up toolbar and drag it on to the Workspace.
2) Release the cursor to create the Connectors sub-toolbar (Figure 196).

Connector type groups
Connectors are grouped into four main groups as follows:Standard
Standard connectors start with Connector. Line segments run vertically and horizontally.
Creates a connector with one or more 90 degree angle bends.
Line
Line connectors start with Line. Consists of a line segment with two smaller segments at
the ends and draws a connector that bends near a gluepoint. To adjust the length of theline segment between a bend point and a gluepoint, click on the connector and drag thebend point.
Straight
Straight connectors start with Straight. Consists of a single line and draws a straight line
connector.
CurvedCurved connectors start with Curved. Based on Bézier curves, a curved connector isdrawn and bends around objects.

Connector types
The full range of available connectors are accessed by clicking on the triangle ▼ on the right of
the Connectors sub-toolbar and selecting Visible Buttons from the context menu. Depending on
the computer system being used, connectors already installed on the Connectors sub-toolbar are
indicated either by a check mark against the name, or the connector icon is highlighted.
Connectors are installed on the Connectors sub-toolbar in the same order that they appear in the
Visible Buttons drop-down list. The connector types are numbered from left to right when
installed on the Connectors sub-toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)

Connector Ends with Arrow
Straight Connector Ends with Arrow
Curved Connector Ends with Arrow
Line Connector Ends with Arrow
Connector
Straight Connector
Curved Connector
Line Connector
Connector Starts with Arrow
Straight Connector starts with Arrow
Curved Connector Starts with Arrow
Line Connector Starts Arrow

13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)

Connector Ends with Circle
Straight Connector Ends with Circle
Curved Connector Ends with Circle
Line Connector Ends with Circle
Connector Starts with Circle
Straight Connector starts with Circle
Curved Connector Starts with Circle
Line Connector Starts with Circle
Connector with Circles
Straight Connector with Circle
Curved Connector with Circle
Line Connector with Circle

Adding connectors to objects
1) Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Connectors on the Drawing toolbar to open theoptions available for selecting connectors.
2) Select the type of connector required and move the cursor onto the first object. When the
cursor is over the first object, small crosses appear around the object edges replacing theobject selection handles as shown in Figure 197.
3) Position the cursor over a gluepoint, then click and drag the cursor toward another object
to start creating a connector. When the cursor reaches the target object, small crosses
appear indicating gluepoints around the object edges, as shown in Figure 197.

Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts | 187

Figure 197: Example of object gluepoints
4) Move the cursor over the required gluepoint on the target object and release theconnector to draw the connector. The round selection handles at each end of theconnector are attached to the gluepoints on each object.
5) If necessary, use the square control points that appear on the connector to adjust the pathof the connector so that it does not cover any other object in its path. See “Modifying
connectors” on page 188 for more information.

Notes
The start and end round selection handles of a connector cannot be swapped. To
swap the start and end points of a connector, the connector has to be deleted anda new connector drawn in the opposite direction.
The end point of a connector can also be positioned in an empty part of a drawing
where it is locked into place. This end point can then be moved and attached toan object when necessary.

Modifying connectors
Connectors can be modified using one of the following methods:• To detach or reposition a connector, click and drag one of the round end points of aconnector line to a different location.
• To change the connector route between objects so that the connector does not overlap
any objects on the route, click on one of the square control points on the connector line
and drag it to a new position.
• To modify a connector, right-click on the connector and select Connector from thecontext menu to open the Connector dialog (Figure 198). Use this dialog to change
connector type and its properties.
The options available in the Connector dialog are as follows:Type
Select the connector type group from the drop-down list. See “Connector type groups” onpage 187 for more information.

188 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 198: Connector dialog
Line skew
Defines the skew of a connector line. The dialog preview displays the result of any
changes.
Line spacing
Sets the spacing around a connector.
Begin horizontal
Enter the amount of horizontal space required at the beginning of a connector.
End horizontal
Enter the amount of horizontal space required at the end of a connector.
Begin vertical
Enter the amount of vertical space required at the beginning of a connector.
End vertical
Enter the amount of vertical space required at the end of a connector
Preview box
Displays a preview of the selected connector and the objects the connector is connected
to. The preview changes as changes to the selected connector are made using theConnector dialog. A left click zooms in on the preview and a right-click zooms out.

Gluepoints
Gluepoints are not the same as object selection handles. The selection handles are for moving orchanging the shape of an object (see Chapter 3, Working with Objects for more information).
Gluepoints are used to fix or glue a connector to an object so that when the object moves, theconnector stays fixed to that object
All objects have gluepoints and Figure 197 on page 188 shows an example of the default
gluepoints on an object. Gluepoints are not normally displayed on an object and only become
visible when a connector is selected using one of the following methods.

Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts | 189

Figure 199: Gluepoints toolbar• Select Connectors on the Drawing toolbar. The Connectors icon displayed on the
Drawing toolbar is the connector type was previously used.
• A connector type is selected in the Connectors panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.
To add, customize or delete gluepoints, go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar toactivate the Gluepoints toolbar (Figure 199). This toolbar only becomes visible after using one of
the following methods:• Select Show Gluepoint Functions on the Drawing toolbar.
• Select Edit > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.

Note
Show Gluepoint Functions on the Drawing toolbar is not part of the default setof tools for the Drawing toolbar. To add this tool, right-click in an empty area on
the Drawing toolbar and select Visible Buttons > Gluepoints from the context
menu.

Gluepoint types
When the Gluepoints toolbar opens, only the five tools on the left of Gluepoint Relative are
active. The remaining six tools on the right of the toolbar only become active when Gluepoint
Relative is deselected.
Insert Gluepoint
Inserts a gluepoint at the cursor position in an object when the button is clicked.
Exit Direction Left
Connector attaches to the left edge of the selected gluepoint.
Exit Direction Top
Connector attaches to the top edge of the selected gluepoint.
Exit Direction Right
Connector attaches to the right edge of the selected gluepoint.
Exit Direction Bottom
Connector attaches to the bottom edge of the selected gluepoint.
Gluepoint Relative
When selected, the gluepoint moves when an object is resized maintaining its position
relative to the object borders. When deselected, a gluepoint can be repositioned after theobject is resized. This tool is selected by default when the Gluepoint toolbar opens.
The following six tools only become active when Gluepoint Relative is deselected.
Gluepoint Horizontal Left
When an object is resized, the selected gluepoint remains fixed at the left edge of theobject.
Gluepoint Horizontal Center
When an object is resized, the selected gluepoint remains fixed at the center of theobject.

190 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Gluepoint Horizontal Right
When an object is resized, the selected gluepoint remains fixed at the right edge of theobject.
Gluepoint Vertical Top
When an object is resized, the selected gluepoint remains fixed at the top edge of theobject.
Gluepoint Vertical Center
When an object is resized, the selected gluepoint remains fixed at the vertical center ofthe object.
Gluepoint Vertical Bottom
When an object is resized, the selected gluepoint remains fixed at the bottom edge of theobject.

Note
Each gluepoint added to an object can have only one horizontal position and one
vertical position. Only one of the horizontal position tools and one of the vertical
position tools can be selected and used at any one time.

Adding gluepoints
By default, most objects normally have four gluepoints as shown in the example in Figure 197 on
page 188. Additional gluepoints are added to an object as follows:
1) Go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar to activate the Gluepoints toolbar.
2) Make sure no objects are selected and use one of the following methods to open the
Gluepoints toolbar:– Select Show Gluepoint Functions on the Drawing toolbar.
– Select Edit > Gluepoints on the Menu bar.
3) Select the object, then click on Insert Gluepoint on the Gluepoints toolbar.
4) Move the cursor to the required position on the selected object and the cursor changes
shape. Normally this is a cross, but the actual shape used depends on the computer
setup.
5) Click once to add a gluepoint. To add more gluepoints, move the cursor to a new positionand click.
6) When finished adding gluepoints, move the cursor off the selected object and click in an
empty space to deselect the object.
7) Alternatively, right-click on a gluepoint previously added to the object and select Insert
Gluepoint from the context menu, then click and drag the new gluepoint to the required
position.
8) Select the type of gluepoint required from the options available on the Gluepoints toolbar.
See “Gluepoint types” on page 190 for more information.

Note
When an object has no fill, a gluepoint can only be added to the border of anempty object.

Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts | 191

Tip
When adding, moving or customizing gluepoints, it is recommended to use thezoom function making it easier to work with gluepoints. See Chapter 3, Working
with Objects for more information. Also, gluepoints can snap to the grid making iteasier to position a gluepoint.

Customizing gluepoint exit direction
Customize the exit direction for a gluepoint that has been added to an object as follows:
1) Go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar to activate and open the
Gluepoints toolbar.
2) Double-click on a gluepoint that has been added to an object to select the gluepoint forcustomization.
3) Select the required exit direction for a connector attached to the gluepoint using one of
the following methods:– Select the required exit direction on the Gluepoints toolbar.
– Right-click on a gluepoint and select an exit direction from the context menu.

Customizing gluepoint positioning
Customize the horizontal and vertical positioning for a gluepoint that has been added to an object
as follow:
1) Go to View > Toolbars > Gluepoints on the Menu bar to activate and open the
Gluepoints toolbar.
2) Double-click on a gluepoint that has been added to an object to select the gluepoint forcustomization.
3) Click on Gluepoint Relative on the Gluepoints toolbar to deselect the tool, or right-clickon the gluepoint and select Gluepoint Relative from the context menu to deselect thetool.
4) Select the horizontal and vertical positioning tools required for the gluepoint using one of
the following methods. Only one horizontal positioning tool and one vertical positioning
tool can be used at any one time:– Click and select the required horizontal or vertical positioning tool in the Gluepoints
toolbar.
– Right-click on the gluepoint and select the required horizontal and vertical positioning
from the context menu.

Note
Only gluepoints that have been added to an object can be customized. The
default gluepoints (example shown in Figure 197 on page 188) included with anobject cannot be customized or deleted.

Deleting gluepoints
1) Select a gluepoint for deletion that has previously been added to the object.
2) Press the Delete or Backspace key, or go to Edit > Cut on the Menu bar.

192 | LibreOffice Draw User GuideConnector text
Text is easily added and formatted to connectors making a flowchart or organization chart easierto follow. See Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text for more information on working with andformatting text.

Adding text1) Select a connector and the control points become active.
2) Enter text mode using one of the following methods. A flashing text cursor appears close
to the connector and the Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 200) opens.
– Click on Insert Text Box or Insert Vertical Text (if added) on the Drawing toolbar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F2 to create horizontal text on the selected connector.
3) Type the required text for the connector.
4) If necessary, format the connector text. See “Formatting text” on page 193 for more
information on formatting and editing text text.
5) When adding and formatting text is complete, move the cursor away from the text andconnector, then click to end text mode. This also closes the Text Formatting toolbar.

Note
In a default installation of LibreOffice, the Insert Text Box and Insert Vertical
Text tools may not be installed on the Drawing toolbar. To add text tools to the
Drawing toolbar, right-click in an empty area in the Drawing toolbar and go to
Visible Buttons, then select Text Box and/or Vertical Text from the context
menu.

Formatting text1) Select a connector with text added and activate the control points to enter text mode. See“Adding text” on page 193 for more information on adding text to a connector.
2) Use the tools available on the Text Formatting toolbar, or the options available in Format> Text on the Menu bar to format the text. By default, connector text is formatted withhorizontal central alignment and vertical central positioning for the connector text
paragraph.
3) Right-click on the connector text and select Text Attributes from the context menu to
open the Text dialog (Figure 202) and format the connector text as to how it appears next
to the connector.
4) Click OK to save the changes to the text and close the Text dialog.
5) Move the cursor away from text and connector, then click to end the text mode. This also
closes the Text Formatting toolbar.

Figure 200: Text Formatting toolbar

Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts | 193

Figure 201: Text dialog — Text pageThe options available in the Text dialog are as follows:
Drawing Object Text
Fit to frame
Resizes the text to fit the entire area of a connector rectangle or frame.
Adjust to contour
Adapts the text flow so that it matches the contours of the selected connector.
Spacing to Borders
Specify the amount of space to leave between the connector and the borders of the text.
Text Anchor
Select one of nine positions to anchor the text within the connector rectangle.
Full width
Anchors the text to the full width of the connector rectangle. When selected, only the top,
middle and bottom center positions can be used to anchor the text

Notes
The options available for text animation are not recommended for connector text
unless the drawing is going to be displayed as part of a presentation. See the
Impress Guide for more information on text animation.
The options available for text columns are not recommended for connector text.
Text columns are normally used for text that is placed into a text box when adding
information to a drawing, or into an object such as a rectangle or circle. For more
information on text columns, see Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text.

194 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 202: Flowchart sub-toolbar

Flowcharts
Draw has a floating Flowchart sub-toolbar (Figure 203) that includes a large selection of flowchart
tools to create a flowchart (also known as flow diagrams). The available flowchart shapes on the
Flowchart sub-toolbar, from left to right, are as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)

Flowchart: Process
Flowchart: Alternate Process
Flowchart: Decision
Flowchart: Data
Flowchart: Predefined Process
Flowchart: Internal Storage
Flowchart: Document
Flowchart: Multidocument
Flowchart: Terminator
Flowchart: Preparation
Flowchart: Manual Input
Flowchart: Manual Operation
Flowchart: Connector
Flowchart: Off-page Connector

15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
28)

Flowchart: Card
Flowchart`: Punched Type
Flowchart: Summing Junction
Flowchart: Or
Flowchart: Collate
Flowchart: Sort
Flowchart: Extract
Flowchart: Merge
Flowchart: Stored Data
Flowchart: Delay
Flowchart: Sequential Access
Flowchart: Magnetic DiscFlowchart: Direct Access Storage
Flowchart: Display

If necessary, create a Flowchart sub-toolbar as follows:
1) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Flowchart on the Drawing toolbar to open a
Flowchart pop-up menu.
2) Click on the line at the top of the Flowchart pop-up menu and drag the pop-up menu into
the Workspace.
3) Release the cursor and the pop-up menu becomes a floating Flowchart sub-toolbar(Figure 203).
An example flowchart is shown in Figure 204 and the recommended basic steps when creating a
flowchart are as follows:• When adding objects or flowchart shapes to a flowchart, see Chapter 2, Drawing Basic
Shapes for information on how to draw and resize object shapes.
• Add text to each flowchart shape to make it easily identified in the flowchart. See
Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques for more
information.
• Use connector lines in a flowchart. This allows repositioning of an object in a flowchart
while maintaining connections with the other objects in the flowchart. See “Who is thisuser guide for?” on page 8 for more information.
• Use the zoom, grid, and snap functions to help in positioning objects in a flowchart. See
Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Object Points for more information.
• Use the alignment and distribution functions to give a flowchart a more professional look.
See Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects for more information.

Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts | 195

Figure 203: Example flowchart

Figure 204: Example organization chart

Organization charts
Draw does not have a toolbar for organization charts, but these charts are easily created using
basic shapes, flowchart shapes, and connectors. Hierarchy in an organization is easily indicatedusing shading and/or color. When using shading and color in an organization chart, make surethe selection provides a good contrast between the text and the shading or color. This makes thechart easy to read on a computer display or in a printed document.
An example of an organization chart is shown in Figure 204. This was drawn using the rectangle
basic shape and connectors.
• When adding objects to a chart, see Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes for information on
how to draw and resize object shapes.

196 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide• Add text to each object in the organization chart to make it easily identified in the chart.
See Chapter 2, Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques formore information.
•

Use connectors in an organization chart. This allows repositioning of an object in a chart
while maintaining connections with the other objects in the chart. See “Connectors andgluepoints” on page 186 for more information.
• Use the zoom, grid, and snap functions to help in positioning objects in a chart. See
Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Object Points for more information.
• Use the alignment and distribution functions to give an organization chart a more
professional look. See Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects for more information.
• Duplicate objects when more than one of the same shape and size is required. See
Chapter 5, Combining Multiple Objects for more information.

Chapter 8, Connections, Flowcharts, and Organization Charts | 197

Draw Guide 7.5

Chapter 9,
Adding and Formatting Text

Introduction
When text is used in drawings, it is placed inside an object or text box. This chapter describes
how to create, format, use, delete text, and provides information for the various types of text thatcan be inserted into a drawing. Also, there is information on how to insert special forms of text
such as numbered or bulleted lists, tables, fields, hyperlinks, columns, and Fontwork.

Note
When selecting a text tool to add text to a drawing, Draw automatically switches
to text mode. Also, the Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 205) automatically opens
replacing the Line and Filling toolbar at the top of the drawing.

Text mode
Activating text mode
Before any text is typed into a drawing, text mode must be activated using one of the following
methods.
• For horizontal text only, go to Insert > Text Box on the Menu bar.
• For horizontal text only, use the keyboard shortcut F2.
•

Click on Insert Text Box for horizontal text, or Insert Vertical Text for vertical text on the
Drawing toolbar (Figure 206), or Text toolbar (Figure 207).

Adding vertical text
If Insert Vertical Text is not visible on the Drawing toolbar, it can be added to the toolbar as
follows:
1) Go to Tools > Options > Language Settings > Languages (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > Language Settings > Languages) on the Menu bar to open the
Languages page in the Options dialog.
2) In Default Languages for Documents, select the option Asian. Accept the default
settings for this option.
3) Click OK to close the Options dialog and save the changes.
4) Right-click in an empty area on the Drawing toolbar (Figure 206) and select Visible
Buttons from the context menu.
5) Select Vertical Text from the drop-down list of options to add Insert Vertical Text to the
Drawing toolbar.

Figure 205: Text Formatting toolbar

200 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 206: Drawing toolbar

Figure 207: Text toolbar

Text toolbar
It is recommended to have the Text toolbar (Figure 207) available in Draw when working text. If
the Text toolbar is not available, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Text from thecontext menu to add it to the available toolbars. The tools available on the Text toolbar,
numbered from left to right, are as follows:
1)
2)
3)

Insert Text Box (F2)
Fit Text in Textbox Size
Callouts

4)
5)
6)Insert Vertical Text
Fit Vertical Text to Frame
Vertical Callouts

Text boxes
Creating text boxes
When text is added to a drawing, a text box is automatically created to contain the text. By
default, the text box either expands horizontally to accommodate a single line of horizontal text,
or vertically to accommodate a single line of vertical text.

Note
Text boxes are only for text and cannot contain illustrations, inline pictures,
formulas, tables, or objects.
1) Activate text mode in Draw for horizontal or vertical, see “Activating text mode” onpage 200. The Text Formatting toolbar automatically opens, replacing the Line and Filling
toolbar.
2) Click at the approximate position in the drawing to insert the text box. A text box is createdcontaining a flashing text cursor for the operating system and computer setup being used.
3) Type or paste the text into the text box and the text box expands either horizontally or
vertically to accommodate a single line of text. Also, the left corner of the Status Bar
indicates text edit mode and the position of the text cursor (Figure 208).
4) To create multiple lines in the text box, use one of the following methods:– Press the Enter key at the end of a line of text to create single line paragraphs inside
the text box. The text box expands to accommodate more lines of text.
Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 201

Figure 208: Example of text information on the Status Bar– For horizontal text, click and drag the text cursor horizontally creating a text box withthe approximate width required. As the limits of the text box are reached, the text
automatically word wraps inside the text box and increases text box height as more
text lines are added.
– For vertical text, click and drag the text cursor vertically creating a text box with theapproximate height required. As the limits of the text box are reached, the text
automatically word wraps inside the text box and increases text box width as more
text lines are added.
5) Move, resize, rotate or format the text box as required. For more information, see thefollowing sections and Chapter 3, Working with Objects.
6) Format the text using the various tools on the Text Formatting toolbar. For more
information on text formatting, see “Formatting text” on page 211.
7) When adding and formatting text is completed, click outside the text box to save thechanges and deselect the text box.

Text box borders
By default, when a text box is created, the borders of the text box are only displayed when the
text box is selected. If necessary, use one of the following methods to create a visible borderaround the text box.

Line and Filling toolbar
1) If the Line and Filling toolbar is not visible, go to View > Toolbars > Line and Filling on
the Menu bar to open the toolbar.
2) Click on a text box to select it and display the border indicating that the text box is in editmode.
3) In Line Style on the Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 209), select a line style from theoptions in the drop-down list.

Figure 209: Line and Filling toolbar

202 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 210: Line dialog for text box border4) In Line Width on the Line and Filling toolbar, enter a line width for the text box border.
5) In Line Color on the Line and Filling toolbar, select a color from one of the available color
palettes, or create a custom color.
6) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode and save the changes.

Line dialog
1) Click on a text box to select it and display the border indicating that the text box is in editmode.
2) Open the Line dialog (Figure 210) using one of the following methods:– Right-click on the text box border and select Line from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar.
3) Click on Line to open the Line page.
4) In Style, select a line style from the drop-down list to use as a text box border.
5) In Color, select a color for the line style from one of the available color palettes, or createa custom color.
6) In Width, enter a width for the line style selected.
7) In Transparency, enter a percentage value for the line style, if required.
8) In Corner Style, select the type of corner style from the drop-down list.
9) Click OK to save the changes and close the Line dialog, then click outside the text box toexit edit mode.

Note
For a corner style to be clearly visible in a text box border, it is recommended to
set the line width to a thickness above 0.35cm, as shown in Figure 211.
Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 203

Figure 211: Example of using rounded corners

Figure 212: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Line panel in Sidebar
1) Click on a text box to select it and display the border indicating that the text box is in editmode.
2) In the Sidebar, click on Properties to open the Properties deck in the Sidebar, then click
on Line to open the Line panel (Figure 212).
3) In Line, select a line style from the drop-down list to use as a text box border.
4) In Width, enter a width for the line style selected.
5) In Color, select a color for the line style from one of the available color palettes, or createa custom color.
6) In Transparency, enter a percentage value for the line style, if required.
7) In Corner Style, select the type of corner style from the drop-down list, as shown by theexample in Figure 211.
8) Click outside the text box to exit edit mode.

Moving text boxes1) Click on a text box to select it and display the border indicating that the text box is in editmode.

204 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

2) Move the cursor over the border. The cursor changes shape to the move symbol for thecomputer setup (for example, a clenched hand).
3) Click on the border and drag the text box to a new position in the drawing. A ghosted
outline of the text box shows where it will be placed (Figure 213).
4) Release the text box when it is in the required position.
5) To accurately position a text box, use the Position and Size dialog, or the Position andSize panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects
for more information.
6) When the text box is in the required position, click outside the text box to save thechanges and deselect the text box.

Resizing text boxes1) Click on a text box to select it and display the border indicating that the text box is in editmode.
2) Move the cursor over one of the selection handles. The cursor changes shape to theresizing symbol for the computer setup (for example, a double-headed arrow). The
selection handles are used to resize the text box as follows:– Corner handles change the width and height of the text box simultaneously.
– Top and bottom selection handles change the height of the text box.
– Right and left selection handles change the width of the text box.

Figure 213: Example of moving a text box

Figure 214: Example of resizing a text box

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 205

3) Click and drag the border to a new position to resize the text box. A ghosted outline of thetext box shows is displayed as the text box is resized (Figure 214).
4) Release the text box when it reaches the required size.
5) To accurately resize a text box, use the Position and Size dialog, or the Position andSize panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects
for more information.
6) When the text box is at the required size, click outside the text box to save the changes
and deselect the text box.

Note
Press and hold the Shift key to maintain text box proportions, then click anddrag a selection handle to resize. Release the cursor before releasing the Shift
key.

Rotating text boxes1) Click on a text box to select it and display the border indicating that the text box is in editmode.
2) Click again on the text border and the selection handles change shape and color toindicate rotation mode.
3)

Click on a corner selection handle and drag to rotate the text box. A ghosted outline of thetext box being rotated appears (Figure 215) and the current angle of rotation is shown inthe status bar.

4) Release the text box is at the desired rotation angle.
5) To accurately rotate a text box, use the Rotation page in Position and Size dialog, or the
Position and Size panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar. See Chapter 3, Working
with Objects for more information.

Figure 215: Example rotating a text box

206 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Note
When in rotation mode, the top, bottom, and side selection handles, thoughvisible, are not available for rotating a text box. Also, text boxes cannot be
sheared, slanted, or flipped vertically/horizontally.

Formatting text boxes
Text boxes are treated the same as other basic shapes in a drawing when formatting the area fillor borders of a box. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects for more information on formatting thearea fill or borders of a text box. After formatting the text box to match the drawing requirements,
format the text attributes to make the text appear correctly inside the text box:
1) Select a text box and use one of the following methods to open the Text dialog(Figure 216).
– Right-click on the text box and select Text Attributes from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Text Attributes on the Menu bar.
2) Click on Text in the Text dialog to open the Text page and access to the formatting
options.
3) If required, click on Text Animation to open the Text Animation page to access options
for animating the text. For more information on using text animation in a drawing, see“Text animation” on page 221.
4) If required, click on Text Columns to open the Text Columns page to access the options
for creating columns in a text box. For more information on using text columns in a
drawing, see “Text columns” on page 218.

Figure 216: Text dialog — Text page — formatting text boxes
Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 207

5) Click OK to save the changes to text attributes and close the Text dialog.
6) Click in a blank space to deselect the text box and end the text editing mode.

Text box formatting options
Drawing Object Text
Fit width to text
Expands or reduces text box width to match the length of the text, if the text box issmaller or larger than the text. Can be used with Fit height to text to automaticallyadjust width and height of the text box to the text.
Fit height to text
Expands or reduces the text box height to match the height of the text, if the text box issmaller or larger than the text. Can be used with Fit width to text to automatically adjust
width and height of the text box to the text.
Fit to frame
Resizes text width and height to fit the entire area of the text box without changing thetext box width or height. This option is not available if Fit width to text and/or Fit height
to text options are selected.
Spacing to Borders
Specify the amount of space to leave between the text and the borders of the text box.
Text Anchor
Anchors the text to one of nine positions within the text box. The left and right anchor
positions can only be selected when Full width is not selected. A text anchor only
determines the position of the text within the text box and does not change the paragraphalignment of the text inside the text box.
Full width
When selected, the text box width expands to fit the longest paragraph of text inside thetext box as a single line. When selected, only the top, middle or bottom center positions in
Text Anchor can be used to anchor the text inside the text box.

Deleting text boxes1) Click on the text box so that the selection handles are visible indicating that the text box isin edit mode.
2) Press the Delete or Backspace key. The text box is deleted without any warning.

Text in Draw objects
Note
Text can be added to most Draw objects. However, text cannot be added to 3D
objects, or control elements such as buttons.
By default, an object is not dynamic when first created in Draw and does not behave like a text
box. Also, text does not word wrap inside an object. To keep text within the borders of an object,
use word wrap, paragraphs, line breaks, smaller text size, increasing object size, or a
combination of all methods. Actual method method available depends on the type of Draw object
selected.

208 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 217: Example of text word wrap inside an object
1)
2)

No word wrap
Word wrap to shape applied

Adding text to objects
An example of adding text into a Draw object is shown in Figure 217. The left object does nothave the word wrap option applied and the right object has the word wrap option applied.
1) Create an object in a drawing and make sure the object is selected with the selection
handles displayed.
1) Enter text mode on the selected object using one of the following methods:– Click on Insert Text Box for horizontal text, or Insert Vertical Text for vertical text on
the Drawing or Text toolbar.
– For horizontal text, double-click on the selected object.
– For horizontal text, use the keyboard shortcut F2.
– For vertical text, double-click on the selected object and click on Insert Vertical Text
on the Drawing or Text toolbar.
2) Type or paste text into the selected object.
3) Format the text using the various tools on the Text Formatting toolbar, the panels in theProperties deck on the Sidebar, or the options in Format on the Menu bar. For more
information on text formatting, see “Formatting text” on page 211.
4) If the text goes outside the object borders, click on Text in the Text dialog to open the
Text page (Figure 218) and access text formatting options for a Draw object.
5) If required, click on Text Animation to open the Text Animation page and accessanimation options for text. For more information on using text animation in a drawing, see“Text animation” on page 221.
6) If required, click on Text Columns to open the Text Columns page and access options
for creating columns inside an object. For more information on using text columns in a
drawing, see “Text columns” on page 218.

Text options for objects
Custom Shape Text
Word wrap text in shape
Wraps text to fit inside an object. For example, if the width of the object is changed,
then the height of the object either increases or decreases allowing for the increase or
decrease in the number of text lines.
Resize shape to fit text
Resizes the object to fit the text that is being entered into the object. For example, if theobject already contains one multi-line paragraph of text and this option is selected, thenthe object width expands and the height decreases until the text is a single line of text.
Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 209

Figure 218: Text dialog — Text page — adding text to objects
Spacing to Borders
Specify the amount of space to leave between the text and the borders of the object.
Text Anchor
Anchors the text to one of nine positions within the text box. The left and right anchor
positions can only be selected when Full width is not selected. A text anchor only
determines the position of the text within the text box and does not change the paragraphalignment of the text inside the object.
Full width
When selected, the object width expands to fit the longest paragraph of text inside theobject as a single line. When selected, only the top, middle or bottom center positions in
Text Anchor can be used to anchor the text inside the text box.

Pasting text
Text is pasted into a text box or object by copying text from another object, drawing, or document.
Pasted text retains formatting from the source drawing or document and may not match
formatting of the text already in use. It is good practice to paste text without formatting and apply
formatting later to match any text already in a drawing.

Note
Using Format > Paste on the Menu bar, or the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+V(macOS ⌘+V) pastes copied text directly into a drawing and NOT into an object,creating an OLE object. When creating text boxes or adding text to Draw objects,
it is recommended to paste text into Draw as unformatted text.

210 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

1) Copy and paste text as unformatted text into a drawing, or draw object using one of thefollowing methods:– Go to Edit > Paste Special > Paste Unformatted Text on the Menu bar.
– Go to Edit > Paste Special > Paste Special on the Menu bar to open the Paste
Special dialog. Select Unformatted text and click OK to close the dialog.
– Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+Shift+V (macOS ⌘+Shift+V) and the Paste
Special dialog opens. Select Unformatted text and click OK to close the dialog.
– Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Paste on the Standard toolbar and selectUnformatted text from the context menu.
2) Format the pasted text to the drawing requirements, or apply a drawing style.
Unformatted text is pasted into a text box at the cursor position, or inside a selected
object and formatted to the default drawing style.

Formatting text
Text formatting gives a drawing a more consistent and professional look without any distracting
elements. Text formatting tools are available on the Text Formatting toolbar and drop-downmenus in Format on the Menu bar. For more information on text formatting, see the Writer
Guide.
If there are several text boxes and/or objects in a drawing that require the same text formatting, it
is recommended to use drawing styles. For more information on using and creating styles, see
Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes.

Quick font resizing
After selecting text, is quickly increase or decrease font size using the tools Increase Font Size
(Ctrl+]) (macOS ⌘+]) and Decrease Font Size (Ctrl+[) (macOS ⌘+[) on the Text
Formatting toolbar. Changing font size depends on the standard sizes available for the font inuse.

Selecting text
Text must be selected before it can be formatted using one of the following methods. Any
formatting changes apply only to the selected text.
• To format all the text in a text box or object, click once on the border of the text box orobject to display the selection handles. Any formatting changes then apply to all text inthe text box or object.
• To format only part of the text, select text using one of the following methods:– Click in the text and drag the cursor over the text to highlight the text.
– Double-click on text to select a complete word, or triple-click to select a wholeparagraph.
– Click in the text, then press and hold the Shift key and use the arrow keys to selecttext.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 211

Paragraph formatting
Direct formatting
Direct text formatting is applied directly to characters, words, sentences, and paragraphs
overriding any formatting that has been applied using styles.
1) Select the text (see “Selecting text” above) and format using one of the following
methods:– Various formatting tools on the Text Formatting toolbar.
– Go to Format on the Menu bar and select a formatting option from the drop-downmenu. Selecting a formatting option opens either a context menu, or dialog providing
further formatting options to apply to the selected text.
– Use the options in the Paragraph and Character dialogs.
– Use the options in the Paragraph and Character panels in the Properties deck on
the Sidebar.
2) Click outside the text box, or object to deselect the text edit mode.

Paragraph dialog
1) Click anywhere in the paragraph being formatted.
2) Use one of the following methods to open the Paragraph dialog (Figure 219).
– Right-click on the selected text and select Paragraph from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Paragraph on the Menu bar.
3) Use the various options on the tabbed pages of the Paragraph dialog to format the text.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Paragraph dialog.
5) Click outside the text box or object to deselect the text.

Figure 219: Paragraph dialog — Indents & Spacing page
212 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 220: Paragraph panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Note
For information on the various formatting options available for text in the pages of
the Paragraph dialog, refer to the Writer Guide.

Paragraph panel in Sidebar
An alternative method of formatting paragraphs is to use the Paragraph panel (Figure 220) in theProperties deck on the Sidebar. Formatting options are limited, but similar in use to the formatting
options available in the Paragraph dialog. Any formatting applied to a paragraph using theSidebar is immediate.
1) Click anywhere in the paragraph being formatted.
2) On the Sidebar, click on Properties to open the Properties deck.
3) If necessary, click on the expansion symbol on the left of the Paragraph title bar to open
the Paragraph panel.
4) Format the text using the various options available in the Paragraph panel.
5) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar to open the Paragraphdialog to format text.

Note
For information on the various formatting options available for text in the
Paragraph panel on the Sidebar, refer to the Writer Guide.

Character formatting
Direct formatting
Direct or manual character formatting is applied to individual characters and words. Direct
character formatting overrides any formatting that has been applied using paragraph formatting
and drawing styles.
Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 213

1) Select the characters for formatting, see “Selecting text” on page 211 for more
information.
2) Format characters using one of the following methods.
– The various formatting tools on the Text Formatting toolbar. Formatting applied tocharacters is immediate.
– Go to Format on the Menu bar. Selecting a formatting option opens either a context
menu or dialog where further formatting options are selected.
– Use the options available in the Character dialog. Clicking OK on the dialog applies
the formatting changes.
– Use the options available in the Character panel in the Properties deck on the
Sidebar. Formatting applied to characters is immediate.
3) Click outside the text box or object to deselect the text.

Character dialog
1) Select the characters for formatting and open the Character dialog (Figure 221) using oneof the following methods:– Right-click on the characters and select Character from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Character on the Menu bar.
2) Use the options on the tabbed pages of the Character dialog to format the selectedcharacters.

Figure 221: Character dialog — Fonts page214 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 222: Character panel in Properties deck on Sidebar3) Click OK to apply the formatting changes and close the dialog.
4) Click outside the text box or object to deselect the text.

Note
For information on the various formatting options available for characters in thepages of the Character dialog, refer to the Writer Guide.

Sidebar Character panel
An alternative method of formatting text is to use the Character panel (Figure 222) in theProperties deck on the Sidebar. The formatting options available are limited, but similar in use to
the formatting options available in the various pages of the Character dialog. Most of the options
are also available on the Text Formatting toolbar.
1) Select a text box or object so that the selection handles on the border are displayed.
2) On the Sidebar, click on Properties to open the Properties deck.
3) Click on the expansion symbol on the left of the Character title bar to open the Character
panel.
4) Format the text using the tools in the Character panel.
5) If necessary, click on More Options on the right of the title bar to open the Character
dialog to format text.

Note
For information on the various formatting options available for characters in the
Character panel on the Sidebar, refer to the Writer Guide.

Unordered or ordered lists
Unordered (bulleted) and ordered (numbered) lists can be created in text boxes and objects.
When creating lists in objects, Draw objects are not dynamic and do not automatically expand as
a list is created.
Creating unordered or ordered lists in Draw is similar to LibreOffice Writer. For more informationon unordered or ordered lists, see the Writer Guide.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 215

Creating lists
Unordered or ordered lists are created in text boxes, or Draw objects as follows:1)

Select all the required text for a list.

2) Create a list using one of the following methods and default settings for lists:– Click on Toggle Unordered List, or Toggle Ordered List on the Text Formatting
toolbar.
– Click on Toggle Unordered List, or Toggle Ordered List in the Lists panel in theProperties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 223).
– Go to Format > Lists > Unordered List, or Ordered List on the Menu bar.
3) To change the format of the list, click on the triangle ▼ on the right of the list icons andselect a list style from the options available in the pop-up More Bullets dialog(Figures 224) or More Numbering dialog (Figure 225).

Figure 223: Lists panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Figure 224: More Bullets dialog

216 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 225: More Numbering dialog

Adjusting list item level and position
The level for each item in an unordered or ordered list is demoted or promoted within a list, or
moved up or down in list order as follows:
1) Click on a list item being demoted, promoted, or moved up or down.
2) Demote a list item down one level at a time using one of the following methods:– Use the Tab key.
– Go to Format > Lists > Demote on the Menu bar.
– Use Demote in the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
3) Promote a list item up one level at a time using one of the following methods:– Use the key combination Shift+Tab.
– Go to Format > Lists > Promote on the Menu bar.
– Use Promote in the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
4) Change the position of a list item in the list order using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Lists > Move Up, or Move Down on the Menu bar.
– Use Move Up, or Move Down in the Lists panel in the Properties deck on the
Sidebar.

Bullets and Numbering dialog
Use the Bullets and Numbering dialog (Figure 226) for more control over list formatting. Selecttext in a text box or object and open the dialog using one of the following methods:• Go to Format > Bullets and Numbering on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on the selected text and select Bullets and Numbering from the context
menu.
• Click on More Options on the right side of Lists panel title bar in the Properties deck on
the Sidebar.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 217

Figure 226: Bullets and Numbering dialog• Click on More Bullets or More Numbering after clicking on the triangle ▼ on the right ofToggle Unordered List, or Toggle Ordered List on the Text Formatting toolbar, or in the
Lists panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.

Note
For more information on the options available in the Bullets and Numbering dialog
for unordered or ordered lists, see the Writer Guide.

Text columns
Text in a drawing can be formatted into columns inside text boxes and objects. However, columns
cannot be used on separate parts of text inside a text box or object. The whole of the text box, orobject has to be used for columns. An example of text columns inside a Draw object is shown in
Figure 227.
The type of columns used in Draw are continuous flow columns. This means that when text
reaches the bottom of a column, text automatically flows into the next column as more text is
added.

218 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 227: Example of text columns in a rectangle basic shape

Figure 228: Text dialog — Text Columns page

Text boxes1) Click the border of a text box to select it so that the selection handles are displayed
indicating that the text box is in edit mode.
2) Open the options for text columns using one of the following methods:– Right-click in the text box and select Text Attributes from the context menu to open
the Text dialog, then click on the Text Columns tab to open the Text Columns page
(Figure 228),– Click on Columns in Properties on the Sidebar to open the Columns panel(Figure 229).
3) Set the number of columns required in the Number of columns box and the required
spacing between the columns in the Spacing box.
4) Save the changes and deselect the text box using one of the following methods:– For the Text dialog, click OK to save the changes and close the dialog, then clickoutside the text box to deselect it.
– For the Columns panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, click outside the text
box to deselect it and save the changes.

Note
Any text inside a text box, or drawing object automatically flows into column
format when the changes are saved.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 219

Figure 229: Columns panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Drawing objects
1) Click on an object to select it so that the selection handles are displayed indicating thatthe object is in edit mode.
2) Double-click on the selected object to switch on text edit mode.
3) Open the options for text columns using one of the following methods:– Right-click in the drawing object and select Text Attributes from the context menu to
open the Text dialog, the click on the Text Columns tab to open the Text Columns
page (Figure 228),– Click on Columns in Properties on the Sidebar to open the Columns panel(Figure 229).
4) Set the number of columns required in the Number of columns box and the required
spacing between the columns in the Spacing box.
5) Save the changes and deselect the object using one of the following methods:– For the Text dialog, click OK to save the changes and close the dialog, then clickoutside the object to deselect it.
– For the Columns panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar, click outside the object
to deselect it and save the changes.
6) Double-click again on the object to switch on text edit mode.
7) Type or use copy and paste to enter the required text. Any text entered appears in column
format.
8) If necessary, format the text to the drawing requirements.
9) Click outside the object to deselect it and save the changes.

220 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 230: Text dialog — Text Animation page

Text animation
Note
Text animation is not recommended in a drawing unless the drawing is going to
be displayed as part of a presentation. See the Impress Guide for more
information on text animation.

Creating text animation
1) Right-click on text in a text box, or drawing object and select Text Attributes from thecontext menu to open the Text dialog.
2) Click on Text Animation to open the Text Animation page in the Text dialog(Figure 230).
3) In Effect, select how the text appears during the text animation.
4) In Direction, select which direction the text appears from during animation.
5) In Properties, select Start inside for the text to be visible and inside the drawing object
when applying the animation effect.
6) In Properties, select Text visible when exiting for the text to remain visible after applying
the animation effect.
7) In Animation cycles, select either Continuous, or enter the number of animation cycles forthe animated text.
8) In Increment, select the increment value in Pixels for scrolling the text.
Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 221

9) In Delay, specify Automatic, or enter the time delay to wait before repeating the animation
effect.
10) Click OK to save the changes and close the Text dialog.

Text animation options
EffectSelect the animation effect from the drop-down list to apply to the text in the selecteddrawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect.
Direction
Select a scrolling direction for the animated text.
Properties
Start inside
Text is visible and inside the drawing object when applying the animation effect.
Text visible when exiting
Text remains visible after applying the animation effect.
Animation cycles
Set the looping options for the animation effect.
Continuous
Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the
animation effect, deselect this check box, and enter the number of cycles in theContinuous box.
Increment
Specifies the increment value in the Pixels box for scrolling the text.
Delay
Specifies the amount of time before repeating the animation effect.
Automatic
LibreOffice automatically determines the amount of time before repeating the animation
effect. To manually assign a delay period, unmark this check box, and then enter a timevalue in the Automatic box.

Text callouts
A text callout is a short line of text connected by a line to highlight, or point out a feature of anillustration or drawing. Two types of text callouts (Figure 231) are available –– Callouts forhorizontal text and Vertical Callouts for vertical text. Text callouts in LibreOffice Draw are alegacy from the first versions of LibreOffice and are only available on the Text toolbar.

Note
Custom shape callouts can also be found by selecting Callout Shapes on the
Drawing toolbar, or the Callouts panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar. These
custom shape callouts have the same purpose as text callouts, but have different
options available.

Creating text callouts
1) Click on Callouts for horizontal text, or Vertical Callouts for vertical text on the Text
toolbar.
2) Click in the drawing and drag the cursor to create the callout.
222 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 231: Example of horizontal and vertical text callouts
3) Double click in the callout box to enter text mode.
4) Type the required text, then click in a blank space in the drawing. The callout box adjusts
its size horizontally and/or vertically to fit the text within the callout box.
5) Select the callout and click on the selection handle at the end of the connector line, thendrag the end of the connector line to the required position.
6) With the callout still selected, click on the callout box and drag it to the required position.
7) Click in a blank space in the drawing to deselect the text callout and save the changes.

Editing text callouts
1) Double click in the callout box to enter text mode to edit and format the text. See“Formatting text” on page 211 for more information on text formatting.
2) Click in a blank space on the drawing to save the changes to the text.
3) Select the text callout so that the selection handles are displayed.
4) Right click on the selected text callout and select an option from the context menu tochange the attributes for position, size, line, and area of the text callout. For more
information, see Chapter 3, Working with Objects, and Chapter 4, Changing Object
Attributes.
5) Click on the selection handle at the end of the connector line and drag it to change theposition of the line end or the length of the connector line.
6) Select the text callout and open the Position and Size dialog (Figure 232) using one of thefollowing methods:– Right-click on the selected callout and select Position and Size from the context
menu.
– Go to Format > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F4.

Note
The Callout page in the Position and Size dialog is only available when a text
callout has been selected. It is not available for Callout Shapes that are available
on the Drawing toolbar, or the Callouts panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar.
Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 223

Figure 232: Position and Size dialog — Callout page7) Click Callout to open the formatting options available for text callouts.
8) Select the style of text callout from Straight Line, Angled Line, or Angled Connector
Line.
9) In Spacing, enter the amount of space required between the end of the callout line andthe callout box.
10) In Extension, select from the available options how the callout line from extends thecallout box.
11) If From top, or From left has been selected from the Extension drop-down list, enter adistance value in the By: box to create a space between the start point of the connectorline and the callout box.
12) If Horizontal, or Vertical has been selected from the Extension drop-down list, enter aposition setting from the Position drop-down list to set the position of where theconnector line is attached to the text callout box.
13) In Length, enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box tothe angle point of the connector line.

Note
The Length option is only available if Angled Connector Line is selected as thecallout style and the Optimal check box is not selected.
14) Select Optimal to display the angle point in a connector line at an optimal distance fromthe callout box.
15) Click in a blank space in the drawing to deselect the text callout and save the changes.

Text callout options
Callout Styles
Select the required callout style from the options available.
SpacingEnter the amount of space required between the end of the callout line and the calloutbox.

224 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Extension
Select where and how the callout line extends from the callout box.
LengthEnter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to theinflection point of the line.
Optimal
Select this option to display a single line in the optimum position.

Note
The Length option is only available if Angled connector line is selected as thecallout style and Optimal is not selected.

Tables in Draw
Tables provide information easily and quickly when used in a drawing. Tables can be added
directly to a drawing eliminating the need to embed a Calc spreadsheet, or a Writer text table.
However, it makes sense to embed a spreadsheet into a drawing, especially when greater
functionality is required in the table. The tables provided by Draw do have a limited functionality.

Inserting tables
Tables are placed at the center of a drawing and cannot be placed into objects or shapes. Also,
unlike text boxes and other objects, tables cannot be rotated.

Note
When inserting tables into a drawing, the table is created using the default stylewith settings already applied. Currently these defaults are hard coded in
LibreOffice. The table can be formatted to the drawing requirements after
insertion.

Table dialog
1) Go to Insert > Table on the Menu bar to open the Insert Table dialog (Figure 233).
2) Enter the number of rows and columns required.
3) Click OK to insert the table in the center of a drawing and close the dialog.
4) Move the table into position by clicking on the border and dragging it to its new position.

Figure 233: Insert Table dialog

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 225

Figure 234: Table toolbar

Figure 235: Table grid

Table grid1) Click on Table on the Table toolbar (Figure 234), or Standard toolbar to open the Table
grid (Figure 235).
2) Click and drag the cursor until the required number of columns and rows are selected,3) Click again to insert the table into the center of a drawing and close the Table grid.
4) If necessary, click on More Options to open the Insert Table dialog to select the numberof rows and columns required.
5) Move the table into position by clicking on the border and dragging it to its new position.

Notes
If the Table toolbar is not visible, go to View > Toolbars > Table on the Menu bar.
The Table toolbar is normally docked at the bottom of the Draw window.
The Table grid is only available on the Standard toolbar for computers using a
Windows or Linux operating system.
226 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 236: Table Design panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Table Design panel
Several predefined table designs are provided in the Table Design panel in the Properties deckon the Sidebar (Figure 236). The Table Design panel is only available when a table is selected.

Inserting table designs
1) Insert a table into a drawing or select a table in a drawing.
2) Click on Table Design in the Properties deck on the Sidebar to open the Table Design
panel.
3) Select a design for the table from the available design options.
4) Format the rows and columns using the available options listed below the Table Design
panel.
5) Alternatively, right click on the selected table design and select the format options for therows and columns from the context menu.

Creating table designs
1) Insert a table into a drawing, then select the new table.
2) Click on Table Design in the Properties deck on the Sidebar to open the Table Design
panel, or click on Table Design on the Table toolbar.
3) Click on the plus sign in Table Design panel to create a new design.
4) Make sure the new design is selected, then format the rows and columns from theavailable options listed below the Table Design panel.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 227

5) Alternatively, right click on the new table design and select the format options for the rows
and columns from the context menu.

Table design options
Header row
Selected by default. The first row is normally a header row and is displayed with adifferent background from the rest of the table.
Total row
When selected, changes the background of the last row to make it stand out from otherrows.
Banded rows
Selected by default. Alternate rows have different backgrounds making it easier to readdata entered into the rows.
First column
When selected, highlights the first column of the table using a darker background.
Last column
When selected, highlights the last column of the table using a darker background.
Banded columns
When selected, alternate columns are highlighted with dark and light colors.

Table formatting
Format a selected table using the tools and options available on the Table toolbar, by going toFormat > Table on the Menu bar, or using the options available in the Table Properties dialog.

Table toolbar
The Table toolbar (Figure 234 on page 226) automatically opens when a table is selected
providing tools for creating and formatting a table. The default position for the toolbar is docked at
the bottom of the Draw Workspace.
Table
Inserts a new table in a drawing using the Insert Table dialog or the Table grid. See“Inserting tables” on page 225 for more information on inserting tables.
Border Style
Changes the line style of the borders of selected cells. Click on the triangle▼ next toBorder Style to open a drop-down list and select from a range of predefined styles.
Border Color
Changes the color of the borders of selected cells. Click on the triangle▼ next to Border
Color to access the available LibreOffice color palettes. Select a color from a range ofpredefined palettes or create a custom color.
Borders
Selects a predefined border configuration for the selected table, or cells. Click on thetriangle▼ next to Borders to open a drop-down list to select a border configuration.
Area Style/Filling
Select the cells to be filled, then select the type of fill from the drop-down list: None, Color,
Gradient, Hatching, Bitmap, Pattern, Use Slide Background.
Fill Color
Select a fill option from the drop-down menu. The fill options change to show the fillings
available for each Area Style/Filling type.

228 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 237: Split Cells dialog
Merge Cells
Merges the selected cells into one cell. Note that the contents of the merged cells arealso merged. Alternatively, right-click on selected cells and select Merge Cells from thecontext menu.
Split Cells
Splits a selected cell into multiple cells either horizontally or vertically. Make sure thecursor is positioned on the cell, then click on Split Cells to open the Split Cells dialog(Figure 237).
In Split cells into, select the number of cells required when splitting a cell and whether tosplit the cell Horizontally or Vertically. If necessary, when splitting horizontally, select Intoequal proportions to create cells of equal size. The contents of the split cell are kept in theoriginal cell (left or top cell).
Optimize
Evenly distributes the selected rows and columns in a table either horizontally or
vertically. Clicking on Optimize opens a pop-up toolbar which contains the following tools:
Minimal Row Height
Determines the minimal row height for selected rows. Minimal row height depends onthe font size of the smallest character in the row.
Minimal Column Width
Defines the minimal column width for selected columns. Minimal column width depends
on the shortest entry within a column.
Optimal Row Height
Determines the optimal row height for selected rows. Optimal row height depends onthe font size of the largest character in the row.
Optimal Column Width
Defines the optimal column width for selected columns. Optimal column width depends
on the longest entry within a column.
Distribute Rows Equally
Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in theselection.
Distribute Columns Evenly
Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column inthe selection. The total width of the table cannot exceed the width of the page.
Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 229

Align Top, Center Vertically, Align Bottom
Sets the vertical alignment of text in selected cells.
Insert Row Above, Insert Row Below
Click in a cell or cells to select rows and use these two tools to insert a row or rows above
or below the selected rows. Alternatively, right-click on the selected rows and selectInsert > Insert Row Above or Insert Row Below.
Insert Column Before, Insert Column After
Click in a cell or cells to select columns and use these two tools to insert a column orcolumns before or after the selected columns. Alternatively, right-click on the selectedcolumns and select Insert > Insert Column Before or Insert Column After.
Delete Row, Delete Column, Delete Table
Click in a cell or cells to select rows or columns, then click on a tool to delete the selectedrows or columns. To delete the whole table, place the cursor in a cell and select Delete
Table. Alternatively, right-click on the selected cells and select Delete > Delete Row, orDelete Column, or Delete Table from the context menu.
Select Table, Select Column, Select Row
Select a table, column, or row if the same attributes are going to be applied to a table,column, or row.
Table Design
Clicking on this tool opens the Table Design panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar.
See “Table Design panel” on page 227 for more information.
Table Properties
Clicking on this tool opens the Table Properties dialog. Alternatively, right-click on thetable and select Table Properties from the context menu.

Menu bar
Go to Format > Table on the Menu bar and select a formatting option from the submenu .
Minimal Row Height
Determines the minimal row height for selected rows. Minimal row height depends on the
font size of the smallest character in the row.
Optimal Row Height
Determines the optimal row height for selected rows. Optimal row height depends on the
font size of the largest character in the row.
Distribute Columns Evenly
Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in theselection. The total width of the table cannot exceed the width of the page.
Select Row
Selects the row or rows where cells have been selected in the table.
Insert Rows
Inserts rows in the table where cells have been selected in the table.
Delete Row
Deletes rows in the table where cells have been selected in the table.
Minimal Column Width
Defines the minimal column width for selected columns. Minimal column width depends
on the shortest entry within a column.
Optimal Column Width
Defines the optimal column width for selected columns. Optimal column width depends on
the longest entry within a column.
230 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Distribute Columns Evenly
Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in theselection. The total width of the table cannot exceed the width of the page.
Select Column
Selects the column or columns where cells have been selected in the table.
Insert Columns
Inserts columns in the table where cells have been selected in the table.
Delete Column
Deletes columns in the table where cells have been selected in the table.
Merge Cells
Merges the selected cells into one cell. The contents of the merged cells are also merged.
Alternatively, right-click on selected cells and select Merge Cells from the context menu.
Split Cells
Splits a selected cell into multiple cells either horizontally or vertically. Make sure that the
cursor is positioned on the cell, then click on Split Cells to open the Split Cells dialog.
Delete Table
To delete the whole table, place the cursor in a cell and select Delete Table. Alternatively,
right-click on the selected cells and select Delete Table from the context menu.
Select…
Selects the whole table.
Properties…
Opens the Table Properties dialog.

Figure 238: Table Properties dialog — Font page

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 231

Figure 239: Table Properties dialog — Font Effects page

Table Properties dialog
The Table Properties dialog has five tabbed pages that provide formatting options for Font, Font
Effects, Borders, Background, and Shadow. Open the Table Properties dialog using one of thefollowing methods:• Right-click in a table and select Table Properties from the context menu.
• Go to Format > Table > Properties on the Menu bar.
• Click on Table Properties on the Table toolbar.
The formatting options on each dialog page are as follows:
Font (Figure 238)
Select the required Family, Style, Size, and Language for text in the table. A sample ofthe font selected is displayed in the preview box. See the Writer Guide for more
information on fonts.
Font Effects (Figure 239)
Select the required Font Color, Text Decoration, and Effects for the text in the table. A
sample of the font effects applied to the text is displayed in the preview box. See theWriter Guide for more information on font effects.
Borders (Figure 240)
Select the required Line Arrangement, Line, and Padding for the table and cell borders.
These options are similar to the tools Border Style, Border Color, and Borders on the
Table toolbar. See Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information on the lines
used for table and cell borders.

232 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 240: Table Properties dialog — Borders page

Figure 241: Table Properties dialog — Background page
Background (Figure 241)
Select a background as the area fill for the table and/or selected cells. This dialog page
provides the same functions as Area Style/Filling tools on the Table toolbar. See
Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information on area style and filling used
for table and cell backgrounds.
Shadow (Figure 242)
Adds a shadow to the table. The options adjust the look and position of the shadow. See
Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more information on table shadows.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 233

Figure 242: Table Properties dialog — Shadow page

Figure 243: Position and Size dialog

Table position and size
Tables are placed into boxes when created allowing tables to be formatted as a Draw object.
After selecting the table, use one of the following methods to change table position and size. See“Text boxes” on page 201 and Chapter 3, Working with Objects for more information positioning
and resizing.
• Click on the table border and drag the table to a new position.
• Click and drag on a selection handle to change the table size.
• Open the Position and Size dialog and use the options available on the Position and Size
page (Figure 243). The options available in the Rotation, and Slant & Corner Radius
pages cannot be used for a table.
234 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

After selecting the table, use one of the following methods to open the Position and Size dialog:• Right-click on the table and select Position and Size from the context menu.
• Go to Format > Position and Size on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut F4.

Note
When the size of a table box is changed, the table and cell contents also
increases or decreases in size to match the box size.

Deleting tables
Whole table
Make sure the table is selected and the selection handles are visible on the table border, thendelete the table using one of the following methods:• Go to Format > Table > Delete Table on the Menu bar.
• Select Delete Table on the Table toolbar.
• Right-click on the table and select Delete > Delete Table from the context menu.

Row or column
Click in a table cell to delete the table row or column using one of the following methods. Make
sure the table selection handles are NOT displayed.
• Go to Format > Table > Delete Row, or Delete Column on the Menu bar• Select Delete Row, or Delete Column on the Table toolbar.
• Right-click and select Delete > Delete Row, or Delete Column from the context menu.

Cell contents
Delete cell contents in a table as follows:
1) Select the cell or cells.
2) Press the Delete, or Backspace key on the keyboard.

Using fields
Fields allow for the automatic insertion of text into a drawing and are used when creating
templates and drawing masters. For more information on templates and master drawings, see
Chapter 11, Advanced Drawing Techniques.

Inserting fields
When a field is created, a text box for the field is inserted into the center of a drawing and can berepositioned just like any other text box. See “Text boxes” on page 201 for more information.
1) Go to Insert > Field on the Menu bar and select the type of field required.
2) If necessary, position and resize the field text box.
3) If necessary, format the text used for the field information. See “Formatting text” onpage 211 for more information.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 235

Field types
Date (fixed)
Inserts the current date into a drawing as a fixed field. The date is not automatically
updated. Available date formats depend on the language setting in Tools > Options >Language Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Language
Settings > Language). Right-click on the date field and select the required date format
from the context menu.
Date (variable)
Inserts the current date into a drawing as a variable field. The date is automatically
updated each time the file is opened. Available date formats depend on the language
setting in Tools > Options > Language Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > Language Settings > Language). Right-click on the date field and selectthe required date format from the context menu.
Time (fixed)
Inserts the current time into a drawing as a fixed field. The time is not automatically
updated. Available time formats depend on the language setting in Tools > Options >Language Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Language
Settings > Language). Right-click on the time field and select the required time format
from the context menu.
Time (variable)
Inserts the current time into a drawing as a variable field. The time is automatically
updated each time the file is opened. Available time formats depend on the language
setting in Tools > Options > Language Settings > Language (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > Language Settings > Language). Right-click on the time field and selectthe required time format from the context menu.
AuthorInserts the first and last names of the author of the drawing. This information is taken fromvalues entered in the LibreOffice user data. To modify this information go to Tools >Options > LibreOffice > User Data (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice >User Data).
Page Number
Inserts the page number into the current drawing. Alternatively, go to Insert > Page
Number on the Menu bar. If a page number is to be added to every page in the drawing,
go to View > Master on the Menu bar and insert the page number field.
Page Title
Inserts the page title. The default name is Page # if the page has not been renamed.
Page Count
Inserts the total number of pages in a drawing.
File Name
Inserts the name of the file used for the drawing. The file name only appears after the filehas been saved.

Using hyperlinks
When inserting text that can be used as a hyperlink (for example, a website address or URL),
Draw formats it automatically, creates the hyperlink, and applies color and underlining. There fourtypes of hyperlinks and each hyperlink type requires a different procedure when inserting a
hyperlink.

236 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Tips
To prevent LibreOffice from automatically turning website addresses, or URLs into
hyperlinks, go to Tools > AutoCorrect Options > Options on the Menu bar anddeselect URL Recognition.
To change the color of hyperlinks, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice >Application Colors, scroll to Unvisited links and/or Visited links, select thecheckboxes, then select new colors from the color palettes for the links and click
OK. Note this color change changes the color for all hyperlinks across all
LibreOffice modules.

Figure 244: Hyperlink dialog — Internet page

Internet hyperlink
1) Click in the text box at the required position for the hyperlink.
2) Go to Insert > Hyperlink on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+K(macOS ⌘+K) to open the Hyperlink dialog.
3) Select Internet to open the Internet page of the Hyperlink dialog (Figure 244).
4) In Protocol, select either Web, or FTP.
5) In the URL text box, enter the required web address for the hyperlink.
6) In the Name text box, enter a name for the hyperlink.
7) If necessary, enter the details required for Further Settings. See “Further Settings” onpage 240 for more information.
8) Click Apply to insert the hyperlink and save the selections. If several hyperlinks are being
created, click Apply after inserting each hyperlink.
9) Click OK to close the Hyperlink dialog.
Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 237

Figure 245: Hyperlink dialog — Mail page

Mail hyperlink
1) Click in the text box at the required position for the hyperlink.
2) Go to Insert > Hyperlink on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+K(macOS ⌘+K) to open the Hyperlink dialog.
3) Select Mail to open the Mail page of the Hyperlink dialog (Figure 245).
4) In Recipient text box, enter the email details of the recipient.
5) In the Subject text box, enter a subject title.
6) If necessary, click on Data Sources to open a data source browser, then drag the email
data field for the receiver from the data source browser into the Recipient text box.
7) If necessary, enter the details required for Further Settings. See “Further Settings” onpage 240 for more information.
8) Click Apply to insert the hyperlink and save the selections. If several hyperlinks are being
created, click Apply after inserting each hyperlink.
9) Click OK to close the Hyperlink dialog.

Document hyperlink
Creates a hyperlink to another document or to another place in a document, commonly referred
to as a bookmark.
1) Click in the text box at the required position for the hyperlink.
2) Go to Insert > Hyperlink on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+K(macOS ⌘+K) to open the Hyperlink dialog.
3) Select Document to open the Document page of the Hyperlink dialog (Figure 246).

238 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 246: Hyperlink dialog — Document page

Note
Leave Path blank if the link is to a target in the same drawing.
4) In the Path text box, enter the file path for the document.
5) Alternatively, click on Open File to open a file browser and select the file as a target for
the hyperlink.
6) Optionally, to specify a target in a specific drawing, click on Target in Document to open
a dialog to select a target. However, if the name of the target is known, type it into theTarget text box.
7) If necessary, enter the details required for Further Settings. See “Further Settings” onpage 240 for more information.
8) Click Apply to insert the hyperlink and save the selections. If several hyperlinks are being
created, click Apply after inserting each hyperlink.
9) Click OK to close the Hyperlink dialog.

New Document hyperlink
Creates a new document and a hyperlink to the new document.
1) Click in the text box at the required position for the hyperlink.
2) Go to Insert > Hyperlink on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+K(macOS ⌘+K) to open the Hyperlink dialog.
3) Select New Document to open the New Document page of the Hyperlink dialog(Figure 247).
4) In New Document select Edit now to edit the newly created document immediately, or
Edit later to only create the hyperlink.
Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 239

Figure 247: Hyperlink dialog — New Document page5) Select the type of document to create from the File type drop-down list.
6) Click on Select path to open a file browser and navigate to the folder where the new
document is going to be saved7) Select the folder and click on Open. The selected folder appears in the File text box.
8) If necessary, enter the details required for Further Settings. See “Further Settings” onpage 240 for more information.
9) Click Apply to insert the hyperlink and save the selections. If several hyperlinks are being
created, click Apply after inserting each hyperlink.
10) Click OK to close the Hyperlink dialog.

Further Settings
The Further Settings section in the Hyperlink dialog is common to all hyperlink types, althoughsome options are more relevant to specific types of links.
FrameEnter a name for the frame in the Frame text box that the linked file opens in, or select apredefined frame from the list. If the Frame text box is empty, the linked file opens in thecurrent browser window.
Form
Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text, or as a button.
Text
Specifies the visible text, or button caption for the hyperlink.
Name
Applicable to HTML documents. It specifies the text added as a NAME attribute in theHTML code behind the hyperlink.

240 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Editing text hyperlinks
1) Select the hyperlink.
2) Right-click on the hyperlink and select Edit Hyperlink from the context menu to open theHyperlink dialog.
3) Make editing changes using the available options.
4) Click Apply to insert the hyperlink and save the selections. If several hyperlinks are being
created, click Apply after inserting each hyperlink.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Hyperlink dialog.

Note
DO NOT click directly on the hyperlink text when editing or formatting hyperlinks.
Clicking on the hyperlink text opens the hyperlink.

Formatting hyperlinks
A hyperlink is inserted in the centre of the current slide. To edit the text, the size of a hyperlink
text box, or to reposition the hyperlink on the slide:1) Click and drag a selection marquee over the hyperlink text to display a text box borderand selection handles.
2) Right-click on the selected hyperlink and select the type of formatting required from theoptions available in the context menu.
3) To reposition hyperlink, click and drag on the text border to move the hyperlink on theslide.
4) Select Position and Size from the context menu, or use the F4 key to open the Position
and Size dialog. Options can be selected to move the hyperlink, or resize the text box.

Image maps
An image map defines areas of an image (called hotspots) associated with a URL (a web
address or a file on the computer). Hotspots are the graphic equivalent of text hyperlinks. In
Draw, clicking on a hotspot opens the linked page in the appropriate program (for example,
default browser for HTML pages; LibreOffice Writer for ODT files; PDF viewer for PDF files).
Hotspots can be created in various shapes, such as rectangles, ellipses, and polygons, andinclude several hotspots in the same image. When a hotspot is clicked on, the URL opens in abrowser window or frame that has been specified. The text that appears when the cursor hovers
over a hotspot can also be specified.

Creating image maps
1) Select an image in a drawing to use as a hotspot.
2) Go to Tools > ImageMap on the Menu bar to open the Image Map Editor dialog(Figure 248). The main part of the dialog shows the selected image where hotspots will
be defined.
3) Select the type of hotspot area required from the icons at the top of the Image Map Editor
dialog from the options Rectangle, Ellipse, Polygon, or Freeform Polygon.
4) Draw the hotspot area onto the selected image.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 241

Figure 248: Image Map Editor dialog
5) Enter the hyperlink address for the hotspot in the Address text box using the addressformat: file:///<path>/document_name#anchor_name.
6) Click on Apply to apply the settings.
7) Click on Save to save the image map to a file.
8) Click on Close the Image Map Editor dialog.

Image map tools
Apply
Applies the changes.
Open
Loads into the Image Map Editor an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA
or SIP StarView image map file format.
Save
Saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA, or SIP StarView image map fileformat.
SelectSelects a hotspot in the image map for editing.
Rectangle, Ellipse, Polygon, Freeform Polygon
Draws a hotspot on the selected image in the shape selected.
Edit Points
Change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing the anchor points.
Move Points
Move the individual anchor points of the selected hotspot.

242 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Insert Points
Adds an anchor point at the selected point on the outline of the hotspot.
Delete Points
Deletes a selected anchor point.
Undo
Cancels the previous action.
Redo
Reapplies the previous cancelled action.
ActiveToggles the status of a selected hotspot between active and inactive.
Macro
Assign a macro that runs when the hotspot is clicked on.
Properties
Define the properties of the selected hotspot.
Address
Enter the URL for the file that opens when the selected hotspot is clicked on. The addressformat to be used: file:///<path>/document_name#anchor_name.
Text
Enter the text that is displayed when the cursor rests on the hotspot . If no text is entered,
the Address is displayed.
FrameEnter the name of the target frame for the hotspot. Standard frame name can be selectedfrom the drop-down list and used instead.
_blankOpens in a new browser window.
_self
Default selection and opens in the current window.
_top
File opens in the topmost frame in the hierarchy.
_parent
File opens in the parent frame of the current frame. If there is no parent frame, thecurrent frame is used.
Graphic view
Displays the image map so that the hotspots can be selected and edited.

Note
The value _self for the target frame will work on the vast majority of theoccasions. It is not recommended to use the other values, if available, unlessabsolutely necessary.

Fontwork
Using Fontwork creates graphical text as objects in a drawing. Different settings for Fontwork(line, area, position, size, and more) are available to match the requirements of a drawing.
Fontwork is also available with the Writer, Calc, and Impress modules of LibreOffice, but there
are small differences in the way that each LibreOffice module displays Fontwork.
Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 243

Figure 249: Fontwork Gallery dialog

Figure 250: Example of creating Fontwork text

Creating Fontwork
1) Go to Insert > Fontwork on the Menu bar to open the Fontwork Gallery dialog(Figure 249).
2) Select a Fontwork style from the dialog.
3) Double click on the selected Fontwork object, or select OK. This closes the Fontwork
Gallery dialog and the selected Fontwork object appears in the center of the drawing.
4) Double-click on the Fontwork object to switch on editing mode. The Fontwork text
appears in the center of the image in text edit mode, as shown by the example in
Figure 250.
244 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 251: Fontwork toolbar

Figure 252: Fontwork Shape sub-toolbar
5) Highlight all of the black text to select, then type in the required text. to replace thehighlighted black text.
6) Press the Esc key, or click outside the selected area to apply the change and the text
appears as a Fontwork object in the center of the drawing.
7) If necessary reposition and resize the Fontwork object to the drawing requirements. See
Chapter 3, Working With Objects and Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes for more
information.

Fontwork toolbar
The Fontwork toolbar (Figure 251) becomes visible and active on the Workspace when a
Fontwork object is selected. If the toolbar is not visible, go to View > Toolbars > Fontwork on
the Menu bar. The following tools are available for editing a Fontwork object.
Insert Fontwork Text
Opens the Fontwork Gallery dialog.
Fontwork Shape
Changes the shape of the selected object. Click on Fontwork Shape to open a pop-up
toolbar and select a Fontwork shape for the available options. The shapes are shown in
the Fontwork Shape floating sub-toolbar (Figure 252).
Fontwork Same Letter Heights
Changes the height of characters in the selected Fontwork object. Toggles between
normal height where the characters have different heights to where all characters havethe same height.
Fontwork Alignment
Specifies the text alignment within the frame. Options available are Left Align, Center,
Right Align, Word Justify, and Stretch Justify.
Fontwork Character Spacing
Selects the spacing between characters and whether kerning pairs should be used.
Options available are Very Tight, Tight, Normal, Loose, Very Loose, and Custom. For
Custom spacing, input a percentage value: 100% is normal character spacing, less than
100% character spacing is tighter, and more than 100% character spacing is looser.
Toggle Extrusion
Converts the Fontwork object into a 3D shape using extrusion. See Chapter 7, 3D
Objects for more information.

Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text | 245

Modifying Fontwork
A Fontwork object is treated like any other object in Draw. It can be resized, rotated, skewed,
slanted, flipped, and so on. For more information on modifying a Fontwork object, see Chapter 3,
Working With Objects, Chapter 4, Changing Object Attributes, and Chapter 5, Combining Multiple
Objects.
Fontwork consists of text, but only minimal text formatting options can be used with Fontwork
text, for example font type, font size, Bold, or Italic.
Some of Fontwork shapes can be modified and this is indicated by a dot appearing on a selectedshape. For example, change angles of a trapezoid, or parallelogram basic shapes by moving thedot displayed along with the selection handles.

246 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Draw Guide 7.5

Chapter 10,
Printing, Exporting andEmailing

Introduction
The procedures for printing, exporting and emailing drawings from LibreOffice Draw are
examples only. Actual procedures do depend on the following:• Type of computer.
• Computer operating system and software application being used.
• Type of printer connected to the computer.
• How the printer is connected to the computer.

Note
Due to the several ways a computer can be setup, the print dialog that opens may
differ from the dialogs shown in this chapter.

Default printer setup
Before printing any drawings from LibreOffice Draw, it is recommended to setup a default printer.
An example printer setup procedure for LibreOffice Draw is as follows:
1) Go to File > Printer Settings on the Menu bar to open the Printer Setup dialog. An
example Printer Setup dialog is shown in Figure 253.
2) Select the required printer from the printers listed in the Name drop-down list.
3) If necessary, click on Properties in the Printer Setup dialog to open a properties dialog
for the selected printer and select the options required for paper and the printer.
4) Click OK to save the printer selection and close the Printer Setup dialog.

Quick printing
To quickly print a document or drawing, without changing any print settings that are alreadyselected, click on Print Directly on the Standard toolbar (Figure 254). Print Directly sends theentire document to the default printer defined for the computer. If Print Directly is not visible on
the Standard toolbar, it is added to the toolbar as follows:
1) Right-click in an empty area on the Standard toolbar and select Visible Buttons from thecontext menu.

Figure 253: Example of Printer Setup dialog

248 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 254: Standard toolbar with Print Directly installed
2) Select Print Directly from the list of available tools and the Print Directly tool is added to
the Standard toolbar (highlighted in Figure 254).

Notes
The options selected in the Print dialog only apply to the printing of the current
document open in Draw. To specify default print settings for LibreOffice, go toTools > Options > LibreOffice > Print (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >LibreOffice > Print) on the Menu bar to open the Options LibreOffice Print
dialog.
Any print options selected in the Print dialog when printing from Draw overrides
the default printer settings that have been set using Tools > Options >LibreOffice > Print (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice > Print)
and Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Print (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > LibreOffice Draw > Print).

Linux or Windows printing
For more control over printing when using Linux or Windows operating system, open the Print
dialog (Figure 255) using one of the following methods.
• Go to File > Print on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+P.
• Click on Print on the Standard toolbar.

General options
The following options are an example of what may be available on the General page of the Print
dialog in Windows/Linux (Figure 255).
Printer
Select the printer to use from the printers available in the drop-down list.
Status:Indicates if the selected printer is the default printer.
Properties
Click on Properties to open the properties dialog for the printer being used. The
options available in this dialog depends on the type of printer connected to thecomputer and the computer operating system being used.
Range and Copies
All Pages
Prints all the pages in the document.
Selection
Prints the pages selected in LibreOffice Draw.

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 249

Figure 255: Example of Print dialog — General page — Windows/Linux
Pages
Select the page number(s) to print. For multiple pages, use the format 1, 3, 7 or 1 – 5,7, 9 for page number selection.
IncludeSelect from the drop-down list Odd and Even Pages, Odd Pages, or Even Pages.
More > Paper sides
Select from the drop-down list Print on one side (simplex), Print on both sides (duplex
long edge), or Print on both sides (duplex short edge).
More > Number of copies
Enter number of printed copies required for the document.
More > Collate
Collates multiple printed copies into separate documents.

250 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

More > Order
Select from Create separate print jobs for collated output (only available when morethan one copy is being printed), or Print reverse order.
Page Layout
Paper size
Select the paper size to use from drop-down list.
Orientation
Select from the drop-down list Automatic, Portrait, or Landscape.
More > Pages per sheet
Select from the drop-down list how many pages are printed on one sheet of paper.
More > Order
Select from the drop-down list the printing order of multiple pages on one sheet ofpaper.
More > Draw a border around each page
When multiple pages are printed on one sheet of paper, a border is drawn around each
page.
More > Brochure
Prints the document so the pages can be folded into a brochure or booklet.

LibreOffice Draw options
The following options are an example of what may be available on the LibreOffice Draw page of
the Print dialog in Windows/Linux (Figure 256) for the current drawing being printed:
Contents
When selected prints the Page name and/or Date and time on the drawing.
Color
Prints the drawing in Original colors, Grayscale, or Black & white.

Figure 256: Example of Print dialog — LibreOffice Draw page — Windows/Linux

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 251

SizePrint the drawing using one of the following options:
Original size
Prints the drawing using its original size.
Fit to printable page
Drawing size is changed so that it fits on the paper size used for printing.
Distribute on multiple sheets of paper
Used if the drawing is too large for the paper size being used.
Tile sheet of paper with repeated pages
Used to print multiple copies of a drawing on a page.

macOS printing
For more control over printing using macOS, open and use the Print dialog (Figure 257) using
one of the following methods.
• Go to File > Print on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut ⌘+P.
• Click on Print on the Standard toolbar.

General printing options
The following options are an example of what may be available on the General page of the Print
dialog in macOS (Figure 257).
Printer
Select the printer to be used from the drop-down list. If the default printer is being used,then this printer will already be selected.
Presets
Select from the drop-down list a printing preset. The presets available depend on the typeof printer connected to the computer. This also includes any custom presets that havebeen created.
CopiesEnter the number of copies to be printed.
Pages
All
Prints all the pages in the document.
Range from
Select a range of page number(s) to print.
Selection
Select the pages to print from the Pages pane.
Print in Color
Select this option to print the drawing in color if the printer selected is capable of color
printing. Deselect this option to print the drawing in monochrome.
Double-sided
Select this option to print the drawing double sided if the printer selected is capable ofdouble sided printing.

252 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 257: Example of Print dialog — General page — macOSOn
When selected, prints the drawing pages double-sided using long edge binding.
On (Short)
When selected, prints the drawing pages double-sided using short edge binding.
Media & Quality
Click on this option to open a drop-list down with the following options for media andquality.
Feed from
Select from the drop-down list the paper tray to use if the printer has more than one
paper tray.

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 253

Media Type
Select from the drop-down list the paper type that has been loaded into the paper tray
being used, for example Envelope, Photo, Plain Paper.
Quality
Select the level of printing quality required.
LayoutClick on this option to open a drop-list down with the following options for the document
printing layout.
Pages per sheet
Select from the drop-down list how many pages are printed on one sheet of paper.
Layout Direction
Select the printing order of multiple pages on one sheet of paper.
BorderWhen multiple pages are printed on one sheet of paper, a border is drawn around eachpage.
Reverse page orientation
If LibreOffice prints the pages in the wrong order, select this option and print the
document again.
Flip horizontally
If LibreOffice prints the pages in the wrong orientation, select this option and print the
document again.
Paper Handling
Click on this option to open a drop-list with the following options for paper handling whenprinting multiple page documents.
Collate Sheets
When selected collates multiple printed copies into separate documents.
Pages to Print
Select which pages in the document to print from the drop-down list: All pages; Odd
only; Even only.
Page Order
Select the page printing order from the drop-down list: Automatic; Normal; Reverse.
Scale to fit paper size
Adjusts the printed page to fit the paper size.
Destination Paper Size
Select a paper size from the options available in the drop-down list. Only available if
Scale to fit paper size has been selected.
Scale Down Only
Scales down the drawing to fit the page size. Only available if the selected page size issmaller than the drawing size.
WatermarkProvides options to print watermark text on the drawing pages, for example Confidential if
the document is of a sensitive nature.

LibreOffice Draw printing
Click on LibreOffice to open the printing options available for LibreOffice Draw (Figure 258).
Print selection only
Prints the selected pages in Pages pane.
254 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 258: Example of Print dialog — LibreOffice Draw page — macOS
Contents
Prints the Page name and/or Date and time on the drawing.
Color
Prints the drawing in Original colors, Grayscale, or Black & white.
Size
Prints the drawing using one of the following options:
Original size
Prints the drawing using its original size.
Fit to printable page
Drawing size is changed so that it fits on the paper size used for printing.

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 255

Distribute on multiple sheets of paper
Used if the drawing is too large for the paper size being used.
Tile sheet of paper with repeated pages
Used to print multiple copies of a drawing on a page.

LibreOffice Draw More options
To access more printing options in LibreOffice Draw, click on More to open the More page formore LibreOffice Draw options (Figure 259).
Brochure
When selected, prints the document so the pages can be folded into a brochure or
booklet.

Figure 259: Example of Print dialog — LibreOffice Draw More page — macOS256 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Include
Select which pages to print from the drop-down list: All pages; Front sides/right pages;
Back sides/left pages. Only available when Brochure is selected.
Use only paper tray from printer preferences
When selected, the printer tray selected on the printer overrides the selected tray in theprinter properties on the computer.
All Pages
All the slides in the slide show are printed.
Pages
Enter the page number(s) in the text box that are to be printed. For multiple pages, use
the format 1, 3, 7 or 1 — 5, 7, 9 for page number selection.
Selection
Prints the pages selected in the Pages pane.

Printing examples
The following printing instructions are examples only. Actual printing method may differ fromthese examples because printing depends on computer operating system, computer setup, andthe printer being used. For more information on printing, see “Linux or Windows printing” onpage 249, or “macOS printing” on page 252, and see the Writer Guide.

Multiple pages on a single sheet
1) Open the Print dialog.
2) Select the printer to use if more than one printer is connected to the computer.
3) In Page Layout, select the number of pages to print per sheet of paper from the Pages
per sheet drop-down list. The preview panel on the right shows how the pages will look ona printed sheet of paper.
4) In Page Layout, select how the multiple pages are printed on the sheet of paper from theOrder drop-down list.
5) If necessary, select Draw a border around each page to distinguish each page printed ona sheet of paper.
6) Click OK to print the document and close the Print dialog.

Individual page1) Open the Print dialog,.
2) Select the printer to use if more than one printer is connected to the computer.
3) In Ranges and Copies, select Pages and enter the page number of the page to print.
4) Click OK to print the individual pages and close the Print dialog.

Range of pages
1) Open the Print dialog.
2) Select the printer to use if more than one printer is connected to the computer.
3) In Ranges and Copies, select Pages and enter the page numbers of the pages to print
using the format, for example, 1,3,7 or 2–5,7,9 for page number selection.
4) Click OK to print the pages and close the Print dialog.
Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 257

Selection printing
1) Select the pages in the Pages panel in LibreOffice Draw.
2) Open the Print dialog.
3) Select the printer to use if more than one printer is connected to the computer.
4) In Ranges and Copies, select Selection and then select Odd and Even Pages, Even
Pages, or Odd Pages from the drop-down list.
5) Click OK to print the pages and close the Print dialog.

Brochure printing
In Writer, Impress, and Draw, a document can be printed as a brochure (also known as booklet
printing). The pages are arranged so that when the printed pages are folded in half, the pages
are in the correct order to form a brochure or booklet.

Tip
Plan the document to make it look good when printed as a brochure. Choose
appropriate margins, font sizes, and so on as the pages are normally printed at
half size on a sheet of paper. Experiment to get the best document format tomatch the capabilities of the printer being used.

Simplex printer1) Open the Print dialog.
2) Select the printer to use if more than one printer is connected to the computer.
3) In Printer, click Properties to open the properties dialog for the selected printer.
4) Make sure the printer is set to the same orientation (portrait or landscape) as specified in
the page setup for the document. Usually the orientation does not matter, but it does forbrochures.
5) Click OK to close the properties dialog and return to the Print dialog.
6) In Page Layout, select More, then select the Brochure option.
7) In Range and Copies, select Even pages, or Odd pages from the Selection drop-down
list.
8) Click OK to print the even or odd pages.
9) Take the printed pages out of the printer and put back into the printer in the correctorientation to print on the blank side. This may require some testing to find out what thecorrect arrangement is for the selected printer.
10) If Even Pages was selected, now select Odd Pages in Range and Copies. If Odd Pages
was selected, now select Even Pages in Range and Copies.
11) Click OK to finish printing the document as a brochure and close the Print dialog.
12) Make sure the printed pages create a brochure when all the pages are placed in thecorrect order.

Duplex printer1) Open the Print dialog.
2) Select the printer to use if more than one printer is connected to the computer.
3) In Printer, click Properties to open the properties dialog for the selected printer.
258 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

4) Make sure the printer is set to the same orientation (portrait or landscape) as specified in
the page setup for the document. Usually the orientation does not matter, but it does forbrochures.
5) Click OK to close the properties dialog and return to the Print dialog.
6) In Range and Copies, select More, then select Print on both sides (duplex long edge)
from the Paper sides drop-down list. Actual options available for duplex printing dependon the printer model and the computer system being used.
7) In Page Layout, Select More, then select the Brochure option.
8) In Range and Copies, select the All Pages option.
9) Click OK to print the document as a brochure and close the Print dialog.

Black and white or grayscale printing
Printer settings
The following example procedure explains how to print documents in black and white orgrayscale on a color printer:1) Open the Print dialog.
2) Select the printer to use if more than one printer is connected to the computer.
3) Click on LibreOffice Draw to open the printing options page for LibreOffice Draw.
4) In Color, select Grayscale, or Black & white.
5) Click OK to print the document and close the Print dialog.

Note
Some color printers may only allow printing in color regardless of the settings
selected. More details can be found in the information that came with the selected
printer.

Tip
Grayscale is the best option for printing any colored text or graphics in adocument on a monochrome printer. Colors printed in shades of gray give moredetail. When printing color in black and white some of this detail maybe lost.

Figure 260: Options LibreOffice Draw Print dialog

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 259

LibreOffice settings
To change the LibreOffice settings to print all colored text and graphics as grayscale, or black
and white:
1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > Print (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences> LibreOffice Draw > Print) on the Menu bar to open the Options LibreOffice Draw Print
dialog (Figure 260).
2) In Quality, select either the option Grayscale, or Black & white.
3) Click OK to save the change and close the Options LibreOffice Draw Print dialog.
4) Print the document using one of the above procedures and the document is printed asgrayscale, or black and white.

Exporting
PDF format
LibreOffice can export documents as a PDF (Portable Document Format) file. This commonly
accepted standard of file format is ideal for sending a file to be viewed on another computer
using PDF viewing software.

Directly as PDF
Export the entire document using default PDF settings as follows:
1) Click on Export Directly as PDF on the Standard toolbar, or go to File > Export As >Export Directly as PDF on the Menu bar.
2) Enter a file name and location for the PDF file and click on Save to export the file as PDF.

Note
Note that page range, image compression, or other printing options are notavailable when creating a PDF file using this method.

Controlling PDF content and quality
For more control over the content and quality of the resulting PDF, use the options available in
the PDF Options dialog (Figure 261). For more information on available options, see the Getting
Started Guide.
1) Go to File > Export As > Export as PDF on the Menu bar to open the PDF Options
dialog.
2) Select the required options available in the available pages in the PDF Options dialog.
3) Click on Export and a file browser window opens.
4) Navigate to the required location and enter a file name for the PDF being created.
5) Click on Save to export the file as PDF. The file browser window and the PDF Options
dialog close.

Other formats
LibreOffice can export files in various formats, which are listed in the drop-down list of the filebrowser window. For more information on exporting graphics, see Chapter 6, Editing Pictures.
1) Go to File > Export on the Menu bar to open a file browser window.
2) Navigate to the directory where the drawing is going to be saved.
260 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 261: PDF Options dialog — General page3) Specify a file name for the exported drawing in the Name text box.
4) Select the required file format from the drop-down list.
5) Click on Save to save the file and close the file browser window.

Note
The content of the exported file depends on the elements selected on thedrawing. If no elements are selected, the complete drawing file is exported.

Web pages (HTML) export
Drawing files can be exported as a series of web pages (HTML format) that can be viewed in any
browser.
1) Make sure the Draw file is open in Draw.
2) Create a folder to contain the HTML pages that are generated and this folder will beselected as the destination for the HTML pages.
3) Go to File > Export on the menu bar to open a file browser window and navigate to thefolder where the HTML version of the presentation is going to be saved.
4) Enter a name for the HTML file in the Name text box at the top of the file browser window.
5) At the bottom of the file browser, select HTML Document (Impress) (.html; .htm) format
from the drop-down list.
6) Click on Save and the HTML Export dialog opens at the Assign Design page (Figure 262).
7) Select a design for all of the HTML pages, either from an existing design, or by creating a
new design. If there is no previously saved design available, the Existing design option is
not available.

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 261

Figure 262: HTML Export dialog — Assign Design page

Figure 263: HTML Export dialog — Publication Type page8) Click on Next to select the publication type to use for creating the web pages, as shownin Figure 263. The available options change depending on publication type selected.
– Standard HTML format — one page for each slide with navigation links to move fromslide to slide.
– Standard HTML with frames — one page with a navigation bar on the left-hand sideand uses slide title as navigation links. Click on links to display pages in right-handside.
– Single-document HTML — creates one HTML document from the slide show.
– Automatic — one page for each slide with each page set with the refresh meta tag
so a browser automatically cycles from one page to the next.
– WebCast — generates an ASP or Perl application to display the slides. Currently,
LibreOffice has no direct support for PHP.

262 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 264: HTML Export dialog — Save Images As page

Figure 265: HTML Export dialog — Title page9) Click on Next to select the format for saving images (PNG, GIF or JPG) from the options
available in Save Images As (Figure 264).
10) In Quality, enter a percentage value for the images being saved. Only available if JPG
format has been selected.
11) In Monitor Resolution, select the type of resolution from the options available. Whenselecting a monitor resolution, consider what type of display users may have. For
example, if high resolution is selected, then users with a medium-resolution display haveto scroll sideways to see the entire HTML page.
12) In Effects, select whether sounds and/or hidden slides are exported.
13) Click on Next and enter the necessary details for a title page (Figure 265). This page
does not display if the Create title page option was NOT selected when selecting
Publication Type.
14) Click on Next to select the style of navigation buttons to use when moving from one page
to another from the options available in Select Button Style (Figure 266). If buttons are
not being used, make sure Text only is selected.

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 263

Figure 266: HTML Export dialog — Button Style page

Figure 267: HTML Export dialog — Color Scheme page15) Click on Next to select the color scheme for the web pages from the options available in
Select Color Scheme (Figure 267). Available schemes include the existing scheme forthe drawing, one based upon browser colors, and a user-defined scheme. A new scheme
can be saved so that it appears on the first page of the HTML export wizard.
16) Click on Create to generate the HTML files. If this is a new design, a dialog opens to savethe design for future use.

Emailing documents
LibreOffice provides several ways to send documents quickly and easily as an email attachment
in ODF format (LibreOffice default format), or as a PDF. For more information on emailingdocuments, see the Getting Started Guide.

264 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Open Document format
To email the current document in ODF format:
1) Go to File > Send > Email Document on the Menu bar. LibreOffice opens the default
email program with the document attached to a new email.
2) In the email program, enter the recipient, subject, and message, then send the email.

PDF format
To email the current document as a PDF file:
1) Go to File > Send > E-mail as PDF on the Menu bar. and the PDF Options dialog(Figure 261 on page 261) opens.
2) Create a PDF file of the drawing using the options available in the PDF Options dialog,
see “PDF format” on page 260 for more information. The default email application openswith the PDF file attached to a new email.
3) In the email application, enter the recipient, subject, and message, then send the email.

Digital signatures
A digital signature is a mathematical scheme for verifying the authenticity of digital versions ofdrawings or documents.
Signing a drawing digitally, a personal key or certificate is required. This personal key, stored on
the computer, uses a combination of a private key, which must be kept secret, and a public key.
These keys are added to a drawing when a digital signature is applied. A certificate is obtained
from a certification authority, which may be a private company or a government institution.
Applying a digital signature to a drawing, a checksum is computed from the drawing content plus
the personal key being used. The checksum and public key are stored together with the drawing.
Opening the drawing on another computer with a recent version of LibreOffice, the program
computes the checksum again and compares it with the stored checksum. If both checksums are
the same, the program opens the original, unchanged drawing.
Also, the program can display the public key information from the certificate. This information iscompared with the public key that is published on the web site of the certificate authority.
Whenever the drawing is changed, this change breaks the digital signature.
For a more detailed description of how to obtain, use and manage a certificate and signaturevalidation, see the Getting Started Guide and Applying Digital Signatures in the LibreOffice
Help (https://help.libreoffice.org/7.1/en-US/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.html?
&DbPAR=WRITER&System=UNIX).

Removing personal data
It maybe necessary to remove any personal data, versions, notes, hidden information, or
recorded change from drawings before being distributed, or PDFs files created.

Setting security and warning options
1) In Tools > Options > LibreOffice > Security (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >LibreOffice > Security), to open Options LibreOffice Security dialog (Figure 268).
2) Click on Options to open the Security Options and Warnings dialog (Figure 269).

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 265

Figure 268: Options LibreOffice Security dialog

Figure 269: Security Options and Warnings dialog
3) Select the required options to allow LibreOffice to warn when drawings contain certain
information and/or automatically remove personal information on saving.
4) Click OK to close the Security Options and Warnings dialog and save the selected
options.
5) Click OK to close the Options LibreOffice Security dialog.

Removing personal data and drawing information
1) Open the drawing file and go to File > Properties on the Menu bar to open the Properties
dialog (Figure 270).
2) Make sure the General page is selected and deselect the option Apply user data.
3) Click on Reset Properties to change the following file properties:– Remove any information in the created and modified fields.
– Delete the modification and printing dates.
– Reset the editing time to zero.

266 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 270: Properties dialog– Reset the creation date to the current date and time.
– Reset the version number to 1.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog.

Removing version information
To remove any version information from a drawing, use one of the following methods:• Go to File > Versions on the Menu bar to open a properties dialog for the drawing, thenselect the versions from the Existing Versions list for deletion and click Delete. The
dialog automatically closes.
• Go to File > Save As on the Menu bar and save the drawing with a different name.

Redaction
Documents are redacted to remove or hide any sensitive information. Redaction allows theselective disclosure of information in a document while keeping other parts of the document
secret.
When a redacted document is exported to a new document, any redacted portions are removed
and replaced by redaction blocks of pixels. This prevents any attempt to restore or copy theoriginal contents. A redacted document is often exported in PDF format for publication, or
sharing.
Any documents that are redacted in LibreOffice Writer, Calc, or Impress are automaticallytransferred as a copy to LibreOffice Draw where the redaction is carried out.

Documents, spreadsheets, or presentations
1) Open the document to be redacted in LibreOffice Writer, Calc or Impress, then go toTools > Redact on the Menu bar and the following happens:

Chapter 10, Printing, Exporting and Emailing | 267

Figure 271: Redaction toolbar– The document is copied, prepared and transferred to LibreOffice Draw as an untitledfile.
– LibreOffice Draw opens with the untitled document displayed.
– The Redaction toolbar (Figure 271) automatically opens. If the Redaction toolbar is
not displayed, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar in LibreOffice Draw and selectRedaction.
2) Go to Tools > Redact on the Menu bar and select either Rectangle or Freeform, or click
on Rectangle Redaction or Freeform Redaction in the Redaction toolbar.
3) Draw the required shapes to redact the sensitive areas in the document. The redaction
shape is gray allowing the sensitive areas in the document to be visible before they are
redacted.
4) If necessary, click on Export Preview PDF to create a PDF copy of the document, thensave as a PDF file. Any sensitive information in the redacted areas can then be reviewed
before redaction is finalized.
5) If necessary, delete the PDF copy after reviewing the redaction areas in the file.
6) Go to Tools > Redact on the Menu bar and select either Redacted Export (White), or
Redacted Export (Black), or click on Redacted Export (White), or Redacted Export(Black) in the Redaction toolbar.
7) Navigate to the folder in the file browser window that opens where the redact document isgoing to be saved and enter a name for the document.
8) Click on Save to create the redacted PDF file as follows:– The gray redaction shapes are converted to white, or black shapes and the document
is exported as a PDF– There is no selectable text in the PDF file and any redacted content is non-existent.

Drawings
Open a drawing in Draw, then use Steps 2) thru 8) in “Documents, spreadsheets, orpresentations” above to create a redacted PDF copy of the drawing file.

Note
When a redacted document is exported as a new PDF file, any redacted portions
are removed from the new document and replaced by redaction blocks of pixels.
This prevents any attempt to restore, or copy the original contents that have beenredacted.

268 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Draw Guide 7.5

Chapter 11,
Advanced Draw Techniques

Drawing pages
Pages pane
Drawings created in Draw can consist of multiple pages and stored as one file on a computer.
Drawing pages are displayed as thumbnails in the Pages pane which is used to add, rename,delete, and arrange pages in a drawing.
By default the Pages pane (Figure 272) appears docked on the left of the Workspace. If thePages pane is not visible, go to View > Page Pane on the Menu bar. The Pages pane also
becomes a floating window using one of the following methods:• Windows and Linux only — press and hold the Ctrl key, then double-click in the title
bar of the Pages pane to create a floating window.
•

macOS only — press and hold the ⌘ key, then double-click in the title bar of the Pages
pane to create a floating window.

•

Windows, Linux and macOS — click in the title bar and drag the Pages pane to create
a floating window.
• Click on the X on the right side of the title bar and close the Pages pane, or deselectView > Page Pane in the Menu bar.

Selecting pages
To make a page appear in the Workspace, select a page using one of the following methods:• Select a page in the Pages pane.

Figure 272: Draw main window
1)
2)
3)

Pages paneWorkspace
Sidebar270 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

4)
5)

Status bar
Layers bar

Figure 273: Navigator dialog

Figure 274: Navigator deck in Sidebar•

Use the keyboard shortcut F5, or go to View > Navigator on the Menu bar to open the
Navigator dialog (Figure 273) and select a page from the displayed list.
• Click on Navigator in the Sidebar to open the Navigator deck in the Sidebar (Figure 274)
and select a page from the displayed list.

Navigating pages
To navigate a multi-page drawing and select a page for editing, use one of the following methods:• Select the required page in the Pages pane.
• Select the required page in the Navigator dialog, or the Navigator deck in the Sidebar.
Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 271

• Go to Page > Navigate on the Menu bar and select one of the options from thesubmenu:– To First Page — moves the selection to the first page in the drawing.
– To Previous Page — moves the selection backward to the previous page.
– To Next Page — moves the selection forward to the next page.
– To Last Page — moves the selection to the last page in the drawing.

Adding pages
Inserting new page
Insert a new page into a drawing using one of the following methods. A new page is added after
the selected page in the Pages pane, or at the end of the pages if no page is selected.
• Go to Page > New Page on the Menu bar.
• Right-click in the Pages pane and select New Page from the context menu.
• Right-click on the page displayed in the Workspace and select Page > New Page fromthe context menu.
• Go to Page > Insert Page from File on the Menu bar and open the Insert File dialog.
Navigate to the folder where the file is located. Select the file and click on Open to open
the Insert Pages dialog (Figure 275). Select the required pages and click OK and theselected pages are inserted into the drawing.

Figure 275: Insert Pages dialog

272 | LibreOffice Draw User GuideDuplicating pages
Select a page in the Pages pane, then use one of the following methods to insert the duplicate
page after the selected page:• Go to Page > Duplicate Page on the Menu bar.
• Right-click on a page in the Pages pane and select Copy from the context menu.
Right-click in a blank area of the Pages pane and select Paste from the context menu.

Renaming pages
When pages are inserted into a drawing, they are automatically named as Page 1, Page 2, andso on in the Pages pane, the Navigator dialog, or the Navigator deck in the Sidebar. As the pageorder is changed, pages are automatically renumbered making it difficult to identify the pages. To
solve the problem of identifying pages, it is recommended to give each page a memorable name.
1) Select a page for renaming in the Pages pane.
2) Use one of the following methods and rename the selected page:– Go to Page on the Menu bar and select Rename Page from the submenu.
– Right-click on the selected page in the Pages pane and select Rename Page fromthe context menu.
– Right-click on the page displayed in the Workspace and select Page > Rename
Page from the context menu.
3) In the Rename Page dialog that opens, type a new name for the page and click OK.

Changing page order
Use one of the following methods and change the page order in a drawing:• Select a page thumbnail in the Pages pane, then click and drag the page thumbnail tochange the page order.
• Select a page thumbnail in the Pages pane, then go to Page > Move on the Menu bar
and select one of the following options:– Page to Start — moves the selected page to the beginning of the drawing.
– Page Up — moves the selected page up one place in the page order of the drawing.
– Page Down — moves the selected page down one place in the page order of thedrawing.
– Page to End — moves the selected page to the end of the drawing.

Deleting pages
1) Select a page for deletion in the Pages pane.
2) Use one of the following methods to delete the selected page:– Go to Page > Delete Page on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the selected page in the Pages pane and select Delete Page from thecontext menu.
– Right-click on the page displayed in the Workspace and select Page > Delete Page
from the context menu.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 273

Note
When deleting pages in a drawing, there is no confirmation of deletion for theselected page.

Figure 276: Master View toolbar

Master pages
A master page is a page used as a starting point for all pages in a drawing controlling the basic
formatting of all pages based on the master page. It is similar to a page style in Writer, or masterslide in Impress. A drawing with multiple pages can have more than one master page allowing a
different look assigned to separate pages in a drawing, for example title page, contents page,and drawing pages.
A master page has a defined set of characteristics. For example, background objects (such as
logos, decorative lines), text formatting, blocks of standard text, and fields such as page
numbering, date, and filename.

Master page view
Go to View > Master on the Menu bar and open the master page view. This also opens the
Master View toolbar (Figure 276). If this toolbar does not open, go to View > Toolbars > Master
View on the Menu bar.
To return to normal page mode, click on Close Master View in the Master View toolbar, or go to
View > Normal on the Menu bar.

Creating master pages
Each drawing created uses the default master page. When a drawing has multiple pages, masterpages are created and added to the drawing as follows:
1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master View
toolbar.
2) Create a new master page using one of the following methods. After creation, the newmaster page is automatically selected.
– Click on New Master in the Master View toolbar.
– Go to Page > New Master on the Menu bar.
– Right-click in the Pages pane and select New Master from the context menu.
3) Add the required graphic objects, logos, fields, text and so on to the selected master
page, then save the drawing.
4) Assign the new master page to a drawing page. See “Changing master pages” onpage 275 for more information.
5) If necessary, rename the master page with a meaningful name, see “Renaming masterpages” on page 274.

274 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Renaming master pages
Each new master page created has the default name of Default 1, Default 2, and so on. It is
recommended to rename a new master page with a more meaningful name. The default masterpage that was created when the drawing was created can also be renamed.
1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master View
toolbar.
2) Use one of the following methods and open the Rename Master Slide dialog:– Click on Rename Master in the Master View toolbar.
– Right-click on a master page in the Pages pane and select Rename Master from thecontext menu.
3) Enter a meaningful name for the master page in the Name text box in the Rename Master
dialog.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Rename Master Slide dialog.

Changing master pages
When a drawing uses several master pages, each page in the drawing can use a different master
page.
1) Go to View > Normal on the Menu bar.
2) In the Pages pane, select the page where the master page is going to be changed.
3) Right-click on the page in the Workspace and select Change Slide Master from thecontext menu to open the Available Master Slides dialog (Figure 277).
4) In the Select a Slide Design preview box, select a master page design for the selectedpage.

Figure 277: Available Master Slides dialog

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 275

5) If necessary, select Exchange background page to use the selected master page for all
pages in the drawing.
6) If necessary, select Delete unused backgrounds to delete any master pages shown in
Select a Slide Design preview box that have not been assigned to a page.
7) Click OK to change the selected master page and close the Available Master Slides
dialog.

Deleting master pages
Deleting master pages is only available when there is more than one master page in a drawing.
1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master View
toolbar.
2) Use one of the following methods to delete a master page. The deletion of the masterpage is immediate and there is no confirmation– Select and right-click on a master page in the Pages pane and select Delete Masterfrom the context menu.
– Click on Delete Master in the Master View toolbar.
– Go to Page > Delete Master on the Menu bar.

Note
The default master page created when the drawing was first created cannot bedeleted. Also, if the drawing only uses one named master page, then that named
master page cannot be deleted.

Master pages from templates
Master pages from templates available in LibreOffice can be used for a drawing. If the masterpages from a template use a different page size, the master pages loaded into a drawing are
adapted to the page size used in the drawing. This may cause some objects to be stretched, orincorrectly positioned when adapted to fit the drawing page size.
1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master View
toolbar.
2) Right-click on a master page displayed in the drawing and select Change Master Slidefrom the context menu to open the Available Master Slides dialog (Figure 277 on
page 275).
3) Click on Load… to open the Load Master Slide dialog (Figure 278).
4) Chose a template category from the list displayed in Categories.
5) Choose a template from the list displayed in Templates.
6) If necessary, click on Preview to display a preview of the selected template.
7) Click OK to close the Load Master Slide dialog. The Available Master Slides dialog opens
displaying the selected template in Select a Slide Design.
8) Select the master page required in Select a Slide Design.
9) If necessary, select Exchange background page to use the selected master page for all
pages in the drawing.
10) If necessary, select Delete unused backgrounds to delete any master pages shown in
Select a Slide Design that have not been assigned to a page.
276 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 278: Load Master Slide dialog
11) Click OK to assign the selected master page to a drawing page and close the Available
Master Slides dialog.

Inserting fields
1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master View
toolbar.
2) Go to Insert > Field on the Menu bar and select a field type from the options available on
the submenu. The selected field appears in the middle of the drawing page.
3) Select the inserted field so that the border is displayed.
4) Click on the border and drag the field to the required position.
5) If necessary, format the text used in the field to the drawing requirements. For more
information, see Chapter 9, Adding and Formatting Text.
The field types that are available for insertion as follows:
Date (fixed)
Inserts the current date into the master page as a fixed field. The date is not automatically
updated.
Date (variable)
Inserts the current date into the master page as a variable field. The date is automatically
updated each time the file is opened.
Time (fixed)
Inserts the current time into the master page as a fixed field. The time is not automatically
updated.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 277

Figure 279: Page Properties dialog
Time (variable)
Inserts the current time into the master page as a variable field. The time is automatically
updated each time the file is opened.
AuthorInserts the first and last names listed in the LibreOffice user data into the active page. Go
to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > User Data (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >LibreOffice > User Data) on the Menu bar to enter user data details.
Page Number
Inserts the page number into every page of the drawing. To change the number format,
go to Page > Page Properties on the Menu bar to open the Page Properties dialog(Figure 279). Click on the Page tab and select a number format from the drop-down list in
Layout Settings.
Page Title
Inserts the page title. A page title is created in Normal view by going to Page > Rename
Page on the Menu bar and entering a title in the Name text box in the Rename Page
dialog that opens. For more information, see “Renaming pages” on page 273.
Page Count
Inserts the total number of pages in a drawing.
File Name
Inserts the name of the active file. The name only appears after the file has been saved.

Editing field format
1) Go to View > Master on the Menu bar to open the master page view and the Master View
toolbar.
2) Click on a field to select it and display the selection handles.
3) Click on the field contents and make sure the cursor is at the beginning of the field.

278 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 280: Edit Field dialog
4) Edit the field format using one of the following methods:– Go to Edit > Fields on the Menu bar to open the Edit Field dialog (Figure 280), thenselect format option(s) and click OK to save the changes.
– Right-click on the selected field contents and select a format option from the context
menu.
5) Click in a blank area of the master page to deselect the field.

Note
The options available in the Edit Field dialog and context menu change to match
the field type that has been selected for editing.

Templates
A drawing template is used as the starting point for all new drawings. For example, a template
can include a company logo, name and information on the first page of a drawing with theremaining pages in a drawing only showing the company logo and name. Templates can containanything that regular drawings can contain, such as text, graphics, a set of styles, and so on.
All document types created using LibreOffice are based on templates. If a template is not
specified when a new document is started, then the default template for that type of document isused. This default template uses a set of properties that are hard coded into LibreOffice. If
necessary, the default template for drawings that is hard coded in LibreOffice can be changed,
see “Default template” on page 282 for more information.
For more information on templates and obtaining templates from other sources, see the Getting
Started Guide.
Draw does not have any predefined templates when it is installed on a computer. However,templates can be created using methods described in the following sections. Templates can beinstalled that have been obtained from other sources, see "Importing templates" on page 286 formore information.

Creating templates
Using Save As Template dialog
1) Open a drawing to use as a basis for a template, or open and edit a template to use as abasis for a new template.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 279

Figure 281: Save As Template dialog
2) Add any extra content and styles, or edit the content and styles to the template
requirements.
3) Use one of the following methods to open the Save As Template dialog (Figure 281):– Go to File > Templates > Save As Template on the Menu bar.
– Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Save on the Standard toolbar and select Saveas Template from the drop-down menu.
4) Enter a name for the template in the Enter Template Name text box.
5) Select a template category from the list available in the Select Template Category box.
6) If the new template is to be used as the default template in Draw, select the option Set as
default template.
7) Click on Save to save the template and close the Save As Template dialog.

Using Save As command
1) Go to File > Save As on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Shift+Ctrl+S(macOS ⌘+Ctrl+S) to open the Save as dialog.
2) Navigate to the LibreOffice templates folder. Actual location of the LibreOffice template
folder depends on the computer system and setup.
3) Enter a filename using the extension OTG in the Name box.
4) From the drop-down list, select ODF Drawing Template (.otg) as the file type.
5) Click on Save to save the template and close the dialog.

Note
When saving a drawing as a template, the template must be saved in the
LibreOffice templates folder for the template to be recognized and found by the
LibreOffice Template Manager. See “Template folder location” on page 284 formore information.

280 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Creating drawings from templates
Start Center
Open LibreOffice and create a new drawing from a template displayed in the Start Center using
one of the following methods:• Click on Templates in the Start Center to open a display of available templates for all
LibreOffice applications. Click on the required template and a new document opens using
the relevant LibreOffice module for the template.
• Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Templates in the Start Center, then select Draw
Templates to only display the LibreOffice Draw templates. Click on the required template
and a new drawing opens using LibreOffice Draw.

Templates dialog
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog (Figure 282):– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) Select Drawings from the Filter drop-down list.
3) Select a category from the options available in the All Categories drop-list.
4) Select a template from the options available in the preview box.

Figure 282: Templates dialog
Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 281

5) Click Open, or double click on the template to create a new drawing using the selected
template and close the Template dialog.
6) Go to File > Save As on the Menu bar and save the new drawing as a file using theextension ODG.

Default template
If a new drawing is created without selecting a template, LibreOffice creates the drawing using a
set of properties that are hard coded in LibreOffice. However, any drawing template can be usedas the default template for LibreOffice Draw. The selected template must be located in thetemplates folders used for LibreOffice applications and categories, see “Template folder location”
on page 284 for more information.

Setting default template
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) Select Drawings from the Filter drop-down list.
3) Select a category from the options available in the All Categories drop-list.
4) Select a template from the options available in the preview box.
5) Right-click on the selected template and select Set as default from the context menu.
There is no confirmation that the selected template is now the default template for new
drawings. The default template is indicated by check mark at the top left corner of thetemplate icon.
6) Click on Close to close the Templates dialog. The next time a new drawing is created, it
uses the new default template.

Note
If a new drawing is suitable to use as the default template, then the drawing mustbe saved as a template first before it can be used as the default template. See“Creating templates” on page 279 for more information.

Resetting default template
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) Select Drawings from the Filter drop-down list.
3) Select a category from the options available in the All Categories drop-list.
4) Right-click on the default template. The default template is indicated by check mark at the
top left corner of the template icon.
5) Select Reset Default from the context menu. There is no confirmation that Draw has
been reset to using LibreOffice default properties. The check mark is removed from thetemplate icon.

282 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

6) Click on Close to close the Templates dialog. The next time a new drawing is created, it
uses the LibreOffice default template.

Tip
To reset all default templates for all LibreOffice modules, click on Manage in the
Templates dialog and select Reset All Default Templates from the drop-down
list.

Editing templates
Template styles and template content can be edited and, if necessary, reapplied to drawings thatwere created from that template. Any content in the drawing, but not included in the template,cannot be reapplied.

Note
Templates that were supplied with LibreOffice cannot be deleted. Only templates
that have been created using LibreOffice, or imported into LibreOffice, can beedited, or deleted.

Editing
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) Select a template that was created using LibreOffice, or imported into LibreOffice.
3) Right-click on the selected template and select Edit from the context menu. The template
opens in Draw.
4) Edit the template as any other drawing.
5) Go to File > Save on the Menu bar, or use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+S (macOS ⌘+S)
to save the template.
6) Alternatively, save the edited template as a new template. See “Creating templates” onpage 279 for more information.

Updating drawings from modified template
If a drawing is opened and the template has been modified, a confirmation dialog opens asking to
update the styles in the drawing to the formatting used in the modified template.
• Select Update Styles to update any styles in the drawing that have been changed in thetemplate and close the confirmation dialog.
• Select Keep Old Styles so that styles in the drawing that have been changed in thetemplate are not updated. The confirmation dialog closes and does not appear when the
document is reopened. Also, the drawing is no longer connected to the template.

Note
If Keep Old Styles the template is still listed under File > Properties > General,
the template has to be reassigned to reconnect the document to the template.
See “Changing templates assigned to drawings” on page 284 for more
information.
Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 283

Changing templates assigned to drawings
If necessary, the template originally used for a drawing can be changed to a different template, or
the original template used for the drawing reassigned.
• To manually change, or reassign a template, create a new drawing from the required
template and copy the contents from the old drawing into the new drawing.
• Download the Template Changer extension from the LibreOffice website athttps://extensions.libreoffice.org/en/extensions/show/template-changer and install it into
LibreOffice. Restart LibreOffice to activate the extension. Open the drawing and use File
> Templates > Change template (current document) on the Menu bar to change thetemplate. For more information, see the Getting Started Guide.

Organizing templates
LibreOffice can only locate templates that are in LibreOffice template folder. Template categories
can be created and used to organize templates, for example creating separate categories fordifferent projects or clients. Templates can also be imported and exported.

Template folder location
The template folder location in LibreOffice varies with the computer operating system. Locating
the template folder on a computer is as follows:
1) Go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice > Paths (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >LibreOffice > Paths) on the Menu bar to open the Options LibreOffice Paths dialog.
2) Scroll down to Templates in Paths used by LibreOffice to identify the template folder
used by LibreOffice. The following are examples of the template folder location using
different operating systems:
Windows 11 — C\Users\peter\AppData\Roaming\LibreOffice\4\user\template
Ubuntu 23.04 — /home/peter/.config/libreoffice/4/user/template;/home/peter/Templates
macOS Ventura 13.5 — /Users/peter/Library/Application
Support/LibreOffice/4/user/templates

Creating template categories
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings as the application.
3) In Manage, select New Category from the drop-down list.
4) Enter a name in the Enter category name text box in the dialog that opens.
5) Click OK to save the new category in LibreOffice and close the dialog.

Renaming template categories
Template categories originally installed with LibreOffice cannot be renamed. Only templatecategories that have been created after the LibreOffice installation can be renamed.
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.

284 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) In the Filter drop-down lists, select Drawings as the application.
3) Select the category for renaming from the options available in the All Categories
drop-down list.
4) In Manage, select Rename Category from the drop-down list.
5) Enter a name in the Rename Category text box in the dialog that opens.
6) Click OK to save the renamed category in LibreOffice and close the dialog.

Note
For categories installed with LibreOffice, the options Rename Category and
Delete Category are grayed out indicating that these options are not available

Deleting template categories
Template categories installed with LibreOffice cannot be deleted. Only template categories thathave been created after the LibreOffice installation can be deleted.
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) Select the category for deletion from the options available in the All Categories drop-list.
3) In Manage, select Delete Category from the drop-down list.
4) Click on Yes in the warning message to confirm the deletion of the category.

Figure 283: Select Category dialog

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 285

Moving templates
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) In the Filter drop-down list, select Drawings as the application.
3) Select the template category from the options available in the All Categories drop-down
list.
4) Right-click on the template that is going to be moved and select Move from the context
menu to open the Select Category dialog (Figure 283).
5) Select a category from Select from Existing Category, or enter a name for a new
category in Create a New Category.
6) Click OK to move the template to the selected category and close the Select Category
dialog.

Importing templates
Using the Extension Manager, templates can be downloaded from many sources, including theofficial LibreOffice template repository. For more information about using the Extension Manager
to import templates, see the Getting Started Guide.
Save the template on a computer, then import the template into the LibreOffice template folder asfollows:
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) Click on Manage and select Import from the context menu to open the Select Category
dialog (Figure 283).
3) Select a category from Select from Existing Category, or enter a name for a new
category in Create a New Category.
4) Click OK and a file browser window opens.
5) Navigate to the folder containing the template, select the template and click Open. The
file browser closes and the template appears in the selected template category in the
Templates dialog.

Exporting templates
Export a template from a template category to another location in a computer, or network, as
follows:

Note
Exporting a template does not remove it from the Templates dialog, or template
folder. Exporting places a copy of the template in the location specified.
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
286 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) In the Filter drop-down list, select Drawings as the application.
3) Select the required template category from the options available in the All Categories
drop-down list.
4) Right-click on the required template and select Export from the context menu to open afile browser window.
5) Navigate to the folder to export the template into.
6) Click OK and the exported template appears in the selected folder.
7) Click on Close to close the Templates dialog.

Deleting templates
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Templates dialog:– Go to File > New > Templates on the Menu bar.
– Go to File > Templates > Manage Templates on the Menu bar.
– Use the keyboard short cut Ctrl+Shift+N (macOS ⌘+Shift+N).
2) In the Filter drop-down list, select Drawings as the application.
3) Select the required template category from the options available in the All Categories
drop-down list.
4) Right-click on the template being deleted and select Delete from the context menu.
5) Click on Yes to confirm the deletion of the template.
6) Click on Close to close the Templates dialog.

Note
Templates installed with LibreOffice cannot be deleted. Only templates that havebeen created after the installation of LibreOffice can be deleted.

Multiple layers
Layers in LibreOffice Draw allow assembly of related elements in a drawing. Think of layers as
individual workspaces that can be hidden from view, prevented from printing, or locked so thatchanges cannot be made.
Layers do not determine the stacking order of objects on a drawing, except for the Controls
layer, which is always in front of all other layers. The stacking order of objects on a drawing isdetermined when objects are added. The stacking order of objects can be rearranged by going to
Shape > Arrange on the Menu bar.
Layers in a drawing are indicated by tabs located at the bottom of the Workspace and above theStatus bar, as shown in Figure 284. By default, the Layout tab is always selected when adrawing is opened. Click on another tab to select another layer in the drawing.

Figure 284: Example of Layers tab in Draw
Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 287

NotesWhen a new layer is added, the layer is added to all pages in a drawing.
However, when an object is added to a layer, the object is only added to theselected drawing page.
If an object is to appear on all drawing pages (for example, a company logo), add
the object to the master page by going to View > Master on the Menu bar. See“Master pages” on page 274 for more information.

Default layers
Normal view
In Normal view, LibreOffice Draw provides three default layers that are visible to the user. Thesedefault layers cannot be deleted or renamed.
Layout
The default workspace where objects are normally placed.
Controls
Used for form controls that have been assigned an action. Objects on this layer arealways in front of objects on other layers. To prevent form controls from being visible on a
drawing, deselect the Visible option in the Insert Layer or Modify Layer dialog. To prevent
form controls from being printed, deselect the Printable option in the Insert Layer orModify Layer dialog.
Dimension Lines
When dimension lines are drawn, the dimension lines are automatically placed on thislayer. To prevent dimension lines from being visible on a drawing, deselect the Visible
option in the Insert Layer or Modify Layer dialog. To prevent dimension lines from being
printed, deselect the Printable option in the Insert Layer or Modify Layer dialog.

Master view
In Master view, LibreOffice provides a single layer, Background objects. This layer is used toplaces objects that appear on every page in a drawing, for example company logo, date, page
number, drawing title, and so on.

Inserting layers
1) Use one of the following methods to open the Insert Layer dialog (Figure 285):– Right-click the layer tab area at the bottom of the Workspace area and select Insert
Layer from the context menu.
– Go to Insert > Layer on the Menu bar.
2) Enter meaningful names for the layer in the Name and Title text boxes.
3) If necessary, enter a description for the new layer in the Description text box.
4) Select Visible for the layer to be visible in a drawing. When Visible is not selected, thelayer is hidden and its name in the layer tab changes color to blue.
5) Select Printable for the layer to print when the drawing is printed. The name of a layer isunderlined in the layer tab bar when Printable is not selected. For example, not printing alayer is useful if the layer is a draft layer for guides or annotations used in creating thedrawing, but this draft layer is not required for the final printed output.

288 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 285: Insert Layer dialog
6) Select Locked to prevent any objects on a layer from deletion, editing, or moving. No
additional objects can be added to a locked layer. The name of a locked layer is changes
to Italic text in the layer tab bar. For example, locking a layer is useful when a base plan is
to be protected while adding a new layer with other details.
7) Click OK to close the Insert Layer dialog and the new layer automatically becomes active.

Modifying layers
1) Select the layer that is going to be modified.
2) Use one of the following methods to open the Modify Layer dialog. The Modify Layerdialog is similar to the Insert Layer dialog (Figure 285):– Right-click the layer tab area at the bottom of the Workspace area and select Modify
Layer from the context menu.
– Go to Format > Layer on the Menu bar.
– Double click on the layer tab.
3) Make the necessary changes to the attributes for the layer.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Modify Layer dialog.

Working with layers
Selecting a layer
Click on the layer name tab in the Layers tab bar to select and activate the layer. Objects added
to the drawing are only added to the active layer. Form controls are automatically added to theControls layer and dimension lines are automatically added to the Dimension Lines layer.
If there are several layers in a drawing, a layer tab may not be visible on the Layers tab bar. Use
the navigation icons on the left of the Layers tab bar to navigate to the required layer.

Hiding layers
1) Select the layer that is going to be hidden and open the Modify Layer dialog. See“Modifying layers” on page 289 for more information.
Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 289

2) Deselect Visible and click OK. The text on the layer name tab changes color to blue. Any
objects placed on a hidden layer are no longer visible on the other layers of the drawing.
3) Alternatively, hold down the Shift key and click on the layer name tab to hide the layer.

Showing hidden layers
1) Select the hidden layer that and open the Modify Layer dialog. See “Modifying layers” onpage 289 for more information.
2) Select Visible and click OK. The text on the layer name tab changes color to the default
text color. Any objects placed on a hidden layer are now visible in the other layers of thedrawing.
3) Alternatively, hold down the Shift key and click on the layer name tab to make the layer
visible.

Locking layers
1) Select the layer that is going to be locked and open the Modify Layer dialog. See“Modifying layers” on page 289 for more information.
2) Select Locked and click OK. The text on the layer name tab is underlined. Locking alayer prevents any modification of the layer.
3) Alternatively, hold down the Ctrl (macOS ⌘) key and click on the name tab to lock thelayer.

Unlocking layers
1) Select the locked layer and open the Modify Layer dialog. See “Modifying layers” onpage 289 for more information.
2) Deselect Locked and click OK. The text on the layer name tab is no longer underlined.
3) Alternatively, hold down the Ctrl (macOS ⌘) key and click on the name tab of thelocked layer to unlock it.

Renaming layers
1) Select the layer that is going to be renamed and open the Modify Layer dialog. See“Modifying layers” on page 289 for more information.
2) Enter a new name in the Name text box and click OK to save the change.
3) Alternatively, right-click on the name tab of the layer and select Rename Layer from thecontext menu. The text becomes editable allowing the name to be changed. Click outside
the tab area to save the change.
4) Alternatively, hold down the Alt key (macOS ⌥) and click on the name tab. The text
becomes editable allowing the name to be changed. Click outside the tab area to savethe change.

Note
Only layers that have been added to a drawing can be renamed or deleted. The
default layers Layout, Controls, Dimension Lines and Background objects
cannot be renamed or deleted.

Deleting layers
1) Right-click on the name tab of the layer that is going to be deleted and select Delete
Layer from the context menu.

290 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

2) Confirm the deletion of the layer. The layer and all of the objects on the layer are deleted
from the drawing.

Moving objects between layers
If objects are selected on a layer, the Status bar indicates how many objects are selected. The
position of the moved objects does not change in the drawing and the layer where the objects
have been placed is displayed in the Status bar. Move the selected objects from one layer toanother layer using one of the following methods:• Click and drag the selected objects to the name tab of the destination layer, then release
the cursor.
• Go to Edit > Cut on the Menu bar or right-click on the selected objects and select Cutfrom the context menu. Select the destination layer, then go to Edit > Paste on the Menubar, or right-click on the Workspace and select Paste from the context menu.

Dimensioning
Dimensioning objects in Draw and then displaying the dimensions makes drawing look more likean engineering drawing. When dimensions are created, they are automatically placed on the
Dimension Lines layer.

Dimensioning objects
1) Dimension an object using one of the following methods:– Click on the triangle ▼ next to Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar to open theLines and Arrows pop-up toolbar (Figure 286), then click on Dimension Line and the
cursor changes shape, for example a cross.
– Click on Dimension Line in the Lines and Arrows panel in the Shapes deck on the
Sidebar (Figure 287) and the cursor changes shape, for example a cross.

Figure 286: Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar

Figure 287: Lines and Arrows panel in Shapes deck on Sidebar

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 291

Figure 288: Example of a dimensioned object
2) Position the cursor at one corner of the object, then click and drag the cursor to draw thedimension line. To restrict drawing the dimension line in the horizontal or vertical direction,press and hold the Shift key while dragging the cursor.
3) Release the cursor when the end of the dimension line is reached and the dimension line
is drawn. The dimension is automatically added (as shown by the example in Figure 288)
and the dimension line is also placed automatically on the Dimension Lines layer.
4) To edit the text of the dimension, double-click on an unselected dimension line to entertext edit mode and make any necessary changes. Click outside the dimension line tosave the changes.
5) To configure the dimension line, see “Configuring dimensioning” on page 292.

Note
After editing the dimension text, entering text and then deleting text, save thedrawing and reopen it to enable automatic measurements for dimensioning.

Configuring dimensioning
Drawing object styles
1) Open the Graphics Styles dialog (Figure 289) using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Styles > Edit Style on the Menu bar.

Figure 289: Graphic Styles dialog — Dimensioning page292 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

– Use the keyboard shortcut F11 (macOS ⌘+T) to open the Styles deck on the
Sidebar, then right-click on a style and select Modify from the context menu.
– Click on Styles on the Sidebar to open the Styles deck, then right-click on a style andselect Modify from the context menu.
2) Click on Dimensioning to open the Dimensioning page in the dialog.
3) Make the changes required to dimensioning using the various options in the Line andLegend sections on the Dimensioning page.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Graphic Styles dialog.
5) To reset the dimensioning options to the default properties of the template, open theGraphics Style dialog, then click on Standard.

Dimension line dialog
1) Draw a dimension line. See “Dimensioning objects” on page 291 for more information.
2) Right-click on the dimension line and select Dimensions from the context menu to open
the Dimension line dialog (Figure 290).
3) Make the required changes for dimensioning using the various options in the Dimension
line dialog.
4) Click OK to save the changes and close the Dimension line dialog.

Dimensioning options
The dimensioning options in the Dimensions page in the Graphics Style dialog and theDimension Line dialog are as follows. The preview in the dialogs changes as the following
options are changed showing how the dimension line appears in a drawing.
Line
Sets distances between the dimension line, guides and the object.
Line distanceSpecifies distance between the dimension line and the object or baseline. A minimumof -10mm to a maximum of 10mm can be entered in the text box. The lower the value,
the closer the dimension line is to the object or baseline.

Figure 290: Dimension Line dialog

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 293

Guide overhangSpecifies distance the guide extends above or below the dimension line. A minimum of-10mm to a maximum of 10mm can be entered in the text box. Positive values cause
the guide overhang to extend above the dimension line. Negative values cause theguide overhang to be below the baseline.
Guide distanceSpecifies length of the right and left guides below the dimension line toward the object.
A minimum of -10mm to a maximum of 10mm can be entered in the text box. Positive
values extend the guides above the baseline and further away from the object.
Negative values extend the guides below the baseline and closer to the object.
Left guideSpecifies length of the left guide starting at the dimension line. A minimum of -10mm toa maximum of 10mm can be entered in the text box. Positive values extend the guide
below the dimension line toward the object. Negative values move the guide away fromthe object.
Right guideSpecifies length of the right guide starting at the dimension line. A minimum of -10mm
to a maximum of 10mm can be entered in the text box. Positive values extend theguide below the dimension line toward the object. Negative values move the guideaway from the object.
Measure below object
Reverses positions and lengths of the dimension line and guides set in Line options.
Decimal places
Specifies number of decimal places used for the display of line properties.
LegendSets the properties of the dimension text.
Text position
Determines position of the dimension text to the dimension line and guides. The
AutoVertical and AutoHorizontal must be deselected before a text position can be
assigned.
AutoVertical
Determines optimal vertical position for the dimension text.
AutoHorizontal
Determines optimal horizontal position for the dimension text.
Parallel to line
Displays, when selected, text parallel to the dimension line or, when deselected, at 90
degrees to the dimension line.
Show measurement units
Shows or hides dimension measurement units. A measurement unit is selected fromthe drop-down list.

Note
The dimensioning options are linked with the current drawing. Any changes madeapply only to the current drawing. New drawings start with the standard properties
of Draw. If the dimensioning options are to be used for future drawings, save thedrawing as a template.

294 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Tip
When dimensioning objects, it is recommended to use the zoom function, guidelines and snap functions so dimension lines can be accurately placed on an
object. See Chapter 3, Working with Objects and Object Points for more
information.

Drawing to scale
In Draw, the predefined Workspace drawing area is normally Letter or A4 page size, dependingon the computer setup and the default printer connected to the computer. However, dependingon the actual size of the drawn objects, it is often convenient to reduce or enlarge the drawing byscaling (for example 1:10 or 2:1).

Note
If drawing to scale, dimension configuration values in the Graphics Style dialog
and the Dimension Line dialog are also to scale. For example, a value of 10mm in
the dialog results in a dimension value of 300mm if the scale has been set to
1:30.
Specify the drawing scale by going to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw > General (macOS
LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Draw > General) to open the Options dialog(Figure 291), then select a value from the Scale drop-down list. The default setting for this option
is 1:1. When a change is made to the drawing scale, it is reflected in the rulers at the top and left
side of the Workspace.

Figure 291: Options LibreOffice Draw dialog — General page

Figure 292: Example of drawing to scale
1)

Drawing scale 1:1

2)

Drawing scale 1:4

3)

Drawing scale 4:1

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 295

Any change in the drawing scale has no effect on the basic drawing operations. Draw
automatically calculates the necessary values (for example, dimension lines). The spacing of thegrid points is independent of drawing scale as the grid is only a visual drawing aid and not a
drawing element.
An increase in scale (for example 1:4) allows large objects to be drawn that would not fit into thepaper size for a drawing. A decrease in drawing scale (for example 4:1) allows small objects tobe drawn accurately at an increased size and make them easier to understand. Examples ofdrawing to scale are shown in Figure 292 where all three rectangles are the same size in thedrawing.
• Left rectangle — drawn at the default 1:1 scale and dimensioned.
• Center rectangle — drawing scale changed to 1:4 and the dimensions wereautomatically increased by Draw to reflect the decrease in scale.
• Right rectangle — drawing scale changed to 4:1 and the dimensions were automaticallydecreased by Draw to reflect the increase in scale.

Multiple views of a drawing
Several views of the same drawing can be opened and used in LibreOffice Draw. These views
are displayed in separate windows and are useful in displaying views of the drawing, forexample, master page and normal page open at the same time. However, make sure that thecorrect view is active when saving a drawing.
To open a new window displaying the same drawing file, go to Window > New Window on the
Menu bar. A change to the drawing in one window is immediately reflected in other open
windows.
The filename in the title bar for each open window is automatically numbered as shown by theexample in Figure 293. If other LibreOffice documents are open at the same time, this windows
list includes all the open documents. The active window has a marker by its filename in the list.
Switch between windows by clicking on a name in the list, or by clicking on the window itself if it
is visible on the display.
Use one of the following methods to close a window:• Go to Window > Close Window on the Menu bar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+W (macOS ⌘+W).
• Click on Close in the Menu bar of the window.

Figure 293: Example of multiple windows open in Draw

296 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 294: Gallery deck in Sidebar — Icon view

Figure 295: Gallery deck in Sidebar — Detailed view

Gallery
Draw includes several images in the Gallery. These images are grouped into themes (forexample Arrows, Bullets, Diagrams, and so on) and are listed in alphabetical order. Click on atheme and its images are displayed below the theme list.
• To display an icon view of the images in the Gallery deck (Figure 294), click on Icon View
at the bottom left of the Sidebar.
• To display an alphabetical view of the images in the Gallery deck (Figure 295), click on
Detailed View at the bottom left of the Sidebar.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 297

Using the Gallery
1) Click on Gallery on the Sidebar, or go to Insert > Media > Gallery on the Menu bar.
2) Select a theme from the available options.
3) Use one of the following methods to place an image into a drawing:– Click on an image in the Gallery deck and drag the image into a drawing.
– Right-click on an image and select Insert from the context menu. The image is placedat the center of a drawing.
– Right-click on an image and select Copy from the context menu then paste the image
into the drawing. The image is placed at the center of the drawing.
4) Edit the gallery image to the drawing requirements. For more information on editing
images and pictures, see Chapter 6, Editing Pictures.

Creating themes and adding images
1) Open the Gallery deck on the Sidebar.
2) Click on New at the bottom right of the Gallery deck to open the Properties of New Theme
dialog (Figure 296).
3) On the General page, enter a name for the theme in the text box.

Figure 296: Properties New Theme dialog — General page

Figure 297: Properties of New Theme dialog — Files page298 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

4) Click on Files to open the Files page (Figure 297).
5) Click on Find Files to open a Select Path dialog.
6) Navigate to the folder that contains the images required and click OK to select the folder
and the Select Path dialog closes. A list of files contained in the folder now appear in theFiles page as shown by the example in Figure 297.
7) If necessary, select the file format required for the images from the options available inthe drop-down list. By default, all formats for image files are selected.
8) If required, click on Preview to display each selected image file.
9) Select the files required for the new theme. If necessary, press the Ctrl key (macOS ⌘)to select multiple files.
10) Click on Add. The selected files disappear from the file list and the images appear in theGallery.
11) If all the files in the list are to be added, click Add All. All files disappear from the list andthe images appear in the Gallery.
12) Click OK when finished adding files and close the Properties of New Theme dialog. The
name of the new theme appears in the Gallery deck.

Note
If a Draw object is added to a theme, the object loses its connection to Draw
graphic styles and all properties are set as direct formatting.

Deleting gallery themes and images
1) Right-click on a theme, or image in the Gallery and select Delete from the context menu.
2) Click on Yes in the confirmation dialog and the theme, or image is deleted from theGallery.

Notes
Only themes and images that have been added to Draw can be deleted. Themes
and images included with the LibreOffice installation cannot be deleted.
An image is a linked file and only the link is deleted from the Gallery. The original
image file is not deleted.

Updating the Gallery
All images in the Gallery are linked files. Occasionally, it is beneficial to update a theme that has
been added to Draw to make sure that all files are still accessible. Right-click on a theme that has
at least one file added to the theme and select Update from the context menu.

Renaming themes
To rename a theme that has been added to Draw, right-click on the theme name and selectRename from the context menu.

Note
Only themes and images that have added to Draw can be renamed. Themes andimages included with the LibreOffice installation cannot be renamed.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 299

Colors
Draw (like all LibreOffice components) uses colors grouped into color palettes. Colors can becreated to suit drawing requirements. All custom colors created are placed in the custom color
palette. The following explains the color models that are used to create a custom color.
Red, Green, Blue (RGB)The RGB color model is based on the additive color model of light waves and is designed
for electronic displays and computers. This means, the more color added, the closer acolor moves towards white. RGB is created using scales from 0 to 255. When black isused, the values are R=0, G=0, and B=0. When white is used, the values are R=255,
G=255, and B=255. LibreOffice uses the RGB color model internally for printing in all
LibreOffice modules.
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key (Black) (CMYK)
It is a subtractive color model where colors are subtracted to change, or create a color. It
is mainly used in printing, which is why printer ink cartridges are labeled CMYK. CMYK
works on a scale of 0 to 100. When black is used, the values are C=100, M=100, Y=100,
and K=100. When white is used, the values are C=0, M=0, Y=0, and K=0.
Hue, Saturation, Brightness (HSB)
HSB values are an alternative representation of the RGB color model and were designed
to be more closely aligned with the way human vision perceives color-making attributes.
Use HSB values to fine tune any custom colors that are created.

Tip
More information on color models and color values can be found athttps://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Color_model.

Changing colors in objects or lines
When changing colors in objects, color palettes are used to select colors. These color palettes
are installed with LibreOffice and are used in all the LibreOffice modules. Using color palettes issimilar across all types of objects, but accessing the color palettes does vary according to thetype of object selected.

Color Bar
Although LibreOffice includes tools to precisely specify a color, it also includes a Color Bar(Figure 300) for quickly changing color in object area fills, borders, or lines.
1) Select an object in the drawing.

Figure 298: Color Bar (Color Palette)

300 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide2) Go to View > Color Bar on the Menu bar to open the Color Bar. When the Color Bar
opens, it is labeled Color Palette.
3) Left click on a color to change the area fill color, or right-click on a color to change theborder or line color of a selected object.
4) Left click on the X box in the bottom left corner of the Color Bar to remove the color froman object fill, or right-click on the X box in the bottom left corner of the Color Bar to
remove the color from an object border,5) To close the Color Bar, go to View > Color Bar on the Menu bar and deselect Color Bar.

Note
The colors available in the Color Bar are from the Standard color palette that ispart of the LibreOffice installation.

Area dialog
1) Select an object in the drawing.
2) Open the Area dialog (Figure 299) using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Area on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the object and select Area from the context menu.
3) Click on Area, then click on Color to open the Color page.
4) In Colors, select a color palette from the Palette drop-down list.
5) Click on a color from the ones displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from Recent Colors.
6) Click OK to save the changes and close the Area dialog. The selected fill color appears inthe selected object.

Area panel on the Sidebar
1) Select an object in the drawing.
2) Open the Area panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 300).
3) Select Color from the Fill drop-down list.

Figure 299: Area dialog — Color page
Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 301

Figure 300: Area panel in Properties deck on Sidebar4) Click on the triangle ▼ on the right of Fill Color to open the palette last used.
5) If necessary, select a color palette from the available palettes in the drop-down list.
6) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and theselected fill color is applied to the object.

Fill Color on the Line and Filling or Drawing toolbars
1) Select an object in the drawing.
2) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Fill Color on the Line and Filling toolbar, or the
Draw toolbar to open the last color palette used.
3) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and theselected fill color is applied to the selected object

Line dialog
1) Select a line, or object in the drawing.
2) Open the Line dialog (Figure 301) using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Line on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the line or object and select Line from the context menu.
3) Click on Line to open the Line page.
4) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Color to open the last color palette used.
5) Select a color palette to use from the available palettes in the drop-down list.

302 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

6) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and theselected line color is applied to the line or object border.
7) Click OK to save the color change and close the Line dialog.

Figure 301: Line dialog — Line page

Figure 302: Line panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 303

Line panel on the Sidebar
1) Select a line, or object in the drawing.
2) Open the Line panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 302).
3) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Color to open the palette last used.
4) Select a color palette to use from the available palettes in the drop-down list.
5) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and theselected line color is applied to the line or object border.

Line Color on the Line and Filling or Drawing toolbars
1) Select a line, or object in the drawing.
2) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Line Color on the Line and Filling toolbar, or the
Draw toolbar to open the last color palette used.
3) Select a color palette to use from the available palettes in the drop-down list.
4) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and theselected line color is applied to the line or object border.

Changing text color
Changing text color is very similar to changing the color of an area fill, object border, or line. The
Text Formatting toolbar automatically opens and replaces the Line and Filling toolbar when text isselected in a drawing. If the Text Formatting toolbar does not open, go to View > Toolbars on the
Menu bar and select Text Formatting.

Character dialog
1) Select a text box, or switch on text mode for a Draw object.
2) Highlight the text characters where the text color is going to be changed.
3) Open the Character dialog (Figure 303) using one of the following methods:– Go to Format > Character on the Menu bar.
– Right-click on the highlighted text and select Character from the context menu.
4) Click on Font Effects to open the Font Effects page.
5) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Font Color to open the last color palette used.
6) Select a color palette to use from the available palettes in the drop-down list.
7) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and theselected color is applied to the selected text.
8) Click OK to save the color change and close the Character dialog.

Character panel on the Sidebar
1) Select a text box, or switch on text mode for a Draw object.
2) Highlight the text characters where the text color is going to be changed.
3) Open the Character panel in the Properties deck on the Sidebar (Figure 304).
4) Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of Font Color to open the color palette last used.
5) Select a color palette to use from the available palettes in the drop-down list.
304 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

6) Click on a color from the colors displayed in the color palette, or select a color that has
been previously used from those displayed in Recent. The color palette closes and theselected color is applied to the selected text.

Figure 303: Character dialog — Font Effects page

Figure 304: Character panel in Properties deck on Sidebar

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 305

Figure 305: Pick a Color dialog

Creating colors
Using Pick a Color dialog
1) Select an object, or text and open the Pick a Color dialog (Figure 305) using one of thefollowing methods:– Open the Area dialog, then click on Color to open the Color page and click on Pick.
– Open the Area panel in Properties deck on the Sidebar, click on the triangle ▼to theright of Fill Color to open the color palette and click on Custom Color at the bottomof the color palette.
– Open the Line dialog, then open a color palette in Color and click on Custom Colorat the bottom of the color palette.
– Open the Line panel in Properties deck on the Sidebar, click on the triangle ▼to theright of Line Color to open the color palette and click on Custom Color at the bottomof the color palette.
– Open the Character dialog, then open a color palette in Font color and click on
Custom Color at the bottom of the color palette.
– Open the Character panel in Properties deck on the Sidebar, click on the triangle▼to the right of Font Color to open the color palette and click on Custom Color at
the bottom of the color palette.
2) Select a color range on the vertical color bar in the Pick a Color dialog that approximately
matches the custom color being created.

306 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

3) Click and drag the small target circle in the color box until the color matches the custom
color required. The values for RGB, HSB and CMYK change as the small target circle isdragged around the color box helping to create the exact color, if the color values are
known.
4) Alternatively, if the color values, or hex number, are known, enter these values in theappropriate text box. The values in all the text boxes change to match the new values.
For example, enter HSB values, the RGB, CMYK and Hex values also change to match.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Pick a Color dialog.

Notes
When using the Line or Character dialog to open the Pick a Color dialog, thecustom color created cannot be saved into the Custom Palette, or renamed witha more meaningful name. The custom color created is named using the hex valuethat is displayed in the Pick a Color dialog. Only the Area dialog has the ability torename custom colors and save custom colors into the Custom Palette.
LibreOffice uses the RGB color model for printing in color. The RGB values of a
selected color are displayed below the preview boxes.

Using Area dialog
1) Open the Area dialog and click on Color to open the Color page.
2) In New, enter the RGB values or, if known, the Hex value into the text boxes. The color
changes in the preview box to match the values entered.
3) Alternatively, in New, use the minus and plus signs for the RGB values to decrease or
increase the values. The color changes in the preview box to match the values entered.
4) Click OK to change the color and close the Area dialog.

Adding custom colors
1) Make sure the Area dialog is open at the Color page.
2) Select the custom color that is displayed in Recent Colors.
3) In Custom Palette, click on Add to open a Name dialog.
4) Enter a new name for the color in the text box.
5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Name dialog. The custom color appears in
the Custom Palette.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog.

Renaming custom colors
Only a custom color can be renamed using the Area dialog as follows:
1) Make sure the Area dialog is open at the Color page.
2) Select the custom color that is displayed in the Custom Palette.
3) Click on Add to open a Name dialog.
4) Enter a new name for the color in the text box,5) Click OK to save the changes and close the Name dialog. The custom color appears in
the Custom Palette.
6) Click OK to close the Area dialog.
Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 307

NotesRenaming a custom color does not actually rename the custom color, but adds
the custom color to the Custom Palette with a new name.
It is important to use a memorable names for custom colors so that they can beeasily recognized in the Custom Palette. By default, a custom color is given ahex number, which makes it difficult identifying colors when there is more than
one custom color.

Deleting custom colors
Only a custom color can be deleted using the Area dialog as follows:
1) Make sure the Area dialog is open at the Color page.
2) Select the custom color that is displayed in the Custom Palette.
3) Click on Delete. There is no confirmation given when deleting custom colors.
4) Click OK to close the Area dialog.

Bézier curves
In LibreOffice, Bézier2 curves can be used in a drawing. A curve is defined by means of a startpoint, an end point, and, where necessary, control points. For points on the curve the terms
Nodes and Anchors are often used. For more information and an explanation of the mathematicalbackground of Bézier curves, see https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bézier_curve.
Bézier curves are very useful for experimenting with the shape and form of curves. In point modethe curve alignment can be changed by dragging the points with the cursor. In the example
shown in Figure 306, the curve leaves the start point P0 in the direction of the first control point
P1 and arrives at the end point P3 from the direction of the second control point P2. The moredistant a control point is from the start or end point, the smaller the curvature at that point.

Figure 306: Example of a Bezier curve
1)
2)
3)
4)

2

Start point (P0)Control point (P1)
End point (P3)Control point (P2)

Bézier curves were invented by Pierre Bézier, an engineer working with the Renault car manufacturer,
who developed the technique in the 1960s. The technology was intended to make modeling thesurface of vehicles easier.

308 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 307: Edit Points toolbar

Drawing Bézier curves1) Click on Curve in the Curves and Polygons panel in the Shapes deck on the Sidebar, orCurves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar.
2) Click at the start point for the curve and drag the cursor to the approximate position of theend point for the curve.
3) Release the cursor and drag the end point of the curve to its end position.
4) Double-click when the end position of the curve is reached and a curve is drawn. The arcof the curve is determined by the distance dragged to create the end point.
5) Switch to points mode using one of the following methods:– Go to Edit > Points on the Menu bar.
– If added to the toolbar, click on Points on the Drawing toolbar.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F8.
6) Open the Edit Points toolbar (Figure 307) using one of the following methods. The Edit
Points toolbar does not become visible until a point has been selected on a curve.
– Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Edit Points.
– Use the keyboard shortcut F8.
– If added to the toolbar, click on Points on the Drawing toolbar.
7) Click once on the curve to display the start and end points. The start point of the curve islarger than the end point.
8) Click on a start or end point to display the control points. Control points appear at the endof a dashed line connected to the selected point, as shown in Figure 308.
9) Click on the control point and drag it to a new position to change the shape of the curve.
10) When the shape of the curve is correct, release the mouse button to fix the curve.
11) Click anywhere on the workspace to deselect the curve and stop editing points.

Edit Points tools
After the initial opening of the Edit Points toolbar, when an object is selected that has been
converted to a curve or polygon, the toolbar is displayed. The tools available on the Edit Points
toolbar allow the editing of a Bézier curve and changing of the curve shape. A point on a Bézier
curve has to be selected for all the tools on the Edit Points toolbar to become available.
Move Points
Click and drag on a point to move it to another location.
– The curve on both sides of the point follows the movement and changes shape as theselected point changes position.
– Click and drag on the curve between points to move the entire curve without distorting
the form.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 309

Insert Points
Activates the insert mode when selected and inserts smooth points onto a curve. Insert
mode remains active after inserting points. Select Move Points to deactivate insert mode.
– The inserted point can be moved while insert mode is activated.
– If a corner or symmetrical point is required, insert a smooth point first and convert the
point to a corner or symmetrical point.
Delete Points
Deletes selected points. If several points are to be deleted, hold down the Shift key whilst
selecting points and before clicking on Delete Points.
Convert To Curve
Converts a curve into a straight line or a straight line into a curve (Figure 308).
– Select a single point and the curved segment after the point converts to a straight
line, or coverts a straight line segment to a curve after the point.
– When converting a segment from a curve to a straight line, each point at each end of
the segment becomes a control point similar to the start or end point.
– When converting a segment from a straight line to a curve, each control point at eachend of the segment becomes a smooth point.

Figure 308: Example converting curved segment to line
Close Bézier
Closes a freeform line or curve by connecting the start point with the end point creating an
object with area fill.
Split Curve
Splits a curve into two or more curves. Select a point or points and click on Split Curve tocreate separate segments of a curve. Deselect the curve, then select a segment to moveor edit it.
Corner Point
Converts a selected point into a corner point (Figure 309). Corner points have two
movable control points independent from each other allowing a corner to be created in a
curve.

Figure 309: Example of a corner point
310 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Smooth Transition
Converts a corner or symmetrical point into a smooth point (Figure 310). Both control
points are parallel aligned and can only move simultaneously. The control points may
differ in length, allowing the curvature degree to be varied.

Figure 310: Example of a smooth transition point
Symmetric Transition
Converts a corner point or a smooth point into a symmetrical point (Figure 311). Bothcontrol points are parallel aligned having the same length. These control points can only
be moved simultaneously and the degree of curvature is the same in both directions.

Figure 311: Example of a symmetric transition point
Eliminate Points
Allows selection of several points before using the Delete Points tool. This is useful whendeleting a straight line segment to create a complete curve.

Adding comments
Comments in Draw are similar to comments in Writer and Calc. For more information about
adding, navigating, and replying to comments, see the Getting Started Guide.
Comments in Draw cannot be printed. To reply to a comment in Draw, a new comment has to be
added.
1) Go to Insert > Comment on the Menu bar and a comment box (Figure 312) appears in
the upper left-hand corner of a drawing. Draw automatically adds the user name and dateat the bottom of the comment and places a comment marker on the drawing page.
2) Type or paste a comment into the comment text box.
3) To apply basic formatting to the text, right-click on the text and select the formatting option
from the context menu.
4) To delete a comment, use one of the following methods:– Right-click in the comment box and select Delete from the context menu.
– Right-click on the comment marker and select Delete from the context menu.
– Click on the triangle ▼ in the bottom right of the comment box and select Delete fromthe context menu.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 311

Figure 312: Example comment in Draw
5) To move a comment, click on the comment marker and drag it to a new position.
6) To hide comments, use one of the following methods:– Go to View on the Menu bar and deselect Comments to hide the comment and thecomment marker.
– Click on the drawing outside of the comment to hide the comment. The comment
marker remains visible.
7) To show comments, go to View > Comments on the Menu bar and click on the comment
marker.

Note
For the user name and initials to appear in a comment, enter the user data inTools > Options > LibreOffice > User Data dialog (macOS LibreOffice >Preferences > LibreOffice > User Data). If more than one person edits the
document, each author is automatically allocated a different background color.

Coordinate system
X and Y axes
The x-axis is the horizontal position of an object and the y-axis is the vertical position of an
object. The rulers do not show a minus sign if there are negative coordinates. However, theminus sign for negative coordinates is shown in the position field in the Status Bar and the
Position and Size dialog.

Workspace
The Workspace in Draw is larger than the drawing page. The area outside the drawing page is
one page width right and left and a half page above and below the drawing page. The size of thedrawing page is indicated by highlighted portions in the horizontal and vertical rulers.
Draw objects can be drawn partly or wholly outside the drawing page and these objects are
saved with the drawing. However, when the drawing is printed or exported, any object or portionof an object not on the drawing page is not included. This allows the Workspace area around thedrawing page to be used for drafts when creating objects.

312 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Object position
The coordinates of objects and snap guides are shown relative to the origin. The default origin for
coordinates (0.00/0.00 position) is the top-left corner of the drawing page without margins or the
top left corner of the drawing page where the margins intersect. To change the default origin,click and drag the intersection of the rulers in the top left corner of the Workspace to the desired
position. Guide lines appear as the intersection is dragged from its default origin to its new
position. This origin setting is only for the current view and is not saved in the document.
The area inside the default origin is the area used for the grid when the option Snap to Grid andDisplay Grid are selected.
To reset the default origin back to its original setting at the top-left corner of the page,
double-click in the top-left corner on the Workspace where the horizontal and vertical rulers
meet.

Accuracy
Draw internally uses integer values in 1/100 mm. Therefore, for example, it is not possible to get
an exact position for 1/8 inch. Also, many dialog fields are restricted to two decimals.
To work with the maximum possible accuracy, go to Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw >General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Draw > General) and set the option
Unit of measurement to Millimeter. The rulers show metric units after this option has been
selected, To use another measurement unit for the rulers, right-click on a ruler and select themeasurement unit from the context menu. The horizontal and vertical rulers can have different
measurement units.

Chapter 11, Advanced Draw Techniques | 313

Draw Guide 7.5

Chapter 12,
User Interface Variants

Introduction
By default, commands and tools used in LibreOffice Draw are grouped in a user interface
consisting of cascading menus and toolbars. The functions and use of cascading menus andtoolbars are described in the previous chapters of this user guide.
This chapter describes the user interface variants that are available for LibreOffice Draw. A user
then has the option to select a user interface that suits their requirements and methods ofcreating drawings in LibreOffice Draw.

Note
When changing the user interface, the variant can be applied only to LibreOffice
Draw, or applied to all the modules in LibreOffice.

Selecting user interface
Select a user interface variant or switch between user interface variants as follows:
1) Go to View > User Interface on the Menu bar to open the Select Your Preferred User
Interface dialog (Figure 313).
2) In UI variants, select one of the variants. An example of the selected variant is shown in
the Preview box, along with a short description.
3) Click on Apply to Draw to apply the selected UI variant to LibreOffice Draw only, or clickon Apply to All to apply the selected UI variant to all LibreOffice modules. The
LibreOffice window changes to match the selected variant.
4) Click Close to close the dialog.

Figure 313: Select Your Preferred User Interface dialog

Note
If the option Enable experimental features has been selected in the Tools >Options > Advanced dialog (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice> Advanced), several more variants appear in UI variants. Being experimental,
these variants are not described in this chapter.

316 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 314: Standard User Interface

Standard Toolbar UIThe Standard Toolbar user interface is the default view when LibreOffice is installed and opened
for the first time. Figure 314 shows an example of the Standard Toolbar user interface forLibreOffice Draw, consisting of the following. For more information, see Chapter 1, Introducing
Draw.
• Menu bar at the top of the Workspace.
• Standard toolbar positioned below the Menu bar.
• Line and Filling toolbar positioned below the Standard toolbar.
• Drawing toolbar positioned vertically on the left of the Workspace.
• Sidebar positioned on the right of the Workspace.

Tabbed UIThe Tabbed user interface (Figure 315) provides a user interface similar to proprietary officeapplications, for example Microsoft Office. This user interface is divided into tabs, with each tab
displaying a set of tools grouped by context. The context changes depending on the object
selected and the LibreOffice module being used.
It includes a Menu bar, a Tab bar, and tool icons grouped in context normally used in LibreOffice
Draw. If the tool icons on a tab page do not fit into the width of the Draw window, a double
chevron >> appears at the right end of the row. Click on the double chevron >> to display theremaining tool icons.
On Windows and Linux operating systems, the Menu bar can be hidden or displayed by clicking
on Menubar at the left end of the Tab bar.

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 317

Figure 315: Tabbed User Interface

Figure 316: Tabbed UI Quick Menu
On the right of the Tab bar, a Quick menu (≡) (Figure 316) gives access to some commonly usedcommands and links. Some of the Quick menu items have submenus, indicated by a triangle ►or chevron ˃ on the right. The Quick menu is the same for all tabs.
On the left of the Tab bar, some commonly used tools are available – Menu bar; Open (Ctrl+O);
Save (Ctrl+S);Undo (Ctrl+Z); Redo (Ctrl+Y).
The Tabbed user interface is customized using the Notebookbar page of the Customize dialog(Figure 318) to show or hide the individual tools on the various tabs. Go to Tools > Customize
on the Menu bar to open the Customize dialog. For more information on customization of
LibreOffice, see the Getting Started Guide and the Writer Guide.

Note
When using the Tabbed user interface, the toolbars are removed from view. If it isnecessary, toolbars can be opened using View > Toolbars on the Menu bar or
Quick menu (≡) > Toolbars.

318 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 317: Customize dialog — Notebookbar page

Fixed tabs
File tab
The File tab (Figure Error: Reference source not found) provides tools and commands to create
new documents and manage existing documents. At right end of the File tab has two menus:• File menu providing the same commands as the tools available on the tab.
• Help menu providing links to a variety of resources.

Figure 318: Tabbed User Interface — File tab

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 319

Home tab
The Home tab (Figure 319) provides tools and commands for cutting, copying, pasting, inserting,and formatting all types of objects such as images, tables, charts, text, and so on. Also, drawing
styles can be applied and updated to match drawing requirements. The right end of the Hometab provides additional commands that are not available on the tab.

Figure 319: Tabbed User Interface — Home tab

Insert tab
The Insert tab (Figure 320) provides tools and commands for inserting many types of objects
such as images, tables, charts, and so on. The Insert menu at the right end of the Insert tab
provides some of the same tools and commands.

Figure 320: Tabbed User Interface — Insert tab

Layout tab
The Layout tab (Figure Error: Reference source not found) provides tools and commands forcreating a drawing layout. The Layout menu at the right end of the Layout tab provides some ofthe same tools and commands.

Figure 321: Tabbed User Interface — Layout tab

320 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Review tab
The Review tab (Figure 322) provides tools and commands for spell checking text; inserting anddeleting review comments; and redaction. The Review menu at the right end of the Review tab
provides additional text editing commands. Some of these commands appear only if Asian orComplex Text Layout are selected in Tools > Options > Language Settings > Languages(macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > Language Settings > Languages).

Figure 322: Tabbed User Interface — Review tab

View tab
The View tab (Figure 323) provides tools and commands for displaying a drawing on screen. The
View menu at the right end of the View tab provides additional tools for displaying a drawing onscreen.

Figure 323: Tabbed User Interface — View tab

Extension tab
The Extension tab (Figure 324) only has the tool for the Extension Manager. This allows
installation of extensions that are compatible for use in LibreOffice.

Figure 324: Tabbed User Interface — Extension tab

Tools tab
The Tools tab (Figure 325) provides several tools and commands for macros, color replacer, andmedia player. The Tools tab menu at the right end of the Tools tab provides some of the same
tools and commands, plus extra tools for organizing macros and dialogs, image map, data
sources, filter settings, extension manager, and options.
Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 321

Figure 325: Tabbed User Interface — Tools tab

Additional tabs
Additional tabs appear when an object in Draw is selected and are displayed between the View
and Extension tabs.

Draw tab
The Draw tab (Figure 326) is only available when a draw object is selected. It provides tools andcommands for editing, transforming, grouping, aligning, and distributing draw objects. The Draw
tab menu at the right end of the Draw tab provides a similar set of tools and commands forediting, transforming and converting draw objects.

Figure 326: Tabbed User Interface — Draw tab

Image tab
The Image tab (Figure 327) is only available when an image is selected such as a photograph,
Fontwork, OLE object, or QR code. It provides tools and commands for working with images,
including captions, cropping, borders and area styles and colors, anchors, wrapping, positioning,
and filtering. The Image tab menu at the right end of the Image tab provides links to dialogs forworking with images.

Figure 327: Tabbed User Interface — Image tab

322 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Object tab
The Object tab (Figure 328) is only available when an object, such as a chart, is selected. It
provides tools and commands to position, resize, choose colors and borders for the selected
object. The Object tab menu at the right end of the Object tab provides extra tools andcommands matching the type of object selected.

Figure 328: Tabbed User Interface — Object tab

Table tab
The Table tab (Figure 329) is only available when a table is selected. It provides tools andcommands to format a table to the drawing requirements. The Table tab menu at the right end of
the Table tab provides extra tools for editing a table.

Figure 329: Tabbed User Interface — Table tab

Media tab
The Media tab (Figure 330) is only available when a media object is selected. It provides tools
and commands for positioning and running an audio or video file. The Media tab menu at theright end of the Media tab provides extra tools for editing a media object.

Figure 330: Tabbed User Interface — Media tab

Single Toolbar & Sidebar UIWhen selected, the Single Toolbar and Sidebar user interfaces (Figure 331) only show theMenu bar with no toolbars. However, toolbars can be added to either user interface by going toView > Toolbars on the Menu bar and selecting the required toolbar from the options available.
For more information on toolbars, see Appendix B, Toolbars in this guide and the Getting Started
Guide.

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 323

Figure 331: Single Toolbar & Sidebar User Interfaces

Figure 332: Tabbed Compact User Interface

Tabbed Compact UIThe Tabbed Compact user interface has the same tabs as the Tabbed user interface, but thecommands on each tab are arranged as a single row of tools and commands. Some tools havedrop-down menus with extra options. Figure 332 shows an example of the File tab in the Tabbed
Compact user interface. When displayed, clicking on the double chevron >> on the right of thetab bar displays more tools and commands for editing an object.
The tab menu on the right of the Tabbed Compact user interface provides the same tools andcommands as the tab menus in the Tabbed user interface, see “Tabbed UI” on page 317 formore information.

324 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Groupedbar Compact UIThe Groupedbar Compact user interface provides access to tools and commands in groups
using icons for frequently used tools and drop-down menus for other tools and commands.
Figure 333 shows an example of a Compact Groupedbar user interface with a text object
selected in a Draw document and is organized as sets of tools and menus. The tools and menus
that are available change to suit the type of object selected. Clicking on the double chevron >>displays more tools for editing an object.

Figure 333: Groupedbar Compact User Interface

Contextual Single UIThe Contextual Single user interface displays a single toolbar for the type of selected object.
Figure 334 shows an example of Contextual Single user interface when a draw object isselected. Clicking on the double chevron >> displays more options for editing an object.

Figure 334: Contextual Single User Interface

Chapter 12, User Interface Variants | 325

Draw Guide 7.5

Appendix A,
Keyboard Shortcuts

Introduction
LibreOffice can be used without requiring a pointing device, such as a mouse or trackball, byusing the available keyboard shortcuts in Draw. Tasks as varied and complex as docking andundocking toolbars and windows, or changing the size or position of objects are accomplishedusing keyboard shortcuts. Although LibreOffice has an extensive set of keyboard shortcuts, each
LibreOffice module has keyboard shortcuts that are specific to that module.
For help with LibreOffice keyboard shortcuts, or using LibreOffice with a keyboard only, search
the LibreOffice Help using the “shortcut” or “accessibility” as keywords.
Keyboard shortcuts can also be defined in LibreOffice. For example, assign keyboard shortcuts
to standard Draw functions or macros and save them for use with Draw, or with other modules in
LibreOffice. To customize keyboard shortcuts, see the Getting Started Guide for more
information.

macOS keyboard shortcuts
Some keystrokes and menu items are different in macOS from those used in Windows or Linux
operating systems. This due to the way the different operating systems work and the different
types of keyboards used. Also, labelling on the keyboards may vary depending on the age of acomputer and style of keyboard being used. The following information shows the most common
variations in macOS for keyboard shortcuts and labelling.

Shift, Control and Alt keys
Windows or LinuxmacOS

Control or Ctrl

⌘ or Cmd or CommandAlt⌥ or Option or Alt

Shift or ⇧Shift or ⇧Caps Lock⇪ or Caps LockControl or Ctrl

⌃ or Control or Ctrl

Home and End keys
Windows or Linux

macOS

Home

Fn+Left ArrowEnd

Fn+Right Arrow

Page Up and Page Down
Windows or LinuxmacOS

Screen Up

Fn+Up Arrow

Page Up⌥ or Option or
Alt+Fn+Up Arrow

Screen Down

Fn+Down Arrow

Page Down⌥ or Option or
Alt+Fn+Down Arrow

328 | LibreOffice Draw User GuideNote
Some keyboard shortcuts are not available for macOS computers and are
indicated in the following tables by a blank cell.

Draw function key and keyboard shortcuts
Draw function keys
Windows
Linux

macOS

EffectF1

F1

Opens LibreOffice Draw help.

F2

F2

Switches to text edit mode and opens the Text Formatting
toolbar.

F3F3Enters a group of objects for editing.

Shift+F3

Shift+F3

Opens the Duplicate dialog of a selected object.

Ctrl+F3⌘+F3Exits a group of objects.

F4

F4Opens the Position and Size dialog of a selected object.

F5F5Opens the Navigator.

F6

F6

Forward navigation of the emphasis within the on screen
elements.

Shift+F6

Shift+F6

Backward navigation of the emphasis within the on
screen elements.

F7

F7

Starts the spelling checker. Only available in text editing
mode.

Shift+F7

Shift+F7

Switches on or off the automatic spell checking. Only
available in text editing mode.

Ctrl+F7⌘+F7

Opens the Thesaurus dialog for the language being
used. Only available in text editing mode.

F8

F8Opens the Edit Points toolbar.

Ctrl+Shift+F8⌘+Shift+F8

Fits text to frame of a selected object.

Shift+F10

Shift+F10

Opens the context menu of a selected object.

F11

⌘+T

Opens the Styles deck on the Sidebar.

Draw keyboard shortcuts
Windows
Linux

macOS

EffectPlus (+)

Fn+Shift++Zooms in.

Minus (-)

Fn+––

Zooms out.

Times (×) on
number pad

Times (*) on
numeric keyboard

Fits the drawing to fill the Workspace view.

Divide (÷) on
number pad

Divide (/) on
numeric keyboard

Zooms in on the selected object.

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 329

Ctrl+Shift+G⌘+Shift+G

Shift+Ctrl+Alt⌘+Shift+⌥+G+GGroups selected objects.
Ungroups selected group.

Ctrl+click⌘+click

Enters a group to edit individual objects in the group.
Click outside the group to return to normal view.

Ctrl+Shift+K⌘+Shift+K

Combines selected objects.

Ctrl+Shift+
Alt+K⌘+Shift+⌥+K

Splits a selected object that has been combined from agroup of two or more objects.

Ctrl++⌘++

Brings current selection forward.

Ctrl+Shift++⌘+Shift++

Brings current selection to the front.

Ctrl+-⌘+-

Sends current selection backward.

Ctrl+Shift+-⌘+Shift+-Sends current selection to the back.

Page Up⌥+Fn+Up Arrow Switches to previous page. No function on the first page.

Page Down⌥+Fn+Down
Arrow

Ctrl+Page Up⌘+Fn+Up Arrow Switches to previous layer.

Ctrl+Page Down⌘+Fn+Down
Arrow

Switches to next layer.

Arrow

Arrow

Moves a selected object in the direction of the arrow.

Ctrl+Arrow

Ctrl+Arrow

Moves the page view in the direction of the arrow.

Left Arrow

Left Arrow

With Pages Pane selected, switches to the previous pagein a drawing. No function on the first page.

Right Arrow

Right Arrow

With Pages Pane selected, switches to the next page in a
drawing. No function on the last page.

Shift

Shift

When selecting objects, adds or removes object to orfrom a selection of objects.

Shift

Shift

Hold down Shift then click and drag a selection handle
when resizing an object to maintain the proportions of theobject.

Shift

Shift

Hold down the Shift key while moving a selected object
to constrain the movement in multiples of 45 degrees.

Shift

Shift

Hold down the Shift key before selecting several
adjacent objects or characters. Click at the start of a
selection, move to the end of the selection.

Ctrl

⌘

Hold down the Ctrl (⌘) key,then click and drag aselected object to create a copy of the object.

Alt⌥

Hold down the Alt (⌥) key and draw or resize an
object from the centre of the object.

Alt⌥

Hold down the Alt (⌥) key when selecting an object
that is behind the currently selected object.

Alt+ Shift⌥+Shift

Hold down the Alt (⌥)+Shift keys when selecting an
object that is in front of the currently selected object.

330 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Switches to next page. No function on the last page.

Tab

Tab

Selects objects in the order in which they were created.

Shift+Tab

Shift+Tab

Selects objects in the reverse order in which they werecreated.

Esc

Esc

Exits current mode.

Enter

Enter

Enters text mode if a text object in the drawing isselected.

Ctrl+Enter⌘+Enter

Inserts a new page after the selected page in a drawing.

Home

Fn+Left Arrow

Selects the first page in a drawing.

End

Fn+Right Arrow Selects the last page in a drawing.

Editing text keyboard shortcuts
Windows
Linux

macOS

EffectCtrl+-⌘+-

Inserts a custom hyphen (soft hyphen) in text at the
cursor position.

Ctrl+Shift+-⌘+Shift+-

Inserts a non-breaking hyphen (hard hyphen) in text at
the cursor position.

Ctrl+Shift+Space⌘+Shift+Space

Inserts a non-breaking space, which is not used for
hyphenation and is not expanded if the text is justified.

Shift+Enter

Shift+Enter

Inserts a line break without paragraph change.

Left arrow

Left arrow

Moves the cursor one character to the left.

Shift+Left
arrow

Shift+Left
arrow

Moves the cursor one character to the left and selects thecharacter.

Ctrl+Leftarrow⌥+Left arrow

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous word.

Ctrl+Shift+
Left arrow⌥+Shift+Left
arrow

Moves the cursor to the left and selects the word on theleft.

Right arrow

Right arrow

Moves the cursor one character to the right.

Shift+Right
arrow

Shift+Rightarrow

Moves the cursor one character to the right and selects
the character.

Ctrl+Right
arrow⌥+Right arrow Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word.

Ctrl+Shift+
Right arrow⌥+Shift+Right Moves the cursor to the right and selects the word on thearrowright.

Up arrow

Up arrow

Moves the cursor up one line.

Shift+Up arrow Shift+Up arrow Moves the cursor up one line in the text and selects thelines of text.
Ctrl+Up arrow⌥+Up arrow

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the paragraph.

Ctrl+Shift+Up
arrow⌥+Shift+Up
arrow

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the paragraph.
Selects the text in the paragraph from the cursor position
to the beginning of the paragraph.

Down arrow

Down arrow

Moves the cursor down one line.

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 331

Shift+Down
arrow⌥+Down arrow

Moves the cursor down one line in the text and selects
the lines of text.

Ctrl+Down
arrow⌘+Down arrow

Moves the cursor to the end of the paragraph.

Ctrl+Shift+
Down arrow⌥+Shift+Down
arrow

Moves the cursor to the end of the paragraph. Selects
the text in the paragraph from the cursor position to theend of the paragraph.

Ctrl+Backspace ⌘+Backspace
Ctrl+Shift+
Backspace⌘+Shift+
Backspace

Deletes the text from the cursor position to the beginningof the word.
Deletes the text from the cursor position to the beginningof the sentence.

Menu function key and keyboard shortcuts
Function key and keyboard shortcuts listed in the following tables are available in each menu
category on the Menu bar. The tables give menu item or sub-item, operating system validity, andeffect or purpose of the shortcut.

Note
The menus listed below are in the same order as displayed on the Menu bar fromleft to right.

LibreOffice
The LibreOffice menu is only available for macOS computers.
Menu item or sub-item

macOS

EffectPreferences⌘+,

Opens the Options dialog.

Hide LibreOffice⌘+H

Temporarily hides LibreOffice, but does
not close LibreOffice.

Exit LibreOffice⌘+Q

Closes LibreOffice. Make sure all
LibreOffice files are saved before using.

File menu
Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectNew

Ctrl+N⌘+N

Opens a new drawing.

Templates

Shift+Ctrl+N ⌘+Shift+NOpen

Ctrl+OManageTemplates

Shift+Ctrl+N ⌘+Shift+N

Save

Ctrl+S

Save As

Ctrl+Shift+S ⌘+Shift+S

332 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

⌘+O

⌘+S

Opens the Drawings category in the
Templates dialog.
Opens a file browser allowing navigation
to a folder and file selection.
Opens the Drawings category in the
Templates dialog.
Saves the open drawing.
Opens a file browser allowing navigation
to a folder and save the open drawing as
a new file.

PrintCtrl+P⌘+P

Opens the Print dialog allowing selectionof how the drawing is printed.

Exit LibreOffice

Ctrl+Q⌘+Q

Closes LibreOffice. Make sure all files are
saved before using.

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectUndo

Ctrl+Z⌘+Z

Undoes the previous editing action.

Redo

Ctrl+Y⌘+Y

Reverses the action of the last Undo
command.

Cut

Ctrl+X⌘+X

Deletes the selected object and places iton the clipboard.

Copy

Ctrl+C⌘+C

Copies the selected object to the
clipboard.

Paste

Ctrl+V⌘+V

Inserts the contents of the clipboard at thelocation of the cursor replacing any
selected text or objects.

Paste Special >Paste Special

Ctrl+Shift+V ⌘+Shift+V

Pastes the contents of the clipboard at the
cursor position in a format that is specified
using the Paste Special dialog.

Duplicate

Shift+F3

Shift+F3

When an object is selected, opens the
Duplicate dialog providing options for
duplicating a selected object.

Select All

Ctrl+A⌘+A

Selects all the pages and objects in a
drawing.

Find

Ctrl+F⌘+F

Opens the Find toolbar.

Replace

Ctrl+H⌘+⌥+F

Opens the Find and Replace dialog.

Points

F8

F8Opens the Edit Points toolbar if there is anobject on the drawing that uses editable
points, for example a freeform line.

Edit Mode

Ctrl+Shift+M ⌘+Shift+M

Allows a read only drawing to be edited if
the user has writer permission.

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

EffectRulersCtrl+Shift+R ⌘+Shift+R

SidebarCtrl+F5⌘+F5

Opens or closes the Sidebar.

Styles

F11⌘+T

Opens or closes the Styles deck on the
Sidebar.

Navigator

F5

F5Opens the Navigator dialog.

Edit Menu

View menu
macOS

Switches the rulers off and on in theWorkspace.

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 333

Insert menu
Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectText Box

F2

F2

Switches to text edit mode and opens the
Text Formatting toolbar.

Comment

Ctrl+Alt+C⌘+⌥+C

Inserts a new comment box onto theselected page.

Hyperlink

Ctrl+K⌘+K

Opens the Hyperlink dialog.

Insert nonbreaking space

Ctrl+Shift+Space⌘+Shift+Space

Inserts a non-breaking space at the cursor
position.

Insert Narrow
No-break Space

Alt+Shift+Space⌥+Shift+
Space

Inserts a narrow non-breaking space at
the cursor position.

⌘+/

Inserts a narrow no-width optional breakat the cursor position.

No-width Optional
Ctrl+/BreakFormat menu
Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectBold

Ctrl+B⌘+B

Applies Bold format to selected text.

ItalicCtrl+I⌘+I

Applies Italic format to selected text.

Superscript

Ctrl+Shift+P⌘+Shift+P

Reduces the font size of the selected text
and raises the text above the baseline.

Subscript

Ctrl+Shift+B ⌘+Shift+B

Reduces the font size of the selected text
and lowers the text below the baseline.

Increase Size

Ctrl+]⌘+]

Increases the point size of selected text.

Decrease Size

Ctrl+[⌘+[

Decreases the point size of selected text.

Line Spacing 1

Ctrl+1⌘+1

Sets the line spacing in a paragraph to asingle line.

Line Spacing 5

Ctrl+5⌘+5

Sets the line spacing in a paragraph toone and half lines.

Line Spacing 2

Ctrl+2⌘+2

Sets the line spacing in a paragraph totwo lines.

Left

Ctrl+L⌘+L

Sets the paragraph alignment to leftaligned.

Center

Ctrl+E⌘+E

Sets the paragraph alignment to centeraligned.

Right

Ctrl+R⌘+R

Sets the paragraph alignment to rightaligned.

Justified

Ctrl+J⌘+J

Sets the paragraph alignment to justified.

Clear Direct
Formatting

Ctrl+M⌘+M

Removes direct formatting that has been
applied without using styles.

Edit Style

Alt+P

⌥+P

Opens the Graphic Styles dialog to edit a
selected style.

334 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Manage Styles

F11

Position and Size F4⌘+T

Opens or closes the Styles deck on the
Sidebar.

F4

Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
selected object.

macOS

EffectShape menu
Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

Bring to Front

Ctrl+Shift++ ⌘+Shift++

Bring Forward

Ctrl++⌘++

Moves a selected object in front of theforward object.

Send Backward

Ctrl+-⌘+-

Moves a selected object behind the
backward object.

Send to Back

Ctrl+Shift+- ⌘+Shift+-

Moves a selected object to the back ofother objects.

Group

Ctrl+Shift+G ⌘+Shift+GGroups selected objects.

Ungroup

Ctrl+Alt+
Shift+G⌘+⌥+Shift+G

Ungroups selected group.

Enter GroupF3F3Enters a group of objects for editing.

Exit Group

Ctrl+F3⌘+F3Exits a group of objects.

CombineCtrl+Shift+K ⌘+Shift+K

Combines two or more selected objects
into a single shape.

Split

Ctrl+Shift+
Alt+K⌘+⌥+Shift+K

Splits a combined object into individual
objects.

Duplicate

Shift+F3

Shift+F3

When an object is selected, opens the
Duplicate dialog providing options for
duplicating a selected object.

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectSpelling

F7

Automatic Spell
Checking

Shift+F7

Shift+F7

Switches on or off the automatic spell
checking. Only available in text editing
mode.

Thesaurus

Ctrl+F7⌘+F7

Opens the thesaurus dialog for the
language being used. Only available intext editing mode.

Extension
Manager

Ctrl+Alt+E⌘+⌥+E

Opens the Extension Manager dialog.

Options

Alt+F12

Moves a selected object to the front ofother objects.

Tools menu

Starts spelling checker. Only available intext editing mode.

Opens the Options LibreOffice dialog.

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 335

Windows menu
Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectCloses Window

Ctrl+W⌘+W

Closes the active window. If there is only
one window, closes LibreOffice.

Menu item or
sub-itemWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectLibreOffice Help

F1

F1

Opens a browser application at the
LibreOffice Help pages.

SearchCommands

Shift+Esc

Help menu

Opens a dialog to search for a command.

General function key and keyboard shortcuts
Opening menus and menu items
Windows
Linux

macOS

Press the Alt key first, then select the underlined characterof the menu to be opened. The <?> is the underlined
character in the menu. For example, Alt+F opens the Filemenu.
With the menu open, menu items have an underlined
character. To access these menu items directly, press theunderlined character key. Where two menu items have thesame underlined character, press the character key again to
move to the next item.
If an item in a menu has no underlined character, click on themenu item directly.

Alt+<?>(Windows only)
F6+<?>(Linux only)

Esc

EffectEsc

Closes an open menu.

F6

F6

Repeatedly pressing F6 cycles the focus through thefollowing objects:
Menu bar (Windows and Linux operating systems only)
Each toolbar from top to bottom and from left to right
Each free window from left to right
Drawing

Shift+F6

Shift+F6

Repeatedly pressing Shift+F6 cycles the focus in the
opposite direction.

Ctrl+F6⌘+F6

Cycles the focus back to the drawing.

F10

Switches the access on or off for the Menu bar.

Accessing Menu bar commands• Press F6 selects the first item on the Menu bar (the File menu).
• Press the right arrow selects the next menu to the right.
336 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide• Press the left arrow selects the previous menu to the left.
• Press the Home and End keys selects the first or last item on the Menu bar.
• Press the down arrow to open a selected menu. An additional press on the down arrowor up arrow moves the selection through the menu commands.
• Press the right arrow to open any submenus on the selected menu. Submenus areindicated by a triangle ► or chevron ˃ next to the menu item.
• Press Enter to execute the selected menu command.

Accessing toolbar commands• Press F6 repeatedly until the first tool on a toolbar is selected.
• Using the right and left arrows selects a tool on a horizontal toolbar, or the up and downarrows selects a tool on a vertical toolbar.
• Pressing the Home key selects the first tool on a toolbar, or the End key selects the lasttool on a toolbar.
• Pressing Enter activates the selected tool.
• Pressing the right arrow opens any sub-toolbar on a selected toolbar. Sub-toolbars areindicated by a triangle ▼ next to the tool.
• Pressing Ctrl+Enter inserts a selected draw object. The draw object is placed in thecenter of the drawing, with a predefined size.

Controlling dialogs
When any dialog is open, one element (for example a button or option field) indicates focus byhighlighting, a check mark, or a dotted box around the field or button name.
Windows
Linux

EffectEnter

Activates the selected option. Where no option is selected, Enter isthe equivalent to clicking on OK.

Esc

Closes a dialog without saving any changes made while it was open,
the equivalent to selecting Cancel.

Up/Down arrow keys

Moves focus up and down a list.
Increases or decreases the value of a variable.
Moves focus vertically within a section of dialog.

Left/Right arrow
keys

Moves focus horizontally within a section of a dialog.

Tab

Advances focus to the next section or element of a dialog.

Shift+Tab

Moves the focus to the previous section or element in a dialog.

Alt+Down Arrow

Shows the options available in a drop-down list.

Spacebar

Checks or selects an empty checkbox.
Clears or deselects a checked checkbox.

Toolbar function key and keyboard shortcuts
Draw provides several toolbars for the creation and editing of drawings. Some tools on the Draw
toolbars can be activated using a function key, or keyboard shortcut.
Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 337

Note
The Draw toolbars are listed in the same order displayed in the context menu that
opens when View > Toolbars is selected on the Menu bar.

Drawing
Tool nameWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectInsert Text Box

F2

F2

Switches to text edit mode and opens the
Text Formatting toolbar.

Edit Points

F8

F8Opens the Edit Points toolbar if there is anobject on the drawing that uses editable
points, for example a freeform line.

Windows
Linux

macOS

EffectFind and Replace Ctrl+H⌘+⌥+H

Finds and replaces all instances of text ina drawing.

macOS

EffectFind
Tool nameForm Design
Tool nameWindows
Linux

Bring to Front

Ctrl+Shift++ ⌘+Shift++

Moves a selected object to the front ofother objects.

Send to Back

Ctrl+Shift+- ⌘+Shift+-

Moves a selected object to the back ofother objects.

Group

Ctrl+Shift+G ⌘+Shift+GGroups selected objects.

Ungroup

Ctrl+Alt+
Shift+G⌘+⌥+Shift+G Ungroups selected group.

Enter GroupF3F3Enters a group of objects for editing.

Exit Group

Ctrl+F3⌘+F3Exits a group of objects.

Windows
Linux

macOS

EffectF4

Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
selected object.

Image
Tool name

Position and Size F4

Moves a selected object to the front ofother objects.

Bring to Front

Ctrl+Shift++ ⌘+Shift++

Bring Forward

Ctrl++⌘++

Moves a selected object in front of theforward object.

Send Backward

Ctrl+-⌘+-

Moves a selected object behind the
backward object.

338 | LibreOffice Draw User GuideSend to Back

Ctrl+Shift+- ⌘+Shift+-

Moves a selected object to the back ofother objects.

Line and Filling
Tool nameWindows
Linux

Position and Size F4

macOS

EffectF4

Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
selected object.
Moves a selected object to the front ofother objects.

Bring to Front

Ctrl+Shift++ ⌘+Shift++

Bring Forward

Ctrl++⌘++

Moves a selected object in front of theforward object.

Send Backward

Ctrl+-⌘+-

Moves a selected object behind the
backward object.

Send to Back

Ctrl+Shift+- ⌘+Shift+-

Styles

F11⌘+T

Opens the Styles deck on the Sidebar.

Tool nameWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectNew

Ctrl+N⌘+N

Opens a new drawing.

Templates

Ctrl+Shift+N ⌘+Shift+NOpen

Ctrl+O⌘+O

Opens the Open file browser to allow
navigation to a folder and selection of adrawing.

Save

Ctrl+S⌘+S

Saves the open document.

Save As

Ctrl+Shift+S ⌘+Shift+S

Opens the Save as file browser to savethe open drawing as a new drawing.

Edit Mode

Ctrl+Shift+M ⌘+Shift+M

Switches on edit mode when a drawing isin read only mode.

Print

Ctrl+P⌘+P

Opens the Print dialog to select how toprint the drawing.

Cut

Ctrl+X⌘+X

Deletes the selected object and places iton the clipboard.

Copy

Ctrl+C⌘+C

Copies the selected object to the
clipboard.

Paste

Ctrl+V⌘+V

Places the object on the clipboard into the
document.

Clear

Ctrl+M⌃+M

Removes direct formatting that has been
applied without using styles.

Undo

Ctrl+Z⌘+Z

Undoes the previous editing action.

Redo

Ctrl+Y⌘+Y

Reverses the action of the last Undo
command.

Moves a selected object to the back ofother objects.

Standard

Opens the Templates dialog to create a
new drawing using a template.

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 339

Spelling

F7

F7

Starts the spelling checker. Only available
in text editing mode.

Auto Spellcheck

Shift+F7

Shift+F7

Switches on or off the automatic spell
checking. Only available in text editingmode.

Text Box

F2

Switches to text edit mode and opens the
Text Formatting toolbar.

Insert Hyperlink

Ctrl+K

Opens the Hyperlink dialog.
Opens the Position and Size dialog of a
selected object.

Position and Size F4Edit Points

Opens the Edit Points toolbar if there is anobject on the drawing that uses editable
points, for example a freeform line.

F8Standard (Viewing Mode)
Tool nameWindows
Linux

Save As

Ctrl+Shift+S ⌘+Shift+S

Opens the Save as file browser so you
can save the open document as a new
document.

Edit Mode

Ctrl+Shift+M ⌘+Shift+M

Switches on edit mode when a document
is in read only mode.

Print

Ctrl+P⌘+P

Opens the Print dialog so that you canselect how you want to print the
document.

Copy

Ctrl+C⌘+C

Copies the selected object to the
clipboard.

⌘+⌥+F

Opens the Find and Replace dialog.

Find and Replace Ctrl+H

macOS

EffectText Formatting
Tool nameWindows
Linux

macOS

EffectIncrease

Ctrl+]⌘+]

Increases the point size of selected text.

Decrease

Ctrl+[⌘+[

Decreases the point size of selected text.

Bold

Ctrl+B⌘+B

Applies Bold format to selected text.

ItalicCtrl+I⌘+I

Applies Italic format to selected text.

Superscript

Ctrl+Shift+P ⌘+Shift+P

Reduces the font size of the selected text
and raises the text above the baseline.

Subscript

Ctrl+Shift+B ⌘+Shift+B

Reduces the font size of the selected text
and lowers the text below the baseline.

Clear

Ctrl+M⌃+M

Removes direct formatting that has been
applied without using styles.

Left

Ctrl+L⌘+L

Sets the paragraph alignment to leftaligned.

340 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Center

Ctrl+E⌘+E

Sets the paragraph alignment to centeraligned.

Right

Ctrl+R⌘+R

Sets the paragraph alignment to rightaligned.

Justified

Ctrl+J⌘+J

Sets the paragraph alignment to justified.

Select All

Ctrl+A⌘+A

Selects all the text in a text box.

Appendix A, Keyboard Shortcuts | 341

Draw Guide 7.5

Appendix B,
Toolbars

Introduction
Draw provides several toolbars for creating drawings. Each toolbar has a default set of tools
when LibreOffice is installed on a computer. To improve the usability of a toolbar, additional tools
can be added, see “Editing toolbars” on page 347 for more information.

Note
The toolbar icons displayed in this user guide may differ from what is displayed on
a computer screen. Toolbar icons depend on the computer operating systembeing used and how LibreOffice has been set up. For more information on
customizing LibreOffice and the toolbars, see the Getting Started Guide.

Using toolbars
To display and make a toolbar active, go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar. A submenu openswith an alphabetical list of toolbars available for creating drawings. Click on a toolbar name todisplay it and make it active. Active toolbars are indicated by highlighting or a check mark next to
the toolbar name.

Draw toolbars available
3D-Objects
3D-Settings
Align Objects
Comments
Distribute Selection
Drawing
Edit Points
Find
Fontwork
Form Controls

Form Design
Form Navigation
Gluepoints
Image
InsertLegacy Circles and Ovals
Legacy Rectangles
Line and Filling
Master View
Media Playback

Options
Redaction
Standard
Standard (Viewing Mode)
Table
Text
Text Formatting
Transformations
Zoom

Note
Some toolbars, although selected in View > Toolbars on the Menu bar, do notdisplay until an object of the correct type is selected. For example, the Image
toolbar only displays when an image is selected.

Closing toolbars
To close a toolbar, use one of the following methods:• Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and deselect the toolbar.
• Right-click on a tool on a toolbar and select Close Toolbar from the context menu.
• Click on the X in the right corner of the title bar of a floating toolbar.

Moving toolbars
Docked toolbars
By default, some toolbars are docked into position in the Draw main window. For example, in the
Draw main window, the Standard toolbar is docked at the top and the Drawing toolbar on the left
side. Docked toolbars can be undocked and moved to a new docked position on the main
window or left as a floating toolbar. Before moving a toolbar, the toolbar must be unlocked.

344 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Figure 335: Toolbar handles highlighted
1) Move the cursor over the small vertical handle at the left end of the toolbar (highlighted in
Figure 335). The cursor changes to a moving cursor for the computer system and setup.
2) Click and drag the toolbar to a new location. This can be a new docked position or a
floating toolbar. A hashed border appears around the toolbar indicating the toolbar
position as it is dragged.
3) Release the toolbar when the required position is reached.

Note
If the small vertical bar is not visible at the left end of a docked toolbar, then the
toolbar is locked into position. A docked toolbar must be unlocked before it can be
moved. See “Locking toolbars” on page 346 for more information.

Floating toolbars
To move a floating toolbar, click on the title bar and drag it to a new floating location. Release thetoolbar when it is in the required position. A floating toolbar does not have to be positioned on the
Draw main window for it to function.

Floating sub-toolbars
Some tools on a toolbar have a triangle ▼ to the right of the tool indicating that more tools areavailable on a sub-toolbar, for example Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar. Sub-toolbars canbe turned into floating toolbars and moved into a new position as follows:
1) Move the cursor over the horizontal handle at the top of the sub-toolbar (highlighted in
Figure 336). The cursor changes to the moving cursor used for the computer system andsetup.
2) Click and drag the sub-toolbar to a new location creating a floating sub-toolbar.
3) Release the sub-toolbar when the required position is reached.
4) To close the floating sub-toolbar, right-click on the triangle ▼ in the sub-toolbar title bar
and select Close Toolbar from the context menu.
5) Alternatively, click on the X in the right corner of the title bar of a floating sub-toolbar

Figure 336: Creating floating sub-toolbar

Appendix B, Toolbars | 345

Docking a floating toolbar
To dock a floating toolbar, use one of the following methods:• Click on the title bar and drag it to the top, bottom, left side, or right side of the main
window. When the toolbar reaches a docking position, a hashed border appears at thedocked position. Release the toolbar and it is docked in the required position.
• Right-click on the toolbar and select Dock Toolbar from the context menu. The toolbar
moves into a docked position. If the position is not suitable, move the toolbar to a new
docked position.
• To dock all floating toolbars that are active, right-click on the toolbar and select Dock All
Toolbars from the context menu.

Locking toolbars
Docked toolbars
When a toolbar has been docked into position, the toolbar is locked into position preventing thetoolbar from becoming a floating toolbar.
• To lock a toolbar into a docked position, right-click in a blank area on the toolbar andselect Lock Toolbar Position in the context menu. The small vertical or horizontal bar at
the left end or top of the toolbar disappears indicating that the toolbar is locked.
• To unlock a toolbar, right-click in a blank area on the toolbar and click on Lock Toolbar
Position in the context menu. A small vertical or horizontal bar appears at the left end or
top of the toolbar indicating that the toolbar is unlocked. This bar is also is used to movethe toolbar.

Notes
The Lock Toolbar Position is used for locking and unlocking a toolbar, acting
like an on/off switch.
Some toolbars cannot be docked or locked into position. This is indicated by the
options Dock Toolbar and/or Lock Toolbar Position being grayed out making
both options unavailable.

Locking toolbars and sub-toolbars
To prevent ALL toolbars and sub-toolbars from becoming floating toolbars, all toolbars andsub-toolbars are locked as follows:
1) Save the drawing that is open in Draw.
2) Go to View > Toolbars on the Menu bar and select Lock Toolbars from the context
menu.
3) Select Restart Now in the Restart LibreOffice dialog that opens to activate the Lock
Toolbars option.
4) To unlock all toolbars and sub-toolbars so they can be repositioned, repeat Steps 1 thru 3.
The Lock Toolbars option is an on/off switch.

Note
Using the Lock Toolbars option affects all toolbars and sub-toolbars available inLibreOffice modules.

346 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Editing toolbars
When LibreOffice is installed on a computer, it includes a set of toolbars suitable for each
LibreOffice component. Each toolbar has a default set of visible tools. Tools can be added ordeleted, and toolbars can be customized.

Adding tools
1) Right-click in a blank area on a toolbar, or click on the triangle ▼ on the right of thetoolbar title bar.
2) Select Visible Buttons from the context menu to display a list of available tools.
3) Click on the tool required and the tool appears in the toolbar. The list of available tools
closes automatically. A check mark next to the tool, or highlighting around the tool,
indicates that the tool is already installed on the toolbar.

Note
When adding tools using Visible Buttons, the tool is added to the toolbar at thesame position as the tool appears in the Visible Buttons list. That is, the top toolin Visible Buttons list appears at the left end of the toolbar and the bottom tool in
the list appears at the right end of the toolbar.

Removing tools
1) Right-click in a blank area on a toolbar, or click on the triangle ▼ on the right of thetoolbar title bar.
2) Select Visible Buttons from the context menu to display a list of available tools.
3) Click on the tool no longer required to deselect it and the tool is removed from the toolbar.
The highlighting or check mark is also removed. The list of available tools closes
automatically.

Customizing toolbars
Extra tools and commands that are not available in Visible Buttons can be added to a toolbar
using customization (View > Toolbars > Customize on the Menu bar). Customization also
allows the creation of new toolbars if a specific set of tools are required for a specific task. For
information on customizing toolbars, see the Getting Started Guide.

Toolbars• The number of tools visible on a toolbar depend on the computer setup and operating
system being used to create a drawing.
• The tools displayed on the toolbars in this appendix are examples only. Actual tools
displayed depend on computer setup, operating system and user preferences.
• The tools already installed on a toolbar are indicated in Visible Buttons either by the toolicon being highlighted or by a check mark. This indication depends on computer setup
and computer operating system being used.
• On some toolbars, tool icons may have a triangle ▼ to the right of the icon. Click on thistriangle to open a list of options, toolbar, or sub-toolbar.
• Some tools also have the option of using a keyboard shortcut instead of clicking on thetool. For a full list of keyboard shortcuts that are available in Draw, see Appendix A,
Keyboard Shortcuts.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 347

3D-Objects
The 3D-Objects toolbar (Figure 337) provides tools for creating 3D objects. Go to View >Toolbars > 3D-Objects on the Menu bar. Alternatively, click on the triangle ▼ next to the 3DObjects icon displayed on the Drawing toolbar to open a submenu giving access to the available
3D objects.

Figure 337: 3D-Objects toolbar
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the 3D-Objects toolbar are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Cube
SphereCylinder
Cone

5)
6)
7)
8)

Pyramid
Torus
Shell
Half Sphere

3D-Settings
The 3D-Settings toolbar (Figure 338) and its tools only become active when an object has been
converted to 3D using Toggle Extrusion and the converted object is selected.

Figure 338: 3D-Settings toolbar
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the 3D-Settings toolbar are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Toggle Extrusion
Tilt Down
Tilt Up
Tilt Left
Tilt Right

6)
7)
8)
9)
10)

Depth
Direction
Lighting
Surface
3D Color

The following tools on this toolbar have a triangle ▼ on the right of the icon. Click on this triangle
to open a drop-down menu giving access to various options as follows:• Depth –– 3D extrusion depth – 0cm; 1cm; 2.5cm; 5cm; 10cm; Infinity; Custom. The
measurement unit depends on the settings in Tools > Options > LibreOffice Draw >General (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences > LibreOffice Draw > General).
• Direction –– 3D extrusion direction and type – Parallel; Perspective.
•

Lighting –– lighting direction and lighting level of 3D extrusion – Bright; Normal; Dim.
• Surface –– surface type of 3D extrusion – Wire Frame; Matt; Plastic; Metal.
• 3D Color –– color of 3D extrusion. Select a color from one of the available color palettes.

348 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

The Comments toolbar (Figure 340) provides tool for adding, deletion, and navigation ofcomments in a drawing. To use comments, it is recommended to add the name and initials of allusers in Tools > Options > LibreOffice > User Data (macOS LibreOffice > Preferences >LibreOffice > User Data) so that comments can be easily identified.
The tools available in Visible Buttons
for theComments
Figure 339:
Align
Objects toolbar
toolbar are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
Comment
Align
Objects2)
Previous Comment

4)5)Delete Comment
Delete All Comments

3) Align
Next
Comment
The
Objects
toolbar (Figure 339) provides tools for aligning several objects in a drawing to
improve the visual impact of a drawing.

The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Align Objects toolbar are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
Figure 341: Distribute Selection toolbar

Distribute Selection
The Distribute Selection toolbar (Figure 341) provides tools for distributing three or more selected
objects evenly along the horizontal axis or vertical axis. Also, the spacing between objects can beevenly distributed.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Distribute Selection toolbar are numbered from left
to right when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Horizontally Left
Horizontally Center
Horizontally Spacing
Horizontally Right

5)
6)
7)
8)

Vertically Top
Vertically Center
Vertically Spacing
Vertically Bottom

Figure 342: Drawing toolbar

Drawing
The Drawing toolbar (Figure 342) provides the majority of the tools normally used to creategraphic objects in a drawing. By default, this toolbar is normally docked on the left side of theWorkspace.
Some tool shapes on the Drawing toolbar change depending on the last tool that had previously
been selected and used.
• Click on the triangle ▼ to the right of a tool to open a pop-up toolbar. Select the required
shape to add to a drawing.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 349

• To create a sub-toolbar, click and drag at the top of the pop-up toolbar to an empty areaon the main window. See “Sub-toolbars” on page 361 for more information on the tools
available for sub-toolbars.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Drawing toolbar are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)

SelectZoom & Pan
Zoom
Text Box
Vertical Text
Insert Fontwork
Line Color
Fill ColorLine
Rectangle
EllipseLine Ends with Arrow
Lines and Arrows
Curves and Polygons
Connectors
Basic Shapes
Symbol Shapes
Block Arrows (Arrow Shapes in Visible
Buttons))
Flowchart (Flowchart Shapes in Visible
Buttons)
Callouts (Callout Shapes in Visible Buttons)

21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
28)
29)
30)
31)
32)
33)
34)
35)
36)
37)
38)
39)

Stars and Banners (Star Shapes in Visible
Buttons)
3D Objects
RotateFlip
Align Objects
Arrange
Select at least three objects to distribute(Distribution in visible Buttons)
Shadow
Crop Image (Crop in Visible Buttons)
FilterPoints (Edit Points in Visible Buttons)
Show Gluepoints Function (Gluepoints in
Visible Buttons)
To Curve
To Polygon
To 3D
T0 3D Rotation Object
Toggle Extrusion
InsertControls

Figure 343: Edit Points toolbar

Edit Points
The Edit Points toolbar (Figure 353) provides tools for editing the points of a curve or an object
that has been converted to a curve. The toolbar only becomes active when an object is selected
and one of the following methods is used to open the toolbar:• Click on Edit Points on the Drawing toolbar.
• Use the keyboard shortcut F8.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Edit Points toolbar are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

Edit Points
Move Points
Insert Points
Delete Points
Convert to Curve
Close Bezier

350 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

7)
8)
9)
10)
11)

Split Curve
Corner Point
Smooth Transition
Symmetric Transition
Eliminate Points

Figure 344: Find toolbar

Find
The Find toolbar (Figure 354) opens by default in the bottom left corner of the Draw main
window. This toolbar is normally docked at the bottom left of the Draw main window above theStatus Bar. However, it can be undocked and made into a floating toolbar.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Find toolbar are numbered from left to right when
installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Close Find Bar
Find Values
Find Previous
Find Next

5)
6)
7)
8)

Find All
Match Case
Find and Replace[place holder for message]

Figure 345: Fontwork toolbar

Fontwork
The Fontwork toolbar (Figure 355) is used creating and formatting graphical text objects in a
drawing. This toolbar only becomes active when a Fontwork graphical text object in the drawing
has been selected.
Some tools on the Fontwork toolbar have a triangle ▼ to the right of the tool. Click on the triangle
to open a pop-up toolbar or drop-down option list.
•

Fontwork Shape –– select a shape for the Fontwork graphical text object from available
options.

•

Fontwork Alignment –– select paragraph alignment from available options.

•

Fontwork Character Spacing –– select character spacing from available options.

The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Fontwork toolbar are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)

Insert Fontwork Text
Fontwork Shape
Fontwork Same Letter Heights

4)
5)
6)

Fontwork Alignment
Fontwork Character Spacing
Toggle Extrusion

Figure 346: Form Controls toolbar

Appendix B, Toolbars | 351

Form Controls
The Form Controls toolbar (Figure 356) provides the tools for creating an interactive form
allowing controls to be added to a form in a drawing (for example a button that opens anotherdrawing or document).
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Form Controls toolbar are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)

SelectDesign Mode
Toggle Form Control Wizards
Form Design
Control Properties
Form Properties
Label
Text Box
Check Box
Option Button
List Box
Combo Box
Push Button
Image Button

15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)

Formatted Field
Date Field
Numerical Field
Group BoxTime Field
Currency Field
Pattern Field
Table Control
Navigation Bar
Image Control
File Selection
Spin Button
Scrollbar

Figure 347: Form Design toolbar

Form Design
The Form Design toolbar (Figure 357) allows editing of a form in Design Mode. Controls of theform cannot be activated, or its contents edited, when in Design Mode. However, the positionand size of the controls can be changed, properties edited, added or deleted in Design Mode.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Form Design toolbar are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)

SelectControl Properties
Form Properties
Position and Size
Form Navigator
Activation Order
Add Field
Automatic Control Focus
Bring to Front
Send to Back

Figure 348: Form Navigation toolbar

352 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)

Group
UngroupEnter Group
Exit Group
Align Objects
Open in Design Mode
Display Grid
Snap to Grid
Helplines While Moving

Form Navigation
The Form Navigation toolbar (Figure 358) provides tools for editing a database table orcontrolling the data view. It is normally displayed at the bottom of a document that contains fields
linked to a database. It is only active when forms are connected to a database and Figure 358
displays an inactivate toolbar.
The Form Navigation toolbar allows movement within records as well as inserting and deleting
records. If data is saved in a form, the changes are transferred to the database. This toolbar also
provides tools providing sort, filter, and search functions for data records.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Form Navigation toolbar are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)

Find Record
RecordAbsolute Record
Text -> Record
Total No. of Records
First Record
Previous Record
Next Record
Last Record
New Record
Save Record
Undo: Data entry

13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)

Delete Record
RefreshRefresh Control
Sort
Sort Ascending
Sort Descending
AutoFilter
Apply Filter
Form-Based Filters
Reset Filter/Sort
Data source as Table

Figure 349: Gluepoints toolbar

Gluepoints
The Gluepoints toolbar (Figure 359) provides tools for inserting a gluepoint or modifying theproperties of a gluepoint. A gluepoint is a point where a connector is attached to an object. By
default, LibreOffice automatically places a gluepoint at the center of each side of the bounding
rectangle for every object created.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Gluepoints toolbar are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

Insert Gluepoint
Exit Direction Left
Exit Direction Top
Exit Direction Right
Exit Direction Bottom
Gluepoint Relative

7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)

Gluepoint Horizontal Left
Gluepoint Horizontal Center
Gluepoint Horizontal Right
Gluepoint Vertical Top
Gluepoint Vertical Center
Gluepoint Vertical Bottom

Figure 350: Image toolbar

Appendix B, Toolbars | 353

ImageThe Image toolbar (Figure 350) provides tools for editing, modifying, align, repositioning andresizing images. The toolbar only becomes active and available when an image is selected in a
drawing. The Image toolbar automatically replaces the Line and Filling toolbar when it activates.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Image toolbar are numbered from left to right when
installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)

Position and Size
Align Objects
Left
Centered
Right
Top
Center
BottomArrange
Bring to Front
Bring Forward
Send Backward
Send to BackIn Front of Object
Behind Object
Reverse

17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
28)
29)
30)
31)
32)

Line Style
Line WidthLine Color
Area Style/Filling
Fill Color
Shadow
FilterImage Mode
Crop
Vertically
Horizontally
Transformations
Transparency
Color
Line
Area

Figure 351: Insert toolbar

InsertThe Insert toolbar (Figure 351) provides tools for inserting objects into a drawing such as table,
images, media, formulas, charts, and OLE objects.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Insert toolbar are numbered from left to right when
installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

New Page
Floating Frame
Insert Page from File
Table
Image

6)
7)
8)
9)

Insert Audio or Video (Media in Visible
Buttons)
Formula Object
Chart
OLE Object

Figure 352: Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar

Legacy Circles and Ovals
The Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar (Figure 352) provides tools for inserting different types ofcircles and ovals into a drawing.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Legacy Circles and Ovals toolbar are numberedfrom left to right when installed on the toolbar.
354 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)

Insert Ellipse
CircleEllipse Pie
Circle Pie
Ellipse Segment
Circle Segment
Ellipse, Unfilled

8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)

Circle, Unfilled
Ellipse Pie, Unfilled
Circle Pie, Unfilled
Ellipse Segment, Unfilled
Circle Segment, Unfilled
Arc
Circle Arc

Figure 353: Legacy Rectangles toolbar

Legacy Rectangles
The Legacy Rectangles toolbar (Figure 353) provides tools to insert different types of rectangles
and squares into a drawing.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Legacy Rectangles toolbar are numbered from left
to right when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Insert Rectangle
SquareRectangle, Rounded
Rounded Square

5)
6)
7)
8)

Rectangle, Unfilled
Square, Unfilled
Rounded Rectangle, Unfilled
Rounded Square, Unfilled

Figure 354: Line and Filling toolbar

Line and Filling
The Line and Filling toolbar (Figure 354) provides tools and drop-down lists for editing lines,
arrows, and object borders. Available tools depends on the type of object selected for editing.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Line and Filling toolbar are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)

Position and Size
Align Objects
Left
Centered
Right
Top
Center
BottomArrange
Bring to Front
Bring Forward
Send Backward
Send to Back

14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)

In Front of Object
Behind Object
ReverseLine Style
Line WidthLine Color
Area Style/Filling
Fill Color
ShadowArrow Style
Vertically
Horizontally
Transformations

Appendix B, Toolbars | 355

27)
28)
29)
30)
31)

Line
Area
3D Effects
Image Map
Animation

32)
33)
34)
35)

Interaction
Show the Styles Sidebar
Display Grid
Helplines While Moving

Figure 355: Master View toolbar

Master View
The Master View toolbar (Figure 355) provides tools for creating, renaming, deleting, and closing
the master view. This toolbar is only active when Draw is in master view mode.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Master View toolbar are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)

New Master
Rename Master

3)
4)

Delete Master
Close Master View

Figure 356: Media Playback toolbar

Media Playback
The Media Playback toolbar (Figure 356) provides the standard tools required for inserting,viewing, playing, and listening to audio and video files. The toolbar only becomes active when amedia file is selected. Draw supports many different media formats depending on the computer
operating system being used.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Media Playback toolbar are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Insert Audio or Video
Play
Pause
Stop
RepeatFigure 357: Options toolbar

356 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

6)
7)
8)
9)

Position
Mute
VolumeView

Options
The Options toolbar (Figure 357) provides tools for editing various settings for drawings. For
example, how objects snap to the grid when being moved or resized.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Options toolbar are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)

Rotation Mode after Clicking Object
Display Grid
Display Snap Guides
Helplines While Moving
Snap to Grid
Snap to Snap Guides
Snap to Page Margins

8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)

Snap to Object Borders
Snap to Object Points
Allow Quick Editing
Select Text Area Only
Double-click to edit Text
Modify Object with Attributes
Exit All Groups

Redaction
The Redaction toolbar (Figure 358) is used to block portions of a drawing when protecting
sensitive information. Redaction helps enterprises and organizations to comply with regulations
on confidentiality or privacy.
When a redacted drawing is exported, any redacted portions are removed from the drawing andreplaced by redaction blocks of pixels. This prevents any attempt in restoring or copying theoriginal contents. A redacted drawing is often exported as PDF for publication or sharing.

Figure 358: Redaction toolbar
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Redaction toolbar are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)

Rectangle
Freeform
Redacted Export (White)

4)
5)

Redacted Export (Black)
PDF

Figure 359: Standard toolbar

Standard
The Standard toolbar (Figure 359) is common to all LibreOffice components providing the mostcommon tools used for creating and editing documents using LibreOffice. The Standard toolbar
differs between LibreOffice components to allow for different toolsets used in creating different
types of documents.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Standard toolbar are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Load URL
New
Templates
Open
Open Remote

6)
7)
8)
9)
10)

Save
Save As
Email
Edit Mode
ExportAppendix B, Toolbars | 357

11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
28)
29)
30)
31)
32)
33)
34)

Export Directly as PDF
Print Directly
Print
Cut
Copy
Paste
Clone Formatting (Clone in Visible Buttons)
Clear
Undo
Redo
Spelling
Auto Spellcheck
Display Grid (Grid in Visible Buttons)
Helplines While Moving
Zoom & Pan
Object Zoom
Zoom
Table
Insert Image (Image in Visible Buttons)
Insert Chart (Chart in Visible Buttons)
Insert Text Box (Text Box in Visible Buttons)
Insert Special Characters (Symbol in Visible
Buttons)
Vertical Text
Insert Fontwork Text

35)
36)
37)
38)
39)
40)
41)
42)
43)
44)
45)
46)
47)
48)
49)
50)
51)
52)
53)
54)
55)
56)
57)
58)

Insert Hyperlink (Hyperlink in Visible Buttons)
Transformations
Flip
Position and Size
Align Objects
Distribution
Shadow
Crop
Filter3D Effects
Edit Points
Gluepoints
Toggle Extrusion
Show Draw Functions (Draw Functions in
Visible Buttons)
LibreOffice Help
What’s That
Go to First Page
Go to Previous Page
Go to Next Page
Go to Last Page
Move Page to Start
Move Page Up
Move Page Down
Move Page to End

Figure 360: Standard (Viewing Mode) toolbar

Standard (Viewing Mode)
The Standard (Viewing Mode) toolbar (Figure 360) provides tools for saving, editing, anddistributing a drawing.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Standard (Viewing Mode) toolbar are numberedfrom left to right when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Save As
6)
Toggle Edit Mode (Edit Mode in Visible
7)
Buttons)8)
Toggle Read Only Mode (Read Only Mode in 9)
Visible Buttons)
10)
Attach to Email (Email in Visible Buttons)
11)
Export Directly as PDF

358 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

Export as EPUB (EPUB in Visible Buttons)
Print Directly
Print
Copy
Find and Replace
Zoom

Figure 361: Table toolbar

Table
The Table toolbar (Figure 361) provides tools and options for editing and formatting a table
inserted into a drawing. This toolbar only becomes active when a table is selected.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Table toolbar are numbered from left to right when
installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)

Table
Border Style
Border Color
Borders (Shift to overwrite)
Area Style/Filling
Fill Color
Merge Cells
Split Cells
Optimize
Align Top (Top in Visible Buttons)
Center Vertically (Center in Visible Buttons)
Align Bottom (Bottom in Visible Buttons)

13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)

Insert Row Above
Insert Row Below
Insert Column Before
Insert Column After
Delete Row
Delete Column
Delete Table
Select Table
Select Column
Select Row
Table Design
Table Properties

Figure 362: Text Formatting toolbar

Text Formatting
The Text Formatting toolbar (Figure 362) provides tools for formatting text and alignmentcommands. This toolbar becomes active when text in a text box or graphic object has been
selected and it automatically replaces the Line and Filling toolbar.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Text Formatting toolbar are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Font Name
Font Size
Increase Font Size (Increase in Visible
Buttons)
Decrease Font Size (Decrease in Visible
Buttons)

5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)

Bold
ItalicUnderline
Double Underline
StrikethroughOverline

Appendix B, Toolbars | 359

11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)

Superscript
Subscript
Toggle Shadow (Shadow in Visible Buttons)
Apply outline attribute to font. Not all fonts
implement this attribute. (Outline Font
Effect in Visible Buttons)
Clear
lowercase
UPPERCASE
Small capitals
Font Color
Character Highlighting Color
Toggle Unordered List (Unordered List in
Visible Buttons)
Toggle Ordered List (Ordered List in Visible
Buttons)
Outline Format
Align Left (Left in Visible Buttons)
Align Center (Center in Visible Buttons)

26)
27)
28)
29)
30)
31)
32)
33)
34)
35)
36)
37)
38)
39)
40)
41)

Align Right (Right in Visible Buttons)
Justified
Align Top (Top in Visible Buttons)
Center Vertically (Center in Visible Buttons)
Align Bottom (Bottom in Visible Buttons)
Set Line Spacing (Line Spacing in Visible
Buttons)
Character Spacing
Increase Paragraph Spacing (Increase in
Visible Buttons)
Decrease Paragraph Spacing (Decrease in
Visible Buttons)
Text direction from left to right
Text direction from top to bottom
Left-To-Right
Right-To-Left
Select All
Character
Paragraph

Figure 363: Transformations toolbar

Transformations
The Transformations toolbar (Figure 363) provides tools for modifying the shape, orientation, or
fill of selected objects.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Transformations toolbar are numbered from left toright when installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

RotateFlip
In 3D Rotation Object
Set in Circle (perspective)
Set to circle (slant)

6)
7)
8)

DistortInteractive transparency tool (Transparency
tool in Visible Buttons)
Interactive gradient tool (Gradient tool in
Visible Buttons)

Figure 364: Zoom toolbar

Zoom
The Zoom toolbar (Figure 364) provides tools for reducing or enlarging the screen display of thecurrent drawing.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Zoom toolbar are numbered from left to right when
installed on the toolbar.
1)
2)

Zoom In
Zoom Out360 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

3)
4)

100%
Zoom Previous

5)
6)
7)
8)

Zoom Next
Entire Page
Page Width
Optimal View (Optimal in Visible Buttons)

9)
10)
11)

Object Zoom
Zoom & Pan
Shift

Sub-toolbars

Figure 365: 3D-Objects sub-toolbar

3D-Objects
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of 3D-Objects on the Drawing toolbar opens the 3DObjects sub-toolbar (Figure 365). Select the required 3D object for insertion into a drawing.

Note
The 3D-Objects sub-toolbar is identical to the 3D-Objects toolbar available atView > Toolbars on the Menu bar.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the 3D-Objects sub-toolbar are numbered from left toright when installed on the sub-toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Cube
SphereCylinder
Cone

5)
6)
7)
8)

Pyramid
Torus
Shell
Half Sphere

Figure 366: Basic Shapes sub-toolbar

Basic Shapes
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Basic Shapes on the Drawing toolbar opens the Basic
Shapes sub-toolbar (Figure 366). Select the required basic shape for insertion into a drawing.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Basic Shapes sub-toolbar are numbered from left
to right when installed on the sub-toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)

Rectangle
Rectangle, Rounded
SquareSquare, Rounded
Parallelogram
Trapezoid
EllipseCircleCircle Pie
Circle Segment
Arc
Block Arc

13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)

Isosceles Triangle
Right Triangle
DiamondRegular Pentagon
HexagonOctagon
CylinderCube
Folded Corner
Cross
Frame
Ring

Appendix B, Toolbars | 361

Figure 367: Block Arrows sub-toolbar

Block Arrows
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Block Arrows on the Drawing toolbar opens the Block
Arrows sub-toolbar (Figure 367). Select the required block arrow for insertion into a drawing.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Block Arrows sub-toolbar are numbered from left toright when installed on the sub-toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)

Right Arrow
Left Arrow
Down Arrow
Up Arrow
Left and Right Arrow
Up and Down Arrow
Circular Arrow
S-shaped Arrow
Split Arrow
Right or Left Arrow
4-way Arrow
Corner Right Arrow
Chevron

14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)

Pentagon
Striped Right Arrow
Up, right and Down Arrow
Notched Right Arrow
Up and Right Arrow
Right Arrow Callout
Left Arrow Callout
Down Arrow Callout
Up Arrow Callout
Left and Right Arrow Callout
Up and Down Arrow Callout
4-way Arrow Callout
Up and Right Arrow Callout

Figure 368: Callouts sub-toolbar

Callouts
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Callouts on the Drawing toolbar to open the Callouts
sub-toolbar (Figure 368). Select the required callout for insertion into a drawing.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Callouts sub-toolbar are numbered from left to rightwhen installed on the sub-toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Rectangular Callout
Rounded Rectangular Callout
Round Callout
Cloud

362 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

5)
6)
7)

Line Callout 1
Line Callout 2
Line Callout 3

Figure 369: Color sub-toolbar

Color
The Color sub-toolbar (Figure 369) provides tools for editing the color properties of a selected
object. After selecting an image or graphic to open the Image toolbar, click on Color on the
Image toolbar opening the Color sub-toolbar.
The tools available on the Color sub-toolbar are as follows:• Red — specifies the proportion of red RGB color components for the selected graphic
object. Values from -100% (no red) to +100% (full red) are possible.
• Green — specifies the proportion of green RGB color components for the selected
graphic object. Values from -100% (no green) to +100% (full green) are possible.
• Blue — specifies the proportion of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic.
Values from -100% (no blue) to +100% (full blue) are possible.
• Brightness — specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object. Values from 100% (only black) to +100% (only white) are possible.
• Contrast — specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image. Values from 100% (no contrast at all) to +100% (full contrast) are possible.
• Gamma — specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects
the brightness of the mid-tone values. Values from 0.10 (minimum Gamma) to 10(maximum Gamma) are possible.

Figure 370: Connectors sub-toolbar

Connectors
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Connectors on the Drawing toolbar opens theConnectors sub-toolbar (Figure 370). Select the required connector for insertion into a drawing.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 363

The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Connectors sub-toolbar are numbered from left toright when installed on the sub-toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)

Connector Ends with Arrow
Straight Connector Ends with Arrow
Curved Connector Ends with Arrow
Line Connector Ends with Arrow
Connector
Straight Connector
Curved Connector
Line Connector
Connector Starts with Arrow
Straight Connector starts with Arrow
Curved Connector Starts with Arrow
Line Connector Starts Arrow

13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)

Connector Ends with Circle
Straight Connector Ends with Circle
Curved Connector Ends with Circle
Line Connector Ends with Circle
Connector Starts with Circle
Straight Connector starts with Circle
Curved Connector Starts with Circle
Line Connector Starts with Circle
Connector with Circles
Straight Connector with Circle
Curved Connector with Circle
Line Connector with Circle

Figure 371: Curves and Polygons sub-toolbar

Curves and Polygons
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Curves and Polygons on the Drawing toolbar opens theCurves and Polygons sub-toolbar (Figure 371). Select the required curve or polygon for insertion
into a drawing.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Curves and Polygons sub-toolbar are numberedfrom left to right when installed on the sub-toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Curve, Filled
Polygon, Filled
Polygon (45°), Filled
Freeform Line, Filled

5)
6)
7)
8)

Curve
PolygonPolygon (45°)
Freeform Line

Figure 372: Flowchart sub-toolbar

Flowchart
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Flowchart on the Drawing toolbar opens the Flowchart
sub-toolbar (Figure 372). Select the required flowchart shape for insertion into a drawing.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Flowchart sub-toolbar are numbered from left toright when installed on the sub-toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)

Flowchart: Process
Flowchart: Alternate Process
Flowchart: Decision
Flowchart: Data
Flowchart: Predefined Process
Flowchart: Internal Storage
Flowchart: Document
Flowchart: Multidocument
Flowchart: Terminator
Flowchart: Preparation
Flowchart: Manual Input

364 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)

Flowchart: Manual Operation
Flowchart: Connector
Flowchart: Off-page Connector
Flowchart: Card
Flowchart: Punched Tape
Flowchart: Summing Junction
Flowchart: Or
Flowchart: Collate
Flowchart: Sort
Flowchart: Extract
Flowchart: Merge

23)
24)
25)

Flowchart: Stored Data
Flowchart: Delay
Flowchart: Sequential Access

26)
27)
28)

Flowchart: Magnetic DiscFlowchart: Direct Access Storage
Flowchart: Display

Figure 373: Image Filter sub-toolbar

Image Filter
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Filter on the Image toolbar opens the Image Filter
sub-toolbar (Figure 373). Select the required filter to change how an image appears on thedisplay.
The filters available on the Image Filter sub-toolbar are as follows:• Invert — inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of agreyscale image. Apply the filter again to revert the effect.
• Smooth — softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.
• Sharpen — sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter.
• Remove Noise — removes noise by applying a median filter.
• Solarization — opens a dialogue box for defining solarization. Solarization refers to aneffect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photodevelopment. The colors become partly inverted.
• Aging — all pixels are set to their gray values, and then the green and blue color
channels are reduced by the amount specified. The red color channel is not changed.
• Posterize — opens a dialogue box to determine the number of poster colors. This effectis based on the reduction of the number of colors. It makes photos look like paintings.
• Pop Art — converts an image to a pop-art format.
• Charcoal Sketch — displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image
are drawn in black, and the original colors are suppressed.
• Relief — displays a dialogue box for creating reliefs. Selecting the position of theimaginary light source determines the type of shadow created, and how the graphic
image looks in relief.
• Mosaic — joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color. The
larger the individual rectangles are, the fewer details the graphic image has.

Figure 374: Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar

Lines and Arrows
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Lines and Arrows on the Drawing toolbar opens theLines and Arrows sub-toolbar (Figure 374). Select the required line or arrow for insertion into adrawing.

Appendix B, Toolbars | 365

The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Lines and Arrows sub-toolbar are numbered fromleft to right when installed on the sub-toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Line Ends with Arrow
Line with Circle/Arrow
Line with Square/Arrow
Line with Arrows
Line Starts with Arrow

6)
7)
8)
9)
10)

Line with Arrow/Circle
Line with Arrow/Square
Insert Line
Dimension Line
Line (45°)

Figure 375: Stars and Banners sub-toolbar

Stars and Banners
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Stars and Banners on the Drawing toolbar opens theStars and Banners sub-toolbar (Figure 375). Select the required star or arrow for insertion into adrawing.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Stars and Banners sub-toolbar are numbered fromleft to right when installed on the sub-toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

4-Point Star
5-Point Star
6-Point Star
8-Point Star
12-Point Star
24-Point Star

7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)

Explosion
Vertical Scroll
Horizontal Scroll
Signet
Doorplate
6-Point Star, Concave

Figure 376: Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar

Symbol Shapes
Clicking on the triangle ▼ to the right of Symbol Shapes on the Drawing toolbar to open the
Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar (Figure 376). Select the required symbol shape for insertion into adrawing.
The tools available in Visible Buttons for the Symbol Shapes sub-toolbar are numbered from left
to right when installed on the sub-toolbar.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)

Smiley Face
Heart
Sun
Moon
Cloud
Lightning Bolt
FlowerProhibited
Puzzle366 | LibreOffice Draw User Guide

10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)

Square Bevel
Octagon Bevel
Diamond Bevel
Double Bracket
Left Bracket
Right Bracket
Double Brace
Left Brace
Right BraceAppendix B, Toolbars | 367